Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Shop
Manual
630E
DUMP TRUCK
SERIAL SUFFIX
AFE42-M
AFE46-U
and up
Unsafe use of this machine may cause serious injury or death. Operators and maintenance personnel must read and understand this manual before operating or maintaining this machine.
This manual should be kept in or near the machine for reference, and periodically reviewed by all
personnel who will come into contact with it.
This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp (KAC), and is not to be reproduced, used, or disclosed except in accordance with written authorization from KAC.
It is the policy of the Company to improve products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. The
Company reserves the right to make changes or add improvements at any time without incurring any obligation to install such changes on products sold previously.
Because of continuous research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication.
Customers should contact their local Komatsu distributor for information on the latest revision.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Products Warranted
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. and Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectively Komatsu) produce and/or
market products under brand names of Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak and Galion. This emissions warranty applies to new engines bearing the
Komatsu name installed in these products and used in Canada in machines designed for industrial off-highway use. This warranty applies only to
these engines produced on or after January 1, 2000. This warranty will be administered by Komatsu distribution in Canada.
2.
Coverage
Komatsu warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the engine is designed, built and equipped so as to conform, at the
time of sale by Komatsu, with all U.S. Federal emission regulations applicable at the time of manufacture and that it is free from defects in
workmanship or material which would cause it not to meet these regulations within five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first, as
measured from the date of delivery of the engine to the ultimate purchaser.
3.
Limitations
Failures, other than those resulting from defects in materials or workmanship, are not covered by this warranty. Komatsu is not responsible for
failures or damage resulting from what Komatsu determines to be abuse or neglect, including, but not limited to: operation without adequate coolant
or lubricants; over fueling; over speeding; lack of maintenance of lubricating, cooling or intake systems; improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in
or shutdown practices; unauthorized modifications of the engine. Komatsu is also not responsible for failures caused by incorrect fuel or by water,
dirt or other contaminants in the fuel. Komatsu is not responsible for non-engine repairs, downtime expense, related damage, fines, all business
costs or other losses resulting from a warrantable failure.
Produits garantis:
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. et Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectivement Komatsu) produisent et/ou font la
mise en march de produits portant les noms de marque Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak et Galion. Cette garantie sur les missions sapplique tous les
nouveaux moteurs portant le nom Komatsu, installs dans ces produits et utiliss au Canada dans des machines conues pour utilisation industrielle nonroutire. Cette garantie sapplique seulement sur les moteurs produits partir du 1er Janvier 2000. Cette garantie sera administre par la distribution de
Komatsu au Canada .
2.
Couverture:
Komatsu garantit lacheteur ultime et chaque acheteur subsquent que le moteur est conu, construit et quip en toute conformit, au moment de la vente
par Komatsu, avec toutes les Rglementations fdrales amricaines sur les missions applicables au moment de la fabrication et quil est exempt de dfauts
de construction ou de matriaux qui auraient pour effet de contrevenir ces rglementations en dedans de 5 ans ou 3000 heures dopration, mesur partir
de la date de livraison du moteur au client ultime.
3.
Limitations:
Les bris, autres que ceux rsultant de dfauts de matriaux ou de construction, ne sont pas couverts par cette Garantie. Komatsu nest pas responsable pour
bris ou dommages rsultant de ce que Komatsu dtermine comme tant de labus ou ngligence, incluant mais ne se limitant pas : lopration sans
lubrifiants ou agent refroidissants adquats; la suralimentation dessence; la survitesse; le manque dentretien des systmes de lubrification, de
refroidissement ou dentre; de pratiques non-propices dentreposage, de mise en marche, de rchauffement, de conditionnement ou darrt; les
modifications non-autorises du moteur. De plus, Komatsu nest pas responsable de bris causs par de lessence inadquate ou de leau, des salets ou autres
contaminants dans lessence. Komatsu nest pas responsable des rparations non-relies au moteur, des dpenses encourues suite aux temps darrts, des
dommages relatifs, amendes, et de tout autre cot daffaires ou autres pertes rsultant dun bris couvert par la garantie.
AVERTISSEMENT
DES BLESSURES PEUVENT RSULTER ET LA GARANTIE
SANNULER SI LES RPM DU TAUX DESSENCE OU LALTITUDE
EXCDENT LES VALEURS MAXIMALES PUBLIES POUR CE
MODLE ET SON APPLICATION.
MODLE DU MOTEUR
FAMILLE DU MOTEUR
ENGINE MODEL
SERIAL NO.
SYSTME DE
CONTROLE DES
MISSIONS DCHAPPEMENT
ENGINE FAMILY
DISPLACEMENT
EXHAUST EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM
FIRING ORDER
IN.
HP)
DPLACEMENT
LITERS
1-5-3-6-2-4
RPM
LITRES
SQUENCE DE MISE FEU
mm3/STROKE
mm3/BATTEMENT
TAUX DESSENCE ADV.
IDLE SPEED
INITIAL INJECTION
TIMING
Kw (
NO. SRIE
_____________________________________________
KOMATSU LTD.
MADE IN JAPAN
DEG. BTDC
KOMATSU LTE
FABRIQU AU JAPON
LIMITE DMISSION DE
LA FAMILLE
DATE
DE FABRICATION
FOREWORD
This Service Manual is written for use by the service technician and is designed to help the technician become fully
knowledgeable of the truck and all its systems in order to keep it running and in production. All maintenance personnel should read and understand the materials in this manual before performing maintenance and/or operational
checks on the truck. All safety notices, warnings and cautions should be understood and followed when accomplishing repairs on the truck.
The first section covers component descriptions, truck specifications and safe work practices, as well as other general information. The major portion of the manual pertains to disassembly, service and reassembly. Each major serviceable area is dealt with individually. For example: The disassembly, service and reassembly of the radiator
group is discussed as a unit. The same is true of the engine and engine accessories, and so on through the entire
mechanical detail of the truck. Disassembly should be carried only as far as necessary to accomplish needed
repairs.
The illustrations used in this manual are, at times, typical of the component shown and may not necessarily depict
a specific model.
This manual shows dimensioning of U.S. standard and metric (SI) units throughout and all references to "Right",
"Left", "Front", or "Rear" are made with respect to the operators normal seated position, unless specifically stated
otherwise.
Standard torque requirements are shown in torque charts in the general information section and individual torques
are provided in the text in bold face type, such as 100 ft.lbs. (135 N.m) torque. All torque specifications have 10%
tolerance unless otherwise specified.
A Product Identification plate is normally located on the truck frame in front of the right side front wheel and designates the Truck Model Number, Product Identification Number (vehicle serial number), and Maximum G.V.W.
(Gross Vehicle Weight) rating.
The HAULPAK Model designation consists of three numbers and one letter (i.e. 630E). The three numbers represent the basic truck model. The letter "M" designates a Mechanical drive and the letter "E" designates an Electrical
propulsion system.
The Product Identification Number (vehicle serial number) contains information which will identify the original manufacturing bill of material for this unit. This complete number will be necessary for proper ordering of many service
parts and/or warranty consideration.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is what determines the load on the drive train, frame, tires, and othercomponents. The vehicle design and application guidelines are sensitive to the total maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) and this means the total weight: the Empty Vehicle Weight + the fuel &lubricants + the payload.
To determine allowable payload:
Service all lubricants for proper level and fill fuel tank of empty truck (which includes all accessories, body liners,
tailgates, etc.) and then weigh truck.
Record this value and subtract from the GVW rating. The result is the allowable payload.
NOTE: Accumulations of mud, frozen material, etc. become a part of the GVW and reduces allowable payload. To
maximize payload and to keep from exceeding the GVW rating, these accumulations should be removed as often
as practical.
Exceeding the allowable payload will reduce expected life of truck components.
For Model 630E HAULPAK Trucks, optional heavy duty components may be required to utilize the630,000 lbs.
(286 020 kg) GVW. Contact factory if clarification is needed.
A00004 7/95
Introduction
A-1
A-2
Introduction
A00004 7/95
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
ENGINE, FUEL, COOLING AND AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
ELECTRIC SYSTEM (24 VDC. NON-PROPULSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
ELECTRIC PROPULSION AND CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
DRIVE AXLE, SPINDLES AND WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G
HYDRAIR II SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H
BRAKE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
AIR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L
OPTIONS AND SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M
OPERATORS CAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P
ALPHABETICAL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q
SYSTEM SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R
A00004 7/95
Introduction
A-3
A-4
Introduction
A00004 7/95
SECTION A
GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
A01001 02/94
Index
A1-1
NOTES
A1-2
Index
02/94 A01001
POWER STEERING
ALTERNATOR
The diesel engine drives an alternator mounted inline with the engine. The alternating current (AC) output of the alternator is rectified to direct current (DC)
and sent to the DC drive wheel motors.
BLOWER
The blower supplies cooling air for the alternator, rectifiers, and both wheel motors. The air is then
exhausted to the atmosphere through the wheel
motors.
OPERATOR'S CAB
The HAULPAK Operator's Cab has been engineered for operator comfort and to allow for efficient
and safe operation of the truck. The cab is rubber
mounted to reduce noise and vibration. It includes a
tinted safety-glass windshield and sliding side windows for excellent visibility, a deluxe interior, controls
mounted within easy reach of the operator, and an
instrument panel which provides the operator with all
instruments and gauges which are necessary to control and monitor the truck's operating systems.
A2-1
DYNAMIC RETARDING
The dynamic retarding is used to slow the truck during normal operation or control speed coming down a
grade. The dynamic retarding ability of the DC electric system is controlled by the operator through the
activation of the retarder pedal in the operators cab
and by setting the RSC (Retarder Speed Control).
Dynamic Retarding is automatically activated if truck
goes to a preset overspeed setting.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The braking system consists of an all hydraulic actuation system. Depressing the brake pedal actuates
wheel-speed single disc front brakes and armaturespeed dual disc rear brakes. The brakes can also be
activated by operating a switch on the instrument
panel as described later in this manual. The brakes
will be applied automatically if system pressure
decreases below a preset minimum.
SUSPENSION
HYDRAIR II suspension cylinders located at each
wheel provide a smooth and comfortable ride for the
operator and dampens shock loads to the chassis
during loading and operation.
A02028
A2-2
A02028
SPECIFICATIONS
The SPECIFICATIONS listed on these pages cover standard production. When Optional equipment is selected,
some of these specifications and/or capacities may change.
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Volt
SERVICE CAPACITIES
U.S. Gallons .Liters
Crankcase (Includes lube oil filters)
Number of Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-Stroke
Rated Brake HP . 1800 HP (1342 kW) @ 1900
RPM
Flywheel HP 1704 HP (1271 kW) @ 1900 RPM
Weight (Dry) . . . . . . . . . 11,210 lbs. (5085 kg)
AIR SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Pump 145 GPM (549 liters/min.) @ 1900 RPM
DYNAMIC RETARDING
Electric Dynamic Retarding. . . . . . . . Standard
Maximum Retarding . . . . 2677 HP (1996 kW)
Optional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3700 HP(2759 kW)
With . . . . . . . . Continuous Rated Blown Grids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Retarding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Retarding
A2-3
A02028
SERVICE BRAKES
TIRES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Front)(Rear)
STEERING
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
DUMP BODY
Capacity:
Struck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 yds77 m
Heaped @ 2:1 (SAE) . . . . . . .135 yds 103 m
Width (Inside) . . . . . . . . . . 20 ft. 7 in. (6.27 m)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. 8 in. (2.35 m)
Loading Height . . . . . . . . . . 18 ft. 9 in. (5.71 m)
Dumping Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
EMPTY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds . . Kilograms
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 117,150 . . . . . 53 138
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 122,650 . . . . . 55 633
Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,800 . . . . 108 771
LOADED
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 206,600 . . . . . 93 712
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 413,200 . . . . 187 424
Total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619,800 . . . . 281 136
* Not to exceed 630,000 lbs. (285 763 kg) including
options, fuel and payload.
Optional heavy duty components may be required to
utilize this Gross Vehicle Weight limit. Contact Haulpak Division if clarification is required.
All dimensions are with 101/135 cu.yd. (77/103 m3 body, 36.00 R51 tires, and 776 wheel motors.
A2-4
A02028
A03004 7/95
A3-1
7. Read and understand the contents of the Operator's Handbook. Give particular attention to
safety material and operating instructions.
Read and understand CAUTION and WARNING decals in the operator's cab.
8. Become thoroughly acquainted with all gauges,
instruments and controls. Be familiar with all
brake and steering system controls and warning
devices, road speeds, and loading capabilities,
before operating the truck.
9. Keep all unauthorized reading material out of
truck cab.
10. Dirt or trash buildup, specifically in the operator's cab, should be cleared. Do not carry tools
or supplies in cab of truck or on the deck.
11. Insure steering wheel, controls and pedals are
free of any oil, grease or mud.
12. Insure headlights, worklights and taillights are in
proper working order.
13. Insure windshield and all cab windows are clean
and unbroken. Good visibility may prevent an
accident.
14. Check operation of windshield wiper, condition
of wiper blades, and windshield washer reservoir for fluid level.
15. Insure adequate ventilation before start-up if the
truck is in an enclosure.
Exhaust fumes are dangerous!
A3-2
A03004 7/95
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DURING TRUCK OPERATION
After the truck engine is started and all systems are
functioning properly, the operator must follow all local
safety rules to insure safe machine operation.
A03004 7/95
A3-3
3. Do not move truck into or out of a building without a signal person present. Know and obey the
hand signal communications between operator
and spotter. When other machines and personnel are present, the operator should move in
and out of buildings, loading areas and through
traffic, under the direction of a signalman. Courtesy at all times is a safety precaution!
Always look to the rear before backing the
truck. Watch for and obey ground spotter's hand
signals before making any reverse movements.
Sound the warning horn (3 blasts). Spotter
should have a clear view of the total area at the
rear of the truck.
4. Check gauges and instruments frequently during operation for proper readings.
5. DO NOT leave truck unattended while engine is
running. Do not allow engine to run at "Idle" for
extended periods of time. When parking, always
apply parking brake, and park a safe distance
from other vehicles, as determined by supervisor.
6. Report immediately to supervisor any conditions on haul road, pit or dump area that may
present an operating hazard.
7. Observe all regulations pertaining to the job
site's traffic pattern. Be alert to any unusual traffic pattern. Obey the spotter's signals.
8. Match the truck speed to haul road conditions
and slow the truck in any congested area. Keep
a firm grip on steering wheel at all times.
9. Check parking brake periodically during shift.
Use parking brake ONLY for parking. Do not
use park brake for loading / dumping.
Do not attempt to apply parking brake while
truck is moving!
Do not use "Brake Lock" or "Emergency Brake"
(if equipped) for parking.
10. Check brake lock performance periodically for
safe loading and dump operation.
11. Proceed slowly on rough terrain to avoid deep
ruts or large obstacles. Avoid traveling close to
soft edges and the edge of fill area.
12. Truck operation requires concentrated effort by
the driver. Avoid distractions of any kind while
operating the truck.
13. Keep serviceable fire fighting equipment at hand.
If extinguisher is discharged, report the occurrence, so the used unit can be refilled or replaced.
LOADING
1. Pull into the loading area with caution. Remain at
a safe distance while truck ahead is being loaded.
2. Do not drive over unprotected power cables.
3. When approaching or leaving a loading area,
watch out for other vehicles and for personnel
working in the area.
4. When pulling in under a loader or shovel, follow
"Spotter" or "Shovel Operator" signals. The
truck operator may speed up loading operations
by observing the location and loading cycle of
the truck being loaded ahead, then follow a similar pattern.
5. When being loaded, operator should stay in
truck cab. Place Selector Switch in "Neutral"
and apply brake lock with engine running.
A3-4
A03004 7/95
HAULING
1. Always stay alert! If unfamiliar with the road,
drive with extreme caution.
Cab doors should remain closed at all times if
truck is in motion or unattended.
2. Obey all road signs. Operate truck so it is under
control at all times. Govern truck speed by the
road conditions, weather and visibility. Report
haul road conditions immediately. Muddy or icy
roads, pot holes or other obstructions can
present hazards.
3. When backing the truck, give back-up signal
(three blasts on the horn); when starting forward, two blasts on the horn. Sound these
alarms each time the truck is moved forward or
backward.
4. Use extreme caution when approaching a haul
road intersection. Maintain a safe distance from
oncoming vehicles.
5. Maintain a safe distance when following
another vehicle. Never approach another vehicle from the rear, in the same lane, closer than
50 ft. (15 m). When driving on a down grade,
this distance should not be less than 100 ft.
(30 m).
PASSING
1. Do not pass another truck on a hill or blind
curve!
2. Before passing, make sure the road ahead is
clear. If a disabled truck is blocking your lane,
slow down and pass with extreme caution.
3. Use only the areas designated for passing.
DUMPING
8. When operating truck in darkness, or when visibility is poor, do not move truck unless headlights are on. Do not back truck if back-up horn
or lights are inoperative. Always dim headlights
when meeting oncoming vehicles.
9. If the "Emergency Steering" light and/or "Low
Brake Pressure Warning" light (if equipped) illuminate during operation, steer the truck immediately to a safe stopping area, away from
other traffic, if possible. Refer to item 6 above.
A03004 7/95
A3-5
TOWING
4. Pull the lever to the rear to actuate hoist circuit.
(Releasing the lever anywhere during "hoist up"
will place the body in "hold" at that position.)
5. Raise engine RPM to accelerate hoist speed.
Refer to the CAUTION below.
Prior to towing a truck, many factors must be carefully considered. Serious personal injury and/or significant property damage may result if important
safety practices, procedures and preparation for
moving heavy equipment are not observed.
Do not tow the truck any faster than 5 MPH
(8 kph).
A disabled machine may be towed after the following
MINIMUM precautions have been taken.
A3-6
A03004 7/95
Any operating fluid, such as hydraulic oil, escaping under pressure can have sufficient force to
enter a person's body by penetrating the skin.
Serious injury and possibly death may result if
proper medical treatment by a physician familiar
with this injury is not received immediately.
A03004 7/95
14. Only a qualified operator or experienced maintenance personnel who are also qualified in
operation should move the truck under its own
power to the repair facility or in road testing
after repairs are complete.
A3-7
SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE
The operator must continue the use of safety precautions when preparing for parking and engine shutdown.
A3-8
A03004 7/95
A04015 1/91
A4-1
A4-2
A04015 1/91
The engine cooling system is controlled by thermostats which keep coolant temperature between 160190F (71-89C) during operation. Unless the pressure is first released, removing the radiator cap after
engine has been running for a time will result in the
hot coolant being expelled from the radiator. Serious
scalding and burning can result. The warning plate is
mounted on top of the radiator grille near the radiator
cap.
A04015 1/91
A4-3
A4-4
A04015 1/91
A warning plate is located near the HOT START connection which is attached to the back side of the front
bumper on the left side of the truck. This warning
plate states that the engine should not be started
while the optional HOT START is in operation. Operators should observe this area during Ground Level
Inspection and be certain that this option is disconnected from the truck before starting engine.
A04015 1/91
A4-5
A danger plate is attached to each suspension cylinder and steering accumulator. The plate contains
instructions for releasing internal pressure prior to
disconnecting any hydraulic lines or hardware.
The Lubrication Chart is located on the left hand side of the radiator grille. Refer to the Lubrication Section in this service manual for more complete lubrication instructions.
A4-6
A04015 1/91
Grade 5
Capscrew
Thread
Size
kg.m
1/4-20
1/4-28
5/16-18
KOMATSU engineering department does NOT recommend the use of special friction-reducing lubricants
such as, Copper Coat, Never Seize, and other similar products on the threads of standard fasteners
where standard torque values are applied.
The use of special friction-reducing lubricants will significantly alter the clamping force being applied to fasteners during the tightening process.
If special friction-reducing lubricants are used with the
Standard Torque values listed below in Table I (and
in Komatsu shop manuals), excessive stress and possible breakage of the fasteners may result.
Where Torque Tables specify Lubricated Threads for
the Standard Torque values listed, these standard
torque values are to be used with simple lithium
base chassis grease (multi-purpose EP NLGI) or a
rust- preventive grease (see list, page 1-10) on the
threads and seats, unless specified otherwise.
NOTE: Always be sure threads of fasteners and
tapped holes are free of burrs and other imperfections before assembling.
Standard torque values are not to be used when
Turn-of-the-Nut tightening procedures are recommended.
TORQUE GRADE 5
ft. lbs.
TORQUE GRADE 8
N.m
Capscrew
Thread
Size
Grade 8
TORQUE GRADE 5
TORQUE GRADE 8
N.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
ft. lbs.
kg.m
N.m
0.97
9.5
10
1.38
13.6
1.11
10.8
11
1.52
14.9
3/4-16
235
32.5
319
335
46.3
454
7/8-9
350
48.4
475
500
69.2
15
2.07
20.3
21
2.90
28
678
7/8-14
375
51.9
508
530
73.3
719
5/16-24
16
2.21
22
22
3.04
3/8-16
25
3.46
34
35
4.84
30
1.0-8
525
72.6
712
750
103.7
1017
47
1.0-12
560
77.4
759
790
109.3
3/8-24
30
4.15
41
40
1071
5.5
54
1.0-14
570
78.8
773
800
110.6
7/16-14
40
5.5
54
1085
58
8.0
79
1 1/8-7
650
89.9
881
1050
145
7/16-20
45
6.2
61
1424
62
8.57
84
1 1/8-12
700
96.8
949
1140
158
1546
1/2-13
65
88
90
12.4
122
1 1/4-7
910
125.9
1234
1480
205
2007
1/2-20
70
9.7
95
95
13.1
129
1 1/4-12
975
134.8
1322
1580
219
2142
9/16-12
90
12.4
122
125
17.3
169
1 3/8-6
1200
166
1627
1940
268
2630
9/16-18
95
13.1
129
135
18.7
183
1 3/8-12
1310
181
1776
2120
293
2874
5/8-11
125
17.3
169
175
24.2
237
1 1/2-6
1580
219
2142
2560
354
3471
5/8-18
135
18.7
183
190
26.2
258
1 1/2-12
1700
235
2305
2770
383
3756
3/4-10
220
30.4
298
310
42.8
420
A05001 12/99
A5-1
TORQUE
N.m
TORQUE
ft.lbs.
TORQUE
kg.m
1.22
M6 x1
12
M8 x 1.25
30
22
3.06
M10 x 1.5
55
40
5.61
CAPSCREW
SIZE*
TORQUE
ft. lbs.
TORQUE
N.m
TORQUE
kg.m
M12 x 1.75
95
70
9.69
0.250 - 20
12
16
1.7
M14 x 2
155
114
15.81
0.312 - 18
24
33
3.3
M16 x 2
240
177
24.48
0.375 - 16
42
57
5.8
M20 x 2.25
465
343
47.43
0.438 -14
70
95
9.7
M24 x 3
800
590
81.6
0.500 -13
105
142
14.5
M30 x 3.5
1600
1180
163.2
0.562 - 12
150
203
20.7
M36 x 4
2750
2028
280.5
0.625 - 11
205
278
28.3
0.750 - 10
360
488
49.7
0.875 - 9
575
780
79.4
This table represents standard values only. Do not use these values to replace torque values which are specified in assembly
instructions.
1.000 - 8
860
1166
119
1.000 - 12
915
1240
126
1.125 - 7
1230
1670
170
1.125 - 12
1330
1800
184
1.250 - 7
1715
2325
237
1.250 - 12
1840
2495
254
1.375 - 6
2270
3080
313
1.375 - 12
2475
3355
342
1.500 - 6
2980
4040
411
1.500 - 12
3225
4375
445
A5-2
12/99 A05001
TABLE IV.
TORQUE CHART FOR JIC 37 SWIVEL NUTS
WITH OR WITHOUT O-RING SEALS
TABLE VI.
TORQUE CHART FOR
O-RING BOSS FITTINGS
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
0.125
0.312 24
4 1
0.125
0.312 24
4 2
0.188
0.375 24
8 3
0.188
0.375 24
5 2
0.250
0.438 20
12 3
0.250
0.438 20
8 3
0.312
0.500 20
15 3
0.312
0.500 20
10 3
0.375
0.562 18
18 5
0.375
0.562 18
13 3
0.500
0.750 16
30 5
0.500
0.750 16
24 5
10
0.625
0.875 14
40 5
10
0.625
0.875 14
32 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
55 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
48 5
14
0.875
1.188 12
65 5
14
0.875
1.188 12
54 5
16
1.000
1.312 12
80 5
16
1.000
1.312 12
72 5
20
1.250
1.625 12
100 10
20
1.250
1.625 12
80 5
24
1.500
1.875 12
120 10
24
1.500
1.875 12
80 5
32
2.000
2.500 12
230 20
32
2.000
2.500 12
96 10
TABLE V.
TORQUE CHART FOR
PIPE THREAD FITTINGS
TABLE VII.
TORQUE CHART FOR
O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS
SIZE
CODE
PIPE
THREAD
SIZE
WITH
SEALANT
FT. LBS.
WITHOUT
SEALANT
FT. LBS.
0.125 27
15 3
20 5
0.250 18
20 5
25 5
0.375 18
25 5
35 5
0.500 14
35 5
45 5
12
0.750 14
45 5
55 5
16
1.000 11.50
55 5
65 5
20
1.250 11.50
70 5
80 5
24
1.500 11.50
80 5
95 10
32
2.000 11.50
95 10
120 10
A05001 12/99
SIZE
CODE
TUBE SIZE
(O.D.)
THREADS
UNF-2B
TORQUE
FT. LBS.
0.250
0.438 20
11 1
0.375
0.562 18
18 2
0.500
0.750 16
35 4
10
0.625
0.875 14
51 5
12
0.750
1.062 12
71 7
16
1.000
1.312 12
98 6
20
1.250
1.625 12
132 7
24
1.500
1.875 12
165 15
A5-3
(N.m)
1.36
2.71
4.07
5.42
6.78
8.14
9.49
10.85
12.20
10
13.56
14.91
16.27
17.63
18.98
20.34
21.69
23.05
24.40
25.76
20
27.12
28.47
29.83
31.18
32.54
33.90
35.25
36.61
37.96
39.32
30
40.67
42.03
43.39
44.74
46.10
47.45
48.81
50.17
51.52
52.87
40
54.23
55.59
56.94
58.30
59.66
60.01
62.37
63.72
65.08
66.44
50
67.79
69.15
70.50
71.86
73.21
74.57
75.93
77.28
78.64
80.00
60
81.35
82.70
84.06
85.42
86.77
88.13
89.48
90.84
92.20
93.55
70
94.91
96.26
97.62
98.97
100.33
101.69
103.04
104.40
105.75
107.11
80
108.47
109.82
111.18
112.53
113.89
115.24
116.60
117.96
119.31
120.67
90
122.03
123.38
124.74
126.09
127.45
128.80
130.16
131.51
132.87
134.23
(kg.m)
0.138
0.277
0.415
0.553
0.692
0.830
0.968
1.106
1.245
10
1.38
1.52
1.66
1.80
1.94
2.07
2.21
2.35
2.49
2.63
20
2.77
2.90
3.04
3.18
3.32
3.46
3.60
3.73
3.87
4.01
30
4.15
4.29
4.43
4.56
4.70
4.84
4.98
5.12
5.26
5.39
40
5.53
5.67
5.81
5.95
6.09
6.22
6.36
6.50
6.64
6.78
50
6.92
7.05
7.19
7.33
7.47
7.61
7.74
7.88
8.02
8.16
60
8.30
8.44
8.57
8.71
8.85
8.99
9.13
9.27
9.40
9.54
70
9.68
9.82
9.96
10.10
10.23
10.37
10.51
10.65
10.79
10.93
80
11.06
11.20
11.34
11.48
11.62
11.76
11.89
12.03
12.17
12.30
90
12.45
12.59
12.72
12.86
13.00
13.14
13.28
13.42
13.55
13.69
(kPa)
6.895
13.79
20.68
27.58
34.47
41.37
48.26
55.16
62.05
10
68.95
75.84
82.74
89.63
96.53
103.42
110.32
117.21
124.1
131.0
20
137.9
144.8
151.7
158.6
165.5
172.4
179.3
186.2
193.1
200.0
30
206.8
213.7
220.6
227.5
234.4
241.3
248.2
255.1
262.0
268.9
40
275.8
282.7
289.6
296.5
303.4
310.3
317.2
324.1
331.0
337.9
50
344.7
351.6
358.5
365.4
372.3
379.2
386.1
393.0
399.9
406.8
60
413.7
420.6
427.5
434.4
441.3
448.2
455.1
462.0
468.9
475.8
70
482.6
489.5
496.4
503.3
510.2
517.1
524.0
530.9
537.8
544.7
80
551.6
558.5
565.4
572.3
579.2
586.1
593.0
599.9
606.8
613.7
90
620.5
627.4
634.3
641.2
648.1
655.0
661.9
668.8
675.7
682.6
A5-4
12/99 A05001
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
(MPa)
0.069
0.14
0.21
0.28
0.34
0.41
0.48
0.55
0.62
100
0.69
0.76
0.83
0.90
0.97
1.03
1.10
1.17
1.24
1.31
200
1.38
1.45
1.52
1.59
1.65
1.72
1.79
1.86
1.93
2.00
300
2.07
2.14
2.21
2.28
2.34
2.41
2.48
2.55
2.62
2.69
400
2.76
2.83
2.90
2.96
3.03
3.10
3.17
3.24
3.31
3.38
500
3.45
3.52
3.59
3.65
3.72
3.79
3.86
3.93
4.00
4.07
600
4.14
4.21
4.27
4.34
4.41
4.48
4.55
4.62
4.69
4.76
700
4.83
4.90
4.96
5.03
5.10
5.17
5.24
5.31
5.38
5.45
800
5.52
5.58
5.65
5.72
5.79
5.86
5.93
6.00
6.07
6.14
900
6.21
6.27
6.34
6.41
6.48
6.55
6.62
6.69
6.76
6.83
3. Multiply by 10:
970 psi = 6688 kPa.
1. Select Table X.
2. Go to PSI row 90, column 7; read 668.8
97 psi = 668.8 kPa.
A05001 12/99
A5-5
TABLE XIII
COMMON CONVERSION MULTIPLIERS
TO
Multiply
By
inch in.
millimeter (mm)
25.40
millimeter (mm)
inch in.
0.0394
inch in.
centimeter (cm)
2.54
centimeter (cm)
inch in.
0.3937
foot ft.
meter (m)
0.3048
meter (m)
foot ft.
3.2808
yard yd.
meter (m)
0.914
meter (m)
yard yd.
1.0936
1.61
kilometer (km)
mile mi.
0.6210
To Convert From
mile mi.
kilometer (km)
2
To Convert From
sq. centimeters
(cm2)
6.45
929
Multiply
By
TO
in.2
0.1550
0.001
16.39
0.061
liters (l)
0.016
liters (l)
61.02
0.028
35.314
liters (l)
28.3
liters (l)
0.0353
ounce oz.
kilogram (kg)
0.028
grams (g)
ounce oz.
0.0353
milliliter (ml)
29.573
milliliter (ml)
0.0338
pound (mass)
kilogram (kg)
0.454
kilogram (kg)
pound (mass)
2.2046
0.2248
2)
Newton (N)
4.448
Newton (N)
Newton.meters (N.m)
0.113
Newton.meters (N.m)
Newton.meters (N.m)
1.356
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
0.138
Newton.meters (N.m)
9.807
kilogram.meters
(kg.m)
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
0.102
Newton.meters (N.m)
0.7376
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
7.2329
kilogram.meters (kg.m)
Newton.meters (N.m)
9.807
psi (pressure)
0.1450
Kilopascals (kPa)
psi (pressure)
kilopascals (kPa)
6.895
psi (pressure)
megapascals (MPa)
0.007
psi (pressure)
kilograms/cm2 (kg/cm2)
0.0704
ton (short)
kilogram (kg)
907.2
ton (short)
metric ton
0.0907
quart qt.
liters (l)
0.946
gallon gal.
liters (l)
3.785
HP (horsepower)
Watts
745.7
HP (horsepower)
kilowatts (kw)
0.745
A5-6
sq. in.
megapascals (MPa)
psi (pressure)
145.038
psi (pressure)
14.2231
kilograms/cm (kg/cm )
kilopascals (kPa)
98.068
kilogram (kg)
ton (short)
0.0011
metric ton
ton (short)
1.1023
liters (l)
quart qt.
1.0567
kilograms/cm (kg/cm )
liters (l)
gallon gal.
0.2642
Watts
HP (horsepower)
0.00134
kilowatts (kw)
HP (horsepower)
1.3410
12/99 A05001
#.
!
$
"
'
$
$
#
!
& #
!
!
! %
&
!
"
!
!
!
!!
%
1#
#
!
!
$
#
%2
&
!
&
!
!
#* $
!
!
%
!&
!#
&
! !
$ !
!
& &
&
!$
,# .
)
&
!
!
!
&
!
&
!
!
&
#
&
!
!
&
&
.
!
!
+ ,
#
#-
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
&$
! #
!
#
#
!
&
$
!$ !
! !
!
!
&
$
!
!
!
" !
!
$
!
/# 0
%
!#
!
!
&
&
#) &
+# .
!
!
!$
!!
!#
&
%!
!$
&
!# -
)
!
&
!
!
!
!
&
&
# 0!
!
>
! #
!
$
!
'
&
!
!
!
#
)
& #
+#
&
$ !
!
!
#
$
!
&
&
#?
!
#
&
!
$ !
!
%
!
!
$ !
*
2
% 4$
!
! 2
!
"
!
! !
$
2 !
!
& &
#
4# 7
!
!
4
1# ' !
$
!
! %
!
#8
2 +
!
!
#;
0
$
9
!
!
!
!
!
$ !
!
#
&
!
!
/#
! !
!
!
&
"
!
$
9
!
! !
& )
!
!
: :$5!
)
!
!
#
#
6
&
#
!
#
#6
=
!
&
&
! !
% !
!
!
&
: :$ 8
!
#
!
!
0/ !
!
& &
!
1 1
% 4# 0
! !
9
&
"
#
,# 2
% 3
7
%
&!
& :. :$
!%
&
&
!
!
&
#
!
!# ;
%
#<
%2 4
! !2 3
$
!
%
%
& &
%
%4
9
%
%
!&
%
!
! !&
%
%
!
!&
!%
!
%
#
4# 7
!
#
#<
$ '
!
!
!
$
#7
!
!
&
!$
&
! "!
&
#
&
! %#<
! # 0!
!
!
#
! &
!
!
!!
!
+# 6"
&
!
/#
!
$
!
#
/# !
!!
&
1# ; ! &
!
! &
& $
9
!
!
!
!#
!
%
!
!
&
#
!
&
#
#'
3
! %
& &
&
! %
!
!
! %
#
#
$ !
!
!$
!
!&
!
!
$ !
! & ! !
%
2&
#
&
!$
,#
!
!!
&
!
#
$
!
!
!
!
1# ;
! %
!
! !
!
$
& & !
$ 2:?.@ ;A : ). .;
.;#$ 6 4
!
!# !
!
! !
!
!
#
#'
!
,# !
!&
!
! !
!
!
#;
: :$8
!
5!
#
&
!
$
9
!
! !
<
!$
#?
!
8
#<
!$
$
!
C %
!
! !
!
%2
& 4
0/ !
& $
!
#
#
!
!
%
&
: :$
!
#
&
!
&
!
!
!
! &
&
# ; !
!
!
# 0!
&
!
#
&
#B
%4
! "
#
$
&'" ( ) "*
+,-. '.
'
!
!
!
%
&
&
!
#
!
!
# !
! !
# 0
! #
"
"
!
$
"
%
&
!
!$
!
#
!
!
!
&
!$
% #
#'
&
!
!
&
+# 0!
.
!
%
"
'
!
)
)
!
!
!!%
!
'((
#) %
!%
6
C .
!
#
=
)
)
)
C
!
#
#A
)
!
&
#'
!
! !
!
!
#0
% !
!!
) %
# 0!
! # 0
#
#
#B
$
&
%
! #
&
&
!$
&
>
!
&
!
# 2
!
%
&
% !
!
!
!
&
/# '
!%
!#
!
&
&
#>
$
&!
&# '
&
!
$
#
&
#7
!
&
!
!
!
$
$
$! & !
$
$"
!
! &
!
!
!
!
! !%
#
!4
$
!
&
!$
!
#
#5
!
!
&
!
2
3 !
%
$
&
# . !
&
3
!
&
%#
!
!
&
% #4B!
!
!
#
#) %
!%
% $
%
#
! !
&
: :$8
)
!
!
#
&
1# 0
,#
!
!
%
% 88
+# 0
! %
! !
#; !
!
!
!
% #
+# '
!
$
!
!
%#
&
#
0
*. $ $ / 0(
&
!
!
!
# ;
&
1
(
&
!
%
"
"
&
(
#;
!
!
!
! "
#'
"
!
!
! !
$ !
!
$
&
!
$ !
!
&
!
5 !
!
!
#
!
#)
&
!
#
/# '
&
&
!
!#
#;
& &
!
&
#
&
#'
&
!
!
!$
&
%
!
!
%
&
!
"
$
0
# !
!
% !
&
$
!
&
#
#0
!
% ! =!
!
1# '
2 3
#
#
&!
&
#;
%
&
# D &
#;
&
!!
$ !
!!
#
!
#0
%
=
!
&
#'
!$
!
%
&
$
!
&
&
#;
%#
!
! !
!
%# ' "
!
$
&
!
!
%!
! #
!
! 2
#0
% !
!
# '
!
!
!
%
%
%$
!# ' !
!
# 0!
#<
!
&
$ !
!
!
&
#A
!
!
!
$
!
:0:$
% !
!
"
&
! &!
&
! $
#
)
;
!
"
!
!
#
!
#8 %
:E:$B %
!
!
#
!
!
=
%$
#'
!
!
4 !
% !
# !
! !
#
!
&
!
#
#<
!
!
$
: :$8
!
$
# 5!
!
!
!
#;
& $
9
#
!
!
$
!
#
#
!
!
!&!
&
#7
!
!
&
!
$
&
!
!
:E:$B %
!
#
,#
&
&
.
#'
%
!
%
% &!
&#
&
#0
)
)
)
%
!
!
"
&
!
& &
!$
#'
$
!
6
"
!# '
# 0
!
%
#
&
! 4
C
2
&
!
#
"
"
*" &+
"
!#
!
#0
% !
!
% !
!
$ ! !
! !
!
#
!
#
$
#0
#0
& !
A(
!& !
&
&
#
#
#0
% "
!
!
#'
,
%$
&
!
%= !
%
&
!
!
#0
#;
%
!
#
&
#;
!!
!
#0
%
"! !
!
$
!
!
!
!!
#'
!
$
! !
!
#
%#
! $
!
&
%
$
!
!
#
&
!
$ !
! !
!
&
#0
&
!
! %
!
# '
#'
&
#
&
&
!
!#
$!
! #
% !
!
#; !
&
"
$
# '
& #
"
#7
#8
!#
!
!
!
!
#
!%
!
! &
#
+# 0
!
# D
$
!
!
# '
&
#*
# '
/# 0
!
!
!
%# <
!
$
!
!
$
!#
1# 6"
&
!
("
"
#
#;
%
#'
!
!
#; !
!
!
!
# 7 !
& $
!
&
!
#
"
#0
%
#'
$
!# ;
!
% "
$
!
# ' !
!
&
!
&
!
!#
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
#;
C
#
$
#
,# '
3
!
=
! %
!
&
!
!
!
!
!
.%.
! !
!
#0
% !
!
&!
&
#
"
#
!
!
#0
!
-"
("
!%
#<
!
!
!
!
!(
#
)
!
#
&
4
$
! !
#
!
! !
!
% 2
%
%$
:. :# 7
!
'
#'
2
!
!
!
! !
!
$
$
%
!
!
4
#
8
0
7
!
+#
!
!
&
%
&
&
%
!
#7
1
!
!
!
!
!
$
!
!
!
!
!
! $
! #
!
!
; )#
& #
/# 7 !
$ %
!
! $ !
!!
!
! %
! ! # )
!< &
! %# 0
%
!
!
!
!
&
!
0
%
! !
!
&
$
% #8
!
! %
# '! %
!
$
#
1# 7
$
%
!
#'
!
!
!
#
#!
63
!
& #
.
!
!
!#
!
#
1# 7
$
!
"
!
#
#B
!
!#
!
"
& ! !#
!
#;
#
C
!
&
&
%
! !
#
#)
&
#
!< &
9
&
!
!
!
,# 7
!
!
%
!
%
: :$ 8
)
!
#
!
!
!
!
!
&
!
!
"
!
!
#
%
#'
$
!
!
&
&
$
'
!
G
G
'
# 2
!
! %#
!
!
#
&
&
%$
&
!
!
&
!
2
3
&
!
!
!
# <
! %
!
#
/# 0 !
&
&
D&
!
%
!
!
%
&!
# <
+# 0
&
#'
!
!
&
#'
!$
#.
#
!
!
&
&
C
&
!# <
!
!
!
!
&
!
&
#0
!
&
! !# 0
!
!
<
# 0
#4
! $
$.
$
%
!
G
"
!
!
!#
#<
!
#
!
"
!
'( ',- #
#
+# 0
!
!
&!
& ' +
! !#
!
%
#
/# 0 &
!
!
!
!
&
#
%
1# <
#.
:*'D* '<86:
, H5 2 H04#
!
#
:.55:#
+# <
!!
(
/# A
? ";
/
#
!!
& & !
#A <
0
? # 1 $
3 &! #
!
)!
)'8 8 ,//$
$
& & !
#
! !
#
; :
#B
&
#<
#'
!!
! #
$ !!
!
!
$
!
!
&
$
9
&
$
'
()
)
!!
0
$6
1# 5!
!
&!
&
)
#
!
$2
!4#
!
$
!
!
0
$6
%
3
&
/#
#
!
$2
(
;
! #
:.55:# 0
(
!
+#
#;
)
4#
# 5!
!
&
&
!
6
;
!!
!!
&!
%
%#
!!
!$
&
&
0
+
!
$
#
!
!
# .
!!
"
,#
,# :
! #
)
! #
1# 5!
!
!
#
0
#
$ !!
!
!!
!#
1# 0 &
"
/0
!
!
&
&
#
#.
:*'D* '<86:
, H5 2 H04#
!
#
:.55:#
+# <
,,
!
#' !
!
! #A
3 &! $
& &
!
#
)!
)'8 8
$D
$ 6 + # 5!
!
:*'D*:
%#
/# <
!!
(
1# A <
3 &!
)!
,# 5!
!
#:
!
!
!
,$
$
& & !
#
! !
#
; :
!
$
!!
#A
!
!
#;
A
&
!
!
# .
!!
#<
& &
!!
1#
!
!!
&
,
& &
1 +#
!
!
"
! #
&
&
)'8 0 , +0$
"
&
% !&
&!
&
#
$
$
% !&
&!
&
& &
!
#'
& #
$
$
!
!
$
&
#
!
!
!!
!
#;
!
$2
/
&!
&
)
6
!4#
%
&
(
0
$6
#B
/# ;
&
# 5!
!
#
& &
#
$ !!
)
4#
! #
#
! !
! !
#
!
FB
&!
,#
6
;
!
#
!
& #
!
! #
!
$!
& &
%
/# <
! #
:.55:# 0
(
!!
+# 5!
!
&
&
! !
# 5!
& & !
!!
+# A
)!
D
!
!
!$
#;
,#
!!
!? ";
? #1 $
& &
!
#
! +#
)'8 8 ,//
#
24
$
*
$
$
*
! #
#
&
&
: " ';
9
0
$6
!
#
!
$2
,# 0!
"
!
! !
$
7
&
$
!
"
!
#
!
!
! !
&
$
2
6>?@ , 7
3
&
'
2"
4
&
! #
!
!
"
&
! !
!
<=
!
$
!
&
$
!
"
&!
#
!
!
#
)
!
!
!
&
"
& ! !
& !
&
!
! $
&
$
!
$
! !
$!
%
!
4#
& &
34
2#
"
+
34
2#
##
#<
#;
$
!
!
#<
# 5!
!
<
#;
!& !
!
#
+# 5!
!
!
! !
#.
$
1# '
$
%
!
!
9
9
<
&$
$
!
$
!
0 !
& )
!#
(
%
&
<
<
$
&
!
C
!
!
(
&!
& !
!
!
!
#
(
#
/# 0
!
!
!
!
,H
1H5 2 H
1#
1H04#
,# <
"
$
!
+# ;
"
&
!
%
$
!
#
!
!
!
#
/# 0
'
&
$2
4$ !
!
%
! #'
%
# 5!
!
, 0$D
$
!
!
!
!
!
!& !
& &
#
#
+
! )'8 8
#<
!
!
!
C
%# ;
!
!
%
,# ;
&
!
%
!
2 4
!
&
!
? #
#'
# <
!
!
!
#
! $
#
! + H5
!
!
&
2 &
!
!
!
!
!
H04
? &
! #%
!& !
!
!
! !#
! # !
! %#
'
#'
7
6<?C -7
6
A>B
:
==A=D
5
E&
&
!
!
!
#
&
!!
!
!$
$!
!
# <
# 5!
!
&
!
!
? #
!
!
! &
!
#'
#.
!
<
<
<
#*
&
%
&
!
&
! !
<
& $
!0
#
#;
&
& 214
!
&
!!
? #
!
!
! !3
&
"$
!
%
$
$ !
!
%
!
#
#
!
"
"
&
! !
!
# A
&
#<
# 0!
$ !
!
& #
!
&
& $
!# '
3 ! $
!
&
2
!
!
"
#*
!
& $
!
! !!
! %
!
!
*
,
!
!
#
+#
&
/# <
&
#
!
!"
& &
#;
!
!
'
%
1# <
#
!
!
!# '
$
! #
&
&
!
#
!
3
# 0!
!
!
&
&
$ !
& ! %
#'
#<
%
#7
&
/# ;
!
&
&
&
!
#
!
!
%
$
!
8
& )
!& !
$
%
!
!
)
&
%
!
&
<
<
!
#
!
#;
!
6
)
!
!
$
&
<
<
!
#
&
#
!
!
&
!
!
!
#
"
"
&
!
<
&
&
!
#
,# 5!
!
!
5 !. ! <
&
! &
&
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
<
<
&
# ;
!
!
#;
!#
1# ;
&
&
!
! #
<
<
&#
!
9
!
#
#'
! !
&
!
!
0
)
&
+# ;
"
"
"
$!
!
!
!
!
!
!
7
#;
" 0"
8
# +'
&
('
' &+ #
9+ $
!
!
&
D
3
!
!
&
#7
+# 7
7
#
$
!
$!
!6!
#
)
7
!
&
!
!
#
!
!
2&
4
!
!
3 !
"
+',
!
!
!
&
& !
$
&
!
)
! 3
#5
"
7
!
=
!
!
#
!$
< &
%
# ' !
&
$
&
!
! 3
3
!
&
!
& $
! 3
3
-"
(
',,) )
"
&
$
!
!
!
'(
$
"
!
$
%
!
!
F
#<
&
!
& /, 2
>
!0 #4 3 & ! # 5!
!
)
9 7
! & )
#)
!
!
D
!
#
0
!6!
!
&# .
%
!
#
&
#
,
%
!
%!
&$
!
&
!
!
'
!
!#
!
&
)
! " ,,-F
F ," F 0. $' ; ." .$( "
,".$ 0$'! 8 $ "' - $. "
.$ ,
0'&'0 --F " 0.88 * *
#'!
%
&
+
3
#'
%$
F
!
!
%
$
# $
&
&
"&
"
&
!
# *
#4#
"
'
!
#
2)
&
!
#
= !
! #B
!
#7
&
3
!
!6!
&
"
"
&
!
%
!
&
#
( ', , " &
!
/
2
"
+',
*
:
!
!
!
!
$
!
!
F
#<
+#
!
& &
D
!6!
)
!
#
# ;
%C >
!
# ;
)
!
!
! !
"
#E %
+# 0
!
#
!
!
)
!
3
1# 0 &
!
&
!$ !
&
#
! #<
#
,# 6"
&
!
7
;
&
!
!
! $
D
)
!
#8
!6!
"
#.
&
! 2
!
!
#'
#
!
!
!
! 3
9
& /H
!
! + H5 2 H04
5 21H04#
#'
!
!
9
!
9
!#
!#
!
&
2!
!
$
4#
!
#
!
7
9
7
#
!
!
!
!
%$ !
! $
$
"
#
"
!
#$
!
! 3
1
&
%# 0 &
&
!
!
!
#
,#
+
+',
5
# $
(#
!
!
!
$
7
!
$ !
!
$ !
$ !
!
!
&
!
$ !
#<
!
! 1
!
( %#<
! 4#
!
! 1
#
&
2D6 <1B 4# )
& !
!
#
B
& &#
)
9 7
!
#
4
!
# ;
&
# .! !
&
!
!2
#<
! #;
&
&
1# '
# ;
>
# /
4#
!)
!
!"
&
27
)
&
4#
!
'
!
/# ;
2!
!
<0
I
&
%2
#
!)
/# 8
!
!
3 & ! 4# 5!
!
7
! &
/, 2
)
9
!
"
&
!
$
#
"
'
/# 5!
!
9 7
2&
4
3
&
!
!
#;
&
&
#
%
F
!
!
;
)
$
#;
1# 0!
!
!)
"!
"# '
! ! !
!
'
,# '
!
!
#;
3
!
#;
)
9
# ) %
# '
!
!
#;
!
# ')
$
&
!
#
!$ !
$ !
#8 % F
#;
9
!
#<
.'
(
!
%
+', #
!$ !
# ;
!
$
%!
&
!
$ !
&
+# ;
7
&
!$
0!
%
#0
!
!
#
%
#7
!
!
!
!
!$
!
!
!
!
%#
)
9
!
% "
#'
%$
!
# 0!
&
!
!$
!
%#
#;
!
%#
$
&
%!
&
%
$
%
7
!
!
+', # $
)
!
!
#8
$
9
!
!
#'
!
! &
)
7
#'
9+ $
#;
#
!
('
'
&#
%C
!
!
D#6#
'
'
% !
!
!
&
!
!
!$ !
&
/# 0
# ;
! !#
% !
!
&
% !
!
+# 0
#
#0
!
!
!
!
%C >
#
&
# '
# '
3 !$
#
!
)
!
!
!
&
&
"
%
&
!
# ;
!
!
!
)
>
!
&
!
'
&!
!
!
!
!
#B
0
$
%
!
!
!#
!
%
!
"
&
# ;
%C >
'
!
!
& $
!
$
!
!
9
!
$
!
! &
! !
! !
% $
%
!
& #'
$
& $
& . + ( & &
!
2
#
%
4
# ##
!
!
4# ?
& &
! !
!
!
#
&
,# '
!
2
! !
!
&
&
#7
&
"
&
4$
!
$
&
#
#0
! #
#<
!
! "
& &
,$0!
#'
$
!
2,
!
!
!
!!
>0' J
3
24
#E
4#
3 &!
2)'8 0
4#
24
!
#
+#
! !
!
$
!
#
<
# <
&
$
&
1H 5 2 H 04$
1H5 2 H04#
"
# 7
!
!
!
!
!
!
! 4
!
1H 5 2 H 04$
$
& != "
B
E2
! !
!
#
/# 0
!
!"
& &
,$0!
1# '
#<
!
!
3
5
$
& !#
((2
!!
"
&
!
!
#7
-"
"
2 4#
! &
!
#
!# ) %
!
!
#) %
% #
! %
1# 0
1
!
#
!
!"
!
$
#
!
& &
!
# ; !
!
!& !
0/
'(
34
"
) "
"
&
#;
.'
+# '
!& !
>0'J 2 3 & ! 4
! #
/
E5 2 3 & ! 4
+
4 !
#
"
+# ;
1
0+
B
2 !
# ##
#
2/4
<
2
"
/# < &
2)'8 0
4#
# 5!
!
"
+
-"
-"
1
!
2 4$2+4
;
' ###
! #
/# '
!!
!
$
!
!& !
! !
#; !
!
0/
!
! #
1# '
!
$
!
!
! #0
%
!
3
!& !
#
!& !
#
SECTION B
STRUCTURES
INDEX
STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
GRILLE AND HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Deck and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Deck and Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Deck and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left Deck and Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B2-1
B2-1
B2-1
B2-1
B2-2
B2-2
B2-3
B2-4
B2-4
B2-4
DUMP BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUMP BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BODY PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Pad Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BODY GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BODY POSITION INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BODY SLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Sling Hook-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROCK EJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BODY-UP LIMIT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B3-1
B3-1
B3-1
B3-2
B3-2
B3-3
B3-3
B3-3
B3-3
B3-3
B3-4
B3-4
B3-5
B3-5
FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL TANK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BREATHER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B4-1
B4-1
B4-2
B4-2
B4-2
B4-2
B4-2
B4-2
B4-2
B01007
Index
B1-1
NOTES:
B1-2
Index
B01007
STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
GRILLE AND HOOD
Installation
Removal
1. Attach lifting device to the hood and grille
assembly (1, Figure 2-1).
2. Remove upper mounting capscrews (3) from
the hood and grille assembly.
3. Remove all side mounting capscrews (2) from
the hood and grille assembly.
4. Disconnect upper hood mounted headlights, if
equipped.
5. Lift hood and grille assembly from truck and
move to work area.
DECKS
The HAULPAK truck decks are mounted to the
frame support structures using rubber mounts, as
shown in Figure 2-2. These mounts are placed
between the deck and mounting structure to reduce
noise and vibration. The rubber mounts should be
visually checked periodically and worn or defective
mounts should be replaced. When tightening capscrews, tighten the .750 in.-10UNC capscrews to 200
ft. lbs. (271 N.m.) torque.
NOTE: Rubber mounting pads should be checked
periodically for wear. Rubber pads reduce the
amount of vibration and should be replaced as they
become worn.
B02008
4. Rubber Retainer
5. Cover
6. Hand Rail
7. Radiator
Structural Components
B2-1
Removal
The decks of the HAULPAK Trucks are also covered with anti-slip surfaces. These anti-slip coverings
should be kept clean and replaced as they become
worn.
B2-2
Structural Components
B02008
The right hand deck structure weighs approximately 1500 lbs. (681 Kg). Make sure the lifting
device to be used is of adequate capacity.
12. Remove button plugs (13, Figure 2-3) at six
locations on the deck surface. Remove nut and
lockwasher (11). Remove flatwasher (10) and
capscrew (14). Disconnect ground strap (9) at
deck support.
13. Carefully raise deck and remove from deck supports. Remove rubber mounts (12, Figure 2-3).
B02008
Structural Components
B2-3
3. Hoist Chains
4. LH Door
B2-4
Structural Components
B02008
B02008
Structural Components
B2-5
NOTES:
B2-6
Structural Components
B02008
DUMP BODY
DUMP BODY
Removal
2. Guide Rope
B03008
4. Snap Ring
5. Bearing
6. Hoist Cylinder
1. Dump Body
2. Spacer
3. Lock Key
4. Keeper Plate
Dump Body
5. Capscrew &
Lockwasher
6. Pin
7. Bushing
8. Frame
B3-1
BODY PAD
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the dump body
for replacing the body pads. Replace pads if worn
excessively.
1. Raise dump body to sufficient height for
removal of body pads.
Installation
1. Attach lifting device to dump body and lower
over the truck frame. Align the dump body pivot
with frame mounting bracket.
B3-2
3. Frame
Dump Body
4. Body Pad
5. Frame
B03008
BODY GUIDE
At time of body pad replacement, wear plates, which
the body guides contact, should be inspected for serviceability. Prior to checking the gap between the
body guides and wear plates, insure the body is centered on the frame. The gap between the guides and
wear plates should be 0.12-0.50 in. (3.05-12.7 mm).
If the gap is greater than 0.50 in. (12.7 mm), measure
the thickness of the wear plate (3, Figure 3-6) and
the bent plate of the body guides (4). Replace wear
plates or body guides if thickness is 0.55 in. (13.9
mm) or less. Refer to Parts Catalog for parts replacement.
NOTE: Size of weld for body guide and wear plate is
0.31 inch unless otherwise specified. Use AWS E 70
Series, Low Hydrogen Type Welding Rods, such as
E7016 or E7018.
BODY SLING
The body sling is a cable located under the dump
body at the rear of the truck. This cable is intended to
be used as a safety cable to hold the body in the up
position while the technicians work under it.
Body Sling Hook-Up
With body in the "Up" position:
1. Remove cotter pin (1, Figure 3-8) and clevis pin
(2) from the small mounting bracket (4) under
dump body.
B03008
3. Wear Plate
4. Body Guide
Dump Body
4. Small Mounting
Bracket
B3-3
ROCK EJECTORS
Rock ejectors are placed between the rear dual
wheels to keep rocks or other material from lodging
between the dual tires. Failure to keep ejectors in
working order could allow debris to build up between
the dual wheels and cause damage to the tires.
Inspection
1. The ejectors must be positioned on the center
line between the dual wheels within 0.25 in.
(6.35 mm).
2. The arm structure should be approximately 3.25
in. (8.25 cm) away from the rear wheel spacer
ring. Refer to Figure 3-9.
3. Arm structure must be straight.
4. Check for worn wear plates (2).
5. Check for wear on mounting brackets and clevis pins.
If the condition of any of these items are unsatisfactory, repair or replace the item.
B3-4
Dump Body
3. Stop Block
4. Mounting Bracket
B03008
B03008
Dump Body
B3-5
NOTES:
B3-6
Dump Body
B03008
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
Removal
1. Drain all fuel from tank to lessen weight to be
handled.
B04005 7/90
4. Fuel Gauge
5. Drain Valve
6. Capscrew
7. Flatwasher
8. Rubber Dampner
9. Breather
Fuel Tank
B4-1
NOTE: If a tank is to be weld repaired, special precautions are necessary to prevent fire or explosion. If
necessary, consult local authorities on safety regulations before proceeding.
The lower mount of the fuel tank is cushioned by rubber dampners (8, Figure 4-1). Replacement of worn
items in this area may be necessary after tank
removal and before installation.
Installation
1. If removed, install fuel gauge and sending unit
(4, Figure 4-1) breather on top of tank, and
other fittings as required.
2. Lift tank into position, install flatwashers (7) and
(12, on 445E/510E arrangement) and capscrews (6). Install cap (3) and capscrews (2).
3. Tighten all mounting hardware to standard
torque. Connect and tighten all connections.
4. Fill tank.
Cleaning
The fuel tank is provided with a drain valve (5, Figure
4-1) located at the bottom of the tank.
It is not necessary to remove the tank from the truck
for cleaning of sediment, but rust and scale on the
walls and baffles can best be removed by taking the
tank off the truck. This allows cleaning solutions to be
in contact with all interior surfaces by rotating the
tank in various positions. Internal tank cleaning can
be accomplished by removing the optional quick fill
connection (10, Figure 4-1).
BREATHER
The fuel tank is vented through a small mesh type
breather installed at the top of the tank. This breather
should be cleaned periodically and can be blown out
with solvent and reused. The area around the
breather must be free of mud and debris that would
cover the breather and prevent proper fuel suction
and return.
Installation is opposite of removal. Note that the
breather port on the fuel tank for a standard fill tank is
in a different location than quick fill type vents. Also
the breathers for quick fill type options are a different
size and type.
NOTE: Refer to Options, Section "M" of this manual
for additional required maintenance for Quick Fill
Option.
GAUGE
A direct readout type gauge is mounted in an opening in the front of the tank. The gauge is a magnetic
arm type with float inside the tank.
Removal
1. Drain fuel below level of gauge.
2. Loosen the small screws holding the dial face in
the fuel gauge sender unit and remove.
3. Loosen four socket head screws in sender unit
and remove from tank. Remove and discard
gasket.
Installation
B4-2
Fuel Tank
B04005 7/90
SECTION C
ENGINE
INDEX
POWER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2-5
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Water Temperature Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C3-1
C3-1
C3-2
C3-2
POWER TRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALTERNATOR REMOVAL PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE/ALTERNATOR MATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternator End Play Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine End Play Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining Shim Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C4-1
C4-1
C4-1
C4-2
C4-2
C4-3
C4-4
C4-4
C4-5
C4-5
C4-6
C4-6
AIR CLEANERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Element Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Filter Element Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precleaner Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C5-1
C5-1
C5-3
C5-4
ENGINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THROTTLE CONTROL AIR CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detroit Diesel Engine
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cummins Engine
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOW IDLE SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THROTTLE SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C6-1
C6-1
C01008
Index
C6-1
C6-1
C6-2
C6-2
C6-2
C6-3
C6-3
C6-3
C1-1
NOTES:
C1-2
Index
C01008
POWER MODULE
POWER MODULE
The radiator, engine and alternator/blower assemblies are mounted on a roller equipped subframe
which is contained within the truck main frame and is
referred to as a Power Module. This arrangement
permits removal and installation of these components
by utilizing the unique Roll In/Roll Out feature.
Although the instructions in this section are primarily
based upon the Roll Out method for major component removal, the radiator and fan may be removed
as separate items. Instructions for radiator and fan
removal are contained later in this section.
Removal
1. Position the truck in a work area with adequate
overhead clearance to permit raising the dump
body.
2. Apply parking brake and block wheels to prevent truck movement. Raise body and install
safety cable.
4. Drive Shaft
5. Hoist Pump
Do not work under raised body without first making sure the safety cable is securely installed.
NOTE: Plug all ports and cover all hose fittings or
connections when disconnecting to prevent dirt or
foreign material from entering.
3. Remove grille following instructions in Section
B. Remove radiator following instructions in this
Section.
4. Disconnect batteries, positive and negative
cables. Remove and service batteries if necessary.
NOTE: Battery quick disconnect cable between
engine and quick disconnect will have to be
removed.
5. Disconnect hydraulic pump drive shaft (4, Figure 2-1) at the drive shaft universal joint companion flange (2).
6. Remove clamp (4, Figure 2-2) from the outlet
hose on the blower assembly. Support blower
hose (5) to prevent damage to flexible couplings. Cover all air duct openings to prevent
entrance of foreign material.
C02007
Power Module
4. Clamp
5. Blower Hose (Outlet)
C2-1
7. Tag or mark all electrical connections to be disconnected. Disconnect all 24 volt and high voltage electrical leads that would interfere with
power module removal. Connections are
located on the alternator and engine assemblies.
8. Remove mounting screws (2, Figure 2-2) securing blower intake and remove gasket.
10. Mark and disconnect all electric, air, oil and fuel
lines that would interfere with power module
removal. Cover or plug all lines and their connections to prevent entrance of dirt or foreign
material. To simplify this procedure, most connections utilize quick disconnects located on the
left side of the engine (4, Figure 2-3).
16. Loosen clamps (6) at hump hoses (7) and flexible elbows (2) securing air inlet ducts to turbochargers and air cleaners (1). Remove clamps
(5, Detroit Diesel) and remove all air ducts.
Cover all openings to prevent entrance of foreign material.
Install safety chain around the front engine subframe cross member and main frame to prevent
the power module from rolling when the subframe rollers are installed.
C2-2
3. Front Mount
4. Quick Disconnects
1. Capscrews &
Lockwashers
2. Subframe Support
Power Module
3. Capscrew
4. Frame
C02007
C02007
5. Clamps
6. Clamp
7. Hump Hose
8. Air Compressor Inlet Air
Port
Power Module
9. Exhaust Duct
10. Cummins Throttle Cylinder
Exhaust Air Port
11. Hanger Clamp
C2-3
4. Capscrews
5. Bushing
6. Mounting Cap
1. Roller Assembly
2. Subframe
3. Capscrews
C2-4
Power Module
4. Engine
5. Power Module
Subframe
C02007
Installation
1. Inspect the main frame guide rails. Remove any
debris which would interfere with power module
installation.
2. Clean the rear engine support brackets. Apply a
light film of soap solution to each rubber bushing located at the rear of the subframe.
3. Check the subframe rollers making sure they
roll freely. Make sure rollers are in the roll-out
position.
4. Attach a lifting device to the power module lift
points as shown in Figure 2-8.
The complete power module weighs approximately 22,000 pounds (9988 kg). Make sure lifting
device to be used is of an adequate capacity.
5. Raise the power module and align the subframe
rollers with the main frame guide rail. Refer to
Figure 2-9.
6. Lower the power module to the subframe guide
rail, relax the hoist slightly and roll the power
module into truck frame until lifting chains contact cross frame. Block under the front of the
subframe and lower to allow repositioning the
hoist.
C02007
Power Module
C2-5
20. Attach hoist to the center deck and lift into position. Align the rear center deck mounting holes
with the main frame cross member mounting
pads. Install capscrews, flat washers and nuts.
Do not tighten at this time.
21. Align the front center deck mounting holes with
both left and right upright supports. Install capscrews, flat washers, lockwashers and nuts.
27. Service radiator and engine with appropriate fluids. Refer to Section P for capacity and fluid
specifications.
23. Connect all air filter service indicator, air compressor, and throttle (if equipped with Cummins
engine) air lines to the engine inlet air ducts.
C2-6
Power Module
C02007
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR
Removal
1. Drain coolant from radiator and engine. Be prepared to catch approximately 108 gallons
(409 liters) of coolant. If the coolant is to be
reused, it must be stored in clean containers.
2. If radiator is being removed without the removal
of the complete power module, remove grille
and hood according to "Removal" instructions in
Section "B".
3. Disconnect air supply line to the radiator top
tank pressure regulating valve.
4. Unclamp and remove all coolant lines between
the radiator and engine. Cap engine fittings to
prevent contamination.
5. If the truck is equipped with radiator shutters,
disconnect air lines to these components.
FIGURE 3-2. FAN GUARD INSTALLATION
1. Capscrew &
Lockwasher
2. Fan Guard
3. Radiator Shroud
C03007
Cooling System
C3-1
Visual Inspection
1. Check coolant level and thoroughly inspect system for leaks.
2. Inspect radiator fins for restrictions. Be certain
the air flow through the radiator is not restricted
by debris or bent radiator fins.
3. Visually inspect fan blades for damage. Check
radiator cap sealing surfaces.
If overheating and loss of coolant is a problem, a
pressure loss in the system could be the cause. If an
overheating condition is indicated on the temperature
gauge and loss of coolant is not evident, check the
accuracy of the temperature gauge as follows:
a. Start the engine.
b. Partially cover the radiator to reduce air flow
and cooling. Suspend a thermometer
through the radiator cap opening so it contacts only the coolant. The reading on the
instrument panel should agree with the reading on the thermometer.
Pressure Cap
One of the causes of cooling system pressure loss
can be a faulty pressure cap seal. Inspect the pressure cap carefully for possible damage to the seal or
sealing surfaces. Any build-up of deposits on the
cap, seal or filler neck should be removed.
Water Temperature Thermostats
3. Apply heat to the pan and stir the water to maintain uniformity while observing the opening temperature of the thermostats.
C3-2
Cooling System
C03007
POWER TRAIN
ALTERNATOR
Removal
The following instructions cover the removal of the
main alternator with inline blower assembly from the
Detroit Diesel or Cummins engine after the power
module has been removed from the truck.
1. Attach hoist with three lifting chains to alternator
lifting eyes. Attach two of the chains to the lift
eyes located at 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock. Attach
the third chain to the front, 12 o'clock lift eye.
3. Capscrew
4. Engine Flywheel
C04010
Power Train
5. Cradle Structure
6. Engine Mount Capscrews
C4-1
1. Alternator Housing
ENGINE/ALTERNATOR MATING
Before attaching the alternator to the engine it is essential the axial end play and axial alignment of the crankshaft be maintained within limits. This will prevent
possible thrust washer failure due to insufficient crankshaft end play and assure alternator to engine alignment
to avoid placing an overstress condition on the rear main
bearings, flywheel housing adapter and flex coupling.
This procedure is to assure that crankshaft and alternator end play will remain within specification and the
rotor and stator frame will be in alignment with the
crankshaft.
C4-2
Power Train
C04010
3. Alternator Housing
3. Parallel Bar
C04010
Power Train
2. Engine Flywheel
3. Dial Indicator
C4-3
4. Flywheel Housing or
Adapter
5. Shim Location
C4-4
3. Engine Flywheel
Power Train
1. Use the three brackets provided on the alternator for lifting. The top front lifting bracket should
be equipped with some method of adjusting the
alternator to keep it horizontal. The remaining
two chains should be of equal length.
C04010
3. Adjustment
Set-screw
4. Subframe
ENGINE
Removal
Refer to instructions in the appropriate section for
removal instructions for the Power Module, alternator, and radiator assembly.
C04010
Power Train
C4-5
Service
Complete instructions covering the disassembly,
assembly and maintenance of the engine and its
components can be found in the engine manufacturer's service manual.
Installation
FAN
For engines equipped with a fan clutch, refer to
Section M for detailed service information. Refer to
the engine manufacturers service manual for
instructions regarding fan belt replacement and tension adjustment procedures.
C4-6
3. Cradle Structure
4. Engine Lift Points
Power Train
C04010
SECTION C5
AIR CLEANERS
INDEX
C05005 11/01
Air Cleaners
C5-1
NOTES
C5-2
Air Cleaners
11/01 C05005
AIR CLEANERS
Air used by the diesel engine and by the truck's air
system passes through the air cleaner assemblies
mounted on the front of the truck. These dry type air
cleaners discharge heavy particles of dust and dirt by
centrifugal action in precleaner sections and then filter finer particles as air passes through filter elements. The air compressor intake line is connected
into the engine air intake line immediately after air
cleaner.
Service Checks
The truck engine must be shut down before servicing the air cleaner assemblies or opening the
engine air intake system.
1. Inspect and empty air cleaner dust collectors at
regular intervals. Daily inspections are recommended. Do not allow dust level in the collectors to build up to the Donaclone tube section
(precleaner).
C05005 11/01
Air Cleaners
C5-3
C5-4
5. Wing Nut
6. Wing Nut Gasket
7. Safety Element
Indicator
Air Cleaners
11/01 C05005
4. Check safety (secondary) filter element indicator nut (7). If solid red area is showing, safety filter replacement is required. If center is green,
safety element does not require service.
C05005 11/01
Air Cleaners
C5-5
d. When cleaning is complete, inspect filter element as shown in Figure 5-3 and if holes or
ruptures are noted, replace the element with
a new item.
Precleaner Section
C5-6
Air Cleaners
11/01 C05005
C05005 11/01
Air Cleaners
C5-7
NOTES
C5-8
Air Cleaners
11/01 C05005
ENGINE COMPONENTS
THROTTLE CONTROL AIR CYLINDERS
The throttle control cylinder(s) controls the engine
RPM. The cylinder is controlled by the operator's
throttle treadle valve. Various system components
and the position of the engine idle switch can affect
the RPM range available to the operator.
On Detroit Diesel engines, one cylinder provides the
full range of engine RPM (750 to 2040 RPM) and
also is designed to provide a midrange engine speed
(1675 RPM) required while operating the dynamic
retarding system.
On Cummins engines, two cylinders are required.
The inboard cylinder provides full range RPM (750 to
2300 RPM). The outboard cylinder controls the
dynamic retarding RPM (1675 RPM).
Detroit Diesel Engine
Throttle Cylinder Removal
1. Remove the hoses attached to the cylinder
ports.
C06008 11/92
Engine Components
C6-1
Cummins Engine
Throttle Removal
1. Remove hoses from cylinder fittings
2. Remove adjusting nuts (3) and jam nuts (2)
from piston rod.
3. Remove cylinder mounting nuts (1, Figure 6-1)
from cylinder rod mounting bracket.
Installation
1. Mount the longer of two cylinders to inboard
position of cylinder bracket and secure with the
mounting nut.
2. Mount shorter retard cylinder to outboard position of bracket securing with mounting nut.
3. Install cylinder rod jam nuts (3) to threaded end
of both cylinders.
4. Install supply hoses to cylinders, connecting
hoses to rod end of retard cylinder and head
end of throttle cylinder.
C6-2
3. Nut (long)
4. Cylinder Rod
Engine Components
5. Throttle Cylinder
6. Retard Cylinder
C06008 11/92
Service
Periodically check valve for air leaks and operation of
solenoid. If valve is not operating properly, clean
valve or replace as a unit.
THROTTLE SOLENOID
The throttle solenoid is a normally open air solenoid
valve, connected into the air line to the throttle cylinder. In retarding, the solenoid is energized and prevents the operator from changing the preset engine
speed from 1675 RPM.
Service
Periodically check valve for air leaks and operation of
solenoid. If valve is not functioning properly, clean or
replace a valve as a unit.
Operating Test
With engine at low idle, depress retard pedal. Engine
speed should increase to 1675 RPM. Throttle pedal
should have no control over engine speed with retard
pedal depressed.
This symbol on the Selector Console in the operator's cab indicates the low idle position
C06008 11/92
Engine Components
C6-3
NOTES:
C6-4
Engine Components
C06008 11/92
SECTION D
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (24 VDC NON-PROPULSION)
INDEX
24 VDC ELECTRIC SUPPLY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery - Maintenance and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100 Amp Integral Battery Charging System (Delcotron) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Energizing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rated Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetizing The Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integral Charging System - Troubleshooting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integral Charging System Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2-1
D2-1
D2-1
D2-3
D2-3
D2-3
D2-3
D2-4
D2-4
D2-5
D2-5
1. Electric shock can cause serious or fatal injury. Only qualified electrical maintenance personnel should perform electrical testing.
2. This system is capable of causing physical harm. Use caution during test procedures to protect personnel from injury.
3. All potential testing should be considered hazardous. Proper precautions are necessary.
4. Any time one of the plug-in circuit cards must be removed or reinstalled, be certain that the
control power switch is OFF.
5. Extreme care should be exercised to prevent damage to the various semi-conductor devices
and low impedance circuits under test. When using an ohmmeter to check diodes, transistors, and low power conductors, care must be used when using the ohms x1 scale. Excessive
current can damage the meter. When using the Hi-pot tester, megger, or when welding is to be
performed on the truck, remove the printed circuit cards.
6. Check wiring and cables for proper routing and termination.
D01013 9/94
Index
D1-1
NOTES:
D1-2
Index
D01013 9/94
BATTERY
During operating, the storage batteries function as an
electrochemical device for converting chemical
energy into the electrical energy required for operating the accessories when the engine is shut down.
D02012 11/94
A defective alternator
A defective battery equalizer
Overcharging, which causes battery overheating, is
first indicated by excessive use of water. If allowed to
continue, cell covers will push up at the positive ends
and in extreme cases the battery container will
become distorted and cracked.
Leakage can be detected by continual wetness of the
battery or excessive corrosion of the terminals, battery carrier and surrounding area. (A slight amount of
corrosion is normal in lead acid batteries). Inspect
the case, covers and sealing compound for holes,
cracks or other signs of leakage. Check battery hold
down connections to make sure the tension is not
great enough to crack the battery, or loose enough to
allow vibration to open the seams. A leaking battery
should be replaced.
To remove corrosion, clean the battery with a solution
of ordinary baking soda and a stiff, non-wire brush
and flush with clean water. Make sure none of the
soda solution is allowed into the battery cells. Be
sure terminals are clean and tight. Clean terminals
are very important in a voltage regulated system.
Corrosion creates resistance in the charging circuit
which causes undercharging and gradual starvation
of the battery.
D2-1
Freezing Temperature
Degrees
1.280
(-70C)
-60F (-54C)
-16F (-27C)
+5F (-15C)
+19F (-7C)
1.250
1.200
1.150
1.100
D2-2
-90F
General Description
The 30-SI Series Delcotron Integral Charging System
(Figure 2-2) is a heavy-duty 24 VDC unit rated at 100
amps. An integral, solid state Voltage regulator that is
mounted inside the end frame provides Voltage output
control. The 30-SI Series uses one wire with an adequate ground return to charge the vehicle battery.
D02012 11/94
Operating Principles
A typical wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2-3. The
basic operating principles are explained as follows:
The base-emitter of transistors TR3 and TR1 is connected to the battery through resistor R5, thus turning these transistors on. Also, resistors R2 and R3
are connected to the battery, but the discharge current of the battery is very low because of the resistance values of R2, R3, R5, TR1, and TR3.
With the system operating, A.C. voltages initially are
generated in the stator windings by residual magnetism in the rotor. The diodes in the rectifier bridge
change the stator A.C. voltages to a D.C. voltage
which appears between ground and the "BAT" terminal. As speed increases, current is provided for
charging the battery and operating electrical accessories.
The stator also supplies D.C. field current through
the diode trio, the field, TR1, and then through the
diodes in the rectifier bridge back to the stator.
As the speed and voltage increase the voltage
between R2 and R3 increases to the value where
Zener diode D1 conducts. Transistor TR2 then turns
"ON" and TR1 and TR3 turn "OFF". With TR1 "OFF",
the field current and system voltage decrease and
D1 then blocks current flow causing TR1 and TR3 to
turn back "ON".
3. Ground Screw
D02012 11/94
D2-3
Energizing Speed
The energizing speed is the RPM at which the regulator turns ON to energize the field coil. This speed is
higher than some speeds at which output can be
obtained. Therefore, when checking output at low
speeds, increase the speed until the regulator turns
ON, then reduce the speed to check the output. No
output can be obtained until the regulator turns ON.
Once the regulator turns ON, it will remain turned on
until the engine is stopped.
Rated Voltage
Rated
Voltage
Operating
Range
24
28.0
26.0-30.0
The rotor normally retains magnetism to provide voltage build-up when the engine is started. After disassembly or servicing, however, it may be necessary to
reestablish the magnetism. To restore the normal
residual magnetism in the rotor, connect the unit to
the battery in a normal manner, then momentarily
connect a jumper lead from the battery positive (+)
post to the relay terminal, (1, Figure 2-4).
D2-4
6. Ball Bearing
7. Rotor
8. Stator
9. Roller Bearing
10. Integrated
Circuit Regulator
11. Grease Reservoir
D02012 11/94
Troubleshooting Procedures
A typical 30-SI cross-sectional view is shown in Figure
2-4. A basic wiring diagram is shown in Figure 2-5.
IMPORTANT: Initial Voltage build-up is by residual magnetism in the rotor. Increase the speed as
required to obtain maximum current output.
f. If ampere output IS within 10 amperes of
rated output as stamped on the battery charging alternator frame, unit is not defective.
g. If ampere output IS NOT within 10 amperes
of rated output as stamped on the battery
charging alternator frame, remove the unit
for repair as covered in "Integral Charging
System Repair".
Integral Charging System Repair
Component parts and connections are shown in
Figure 2-6.
D02012 11/94
D2-5
Insulated battery charging alternators have both rectifier bridge heat sinks insulated, and the lower heat sink
is connected to the second output terminal located
where the "R" terminal is shown (3, Figure 2-6).
NOTE: Some digital ohmmeters cannot be used to
check diodes. Consult ohmmeter manufacturers to
determine ohmmeter capabilities.
Regulator Check
The regulator cannot be checked with an ohmmeter.
Use an approved regulator tester available from various test equipment manufacturers.
The winding is checked for short-circuits by connecting a 24 Volt battery and ammeter in series with the
field coil. Note the ammeter reading. An ammeter
reading above 2.7 - 3.4 amps indicates shorted windings. An alternate method is to check the resistance
of the field by connecting an ohmmeter to the field
coil. If the resistance reading is below 7.0 - 9.0 ohms,
the winding is shorted. To replace the field coil, see
"Disassembly."
D2-6
D02012 11/94
2. Three Connectors
D02012 11/94
5. Capscrew
6. Retainer Plate
7. Seal
D2-7
Reassembly
Assemble parts as shown in Figure 2-10. Before
attaching end plate, dip rectifier end frame about one
inch (1") deep into clear electric grade varnish, or use
spray can, to restore assembly to new condition.
NOTES:
(1) Included In Item 27, Housing, Rectifier End
(2) Included In Item 30, Stator.
D2-8
D02012 11/94
D02012 11/94
D2-9
NOTES:
D2-10
D02012 11/94
D03013
D3-1
D3-2
D03013
BODY-UP SWITCH
Adjustment
Adjust proximity switch bracket to maintain an air gap
(4), between sensing and body bracket, of between
0.50 in. (12.7 mm) minimum and 0.62 in. (15.7 mm)
maximum. Set up measurement (5) should be 2.12
0.06 in. (53.8 1.5 mm).
Service
4. Sensing Area
5. Actuator
D03013
4. Air Gap
5. Set Up Measurement
6. Set Up Measurement
D3-3
D3-4
D03013
D03013
3. Control Panel
4. Diode Board 1
D3-5
Description
Each relay board is equipped with four green lights
(9, Figure 3-7) and one red light (7). The four green
lights are labeled K1, K2, K3, or K4. These lights will
be "ON" only when that particular control circuit has
been switched "ON" and the relay coil is being energized. The light will not turn on if the relay board does
not receive the 24 Volt signal to turn "ON" a component, or if the relay coil has an "open" circuit.
The red "Breaker Open" light (if "ON") indicates that
a circuit breaker (on that relay board) is in the "OFF"
position. A light on the instrument panel will also turn
"ON" telling the operator that a circuit breaker is in
the "OFF" position. The red breaker open light will
turn "ON" whenever there is a Voltage difference
across the two terminals of a circuit breaker.
If a control switch has been turned "ON" and a green
(K) light is "ON", but that component is not operating,
check the following on the relay board for that circuit:
1. Check for a circuit breaker that is in the "OFF"
position or a red (breaker open) light is "ON". If
a circuit breaker is "OFF", turn it "ON". Check
operation of component. If it trips again, check
the wiring or component for defects that could
be causing the circuit to be overloaded.
Service
To replace a relay:
1. Remove one screw (10, Figure 3-7) holding the
crossbar in place and loosen the other screw.
2. Swing crossbar away.
3. Gently wiggle and pull upward to remove relay
(11).
4. Line up tabs and install new relay.
5. Place crossbar in original position and install
screw (10) that was removed and tighten both
screws.
2. Steering Wheel
Column
2. The contacts inside the relay may not be closing and not causing an electrical connection.
D3-6
D03013
adjusted to the same height as on the other circuit breakers. This is necessary so when cover
plate is installed, it will not press circuit breaker
into, or pull up on, the circuit board. Install new
circuit breaker of the same capacity rating as
the one removed.
7. Install star washer and nut to circuit breaker
poles (on the back side) and tighten nuts.
8. Install cover plate and all screws removed during disassembly.
D03013
11. Relay
12. Circuit Harness
Connector
13. Circuit Harness
Connector
D3-7
Relay Board 3
Relay Board 1
Turn Signal
Parking Brake
Relay Board 2
Relay Board 4
Stop Lights
D3-8
D03013
Relay Board
5Head Lights
D03013
D3-9
DIODE BOARDS
Diode Board 1
Diode board 1 is located on right wall on control cabinet and contains 23 replaceable diodes.
DIODE BOARD 1
DIODE
DESCRIPTION
WIRE #
31MTR - 509R2
509R2 - 509RB
31MTR - 509R1
509R1 - 509RA
31MTR - 509M
509M - 509MA
31MTR - 31MT
419I - 419R2
419I - 419R1
10
419I - 419M
11
419I - 419
12
52CS - 71
13
14
53H - 710
15
33J - 710
16
76MM - 439E
17
76L - 439
18
79V - 79VD
19
79V - 79VS
20
79V - 79VG
21
22
FF3 - 33
23
33F - 33L
DB1P7
SPARE
DB1P8
SPARE
DB1P9
SPARE
DB1P10
SPARE
DB1P11
SPARE
DB1P12
SPARE
D3-10
68-710
33F - 33A
D03013
Diode Board 2
Diode board 2 is located inside the cab on steering
column bracket, and contains 7 replaceable diodes.
DIODE BOARD 2
DIODE
DESCRIPTION
WIRE #
12T - 712
BODY UP ALARM
31A - 63L
31A - 38
52D - 710
52D - 52B
52B - 52S
DP2P4
SPARE
DB2P5
SPARE
BD2P6
SPARE
D03013
D3-11
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
AMPS
DEVICE(S) PROTECTED
LOCATION
CB13
15
CB14
15
Flashing Lights
CB15
15
CB16
15
CB17
15
CB18
15
Stop Lights
CB19
15
Back-up Horn
CB20
CB21
15
CB22
CB23
15
CB24
15
CB25
15
CB26
15
CB27
15
Clearance Light Relay, Panel Lights, High Beam Indica- RB5, Control Cabinet
tor
CB28
15
CB29
DB30
15
CB31
15
CB32
15
CB33
15
Hoist Solenoid
CB34
10
CB35
10
CB37
10
CB38
CB339
CB40
CB42
CB43
10
CB44
20
CB45
20
Vanner Box
CB46
20
Vanner Box
CB47
20
DDEC Receiver ECM 12 VDC Power (DDEC Engine Only) Vanner Box
CB48
20
DDEC Receiver ECM 12 VDC Power (DDEC Engine Only) Vanner Box
D3-12
D03013
SECTION E
ELECTRICAL PROPULSION COMPONENTS
INDEX
ELECTRICAL PROPULSION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-1
General System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-1
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-1
17FL275 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-3
Computer Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-5
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-5
2-Digit Display Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-8
Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-8
Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-9
Event Code Descriptions (Table I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E2-11
Subcode Descriptions (Table II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-18
Portable Test Unit (PTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-20
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-20
Software Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-22
The Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-23
PTU Software Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-24
Configuration (CFG) File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-25
Statex Configuration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-31
Programming the Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-42
PTU Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-42
Download Configuration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-44
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-46
Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-48
Statistical Data Codes - Counters (Table III). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-50
Statistical Data Codes - Profiles (Table IV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-55
Truck Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-59
Temporary Truck Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-60
Miscellaneous Software Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-61
Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-61
PTU Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-61
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PROPULSION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-63
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-63
Electric Wheel Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-63
Retarding Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-63
Acceleration Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-63
Electronic Accelerator and Retard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-66
Cooling Blower Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-67
Electrical Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-68
STATEX III Electric Drive Components Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-74
Detroit Diesel Electronic Engine Controls Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-75
E01009 3/98
Index
E1-1
1. Electric shock can cause serious of fatal injury. Only qualified electrical maintenance personnel should perform electrical testing. Use caution during test procedures to protect personnel
from injury. All potential testing should be considered hazardous and proper precautions are
necessary.
2. General Electric DOES NOT recommend removing control cards or panel connectors prior to
welding. When welding on a truck, connect the welders ground cable directly to, or as close
as possible to the part being welded. Welder cables should not be placed near truck system
power cables or wiring harnesses.
3. Any tim one of the plug-in circuit cards must be removed or reinstalled, be certain that the
control power switch is Off. Wear a properly grounded wrist strap when removing a card to
prevent damage caused by static electricity. After card removal, place in a static proof bag or
container.
4. Extreme care should be exercised to prevent damage to the various semi-conductor devices
and low impedance circuits under test. When using an ohmmeter to check diodes, transistors, and low power conductors, care must be used when using the ohms x 1 scale. Excessive current can damage the meter.When using the Hi-pot tester or megger, disconnect the
104 pin connectors CNA, CNB, CND, and CNE located at the top of the 17FL275 panel. Refer
to the GE publication VEHICLE TEST INSTRUCTIONS FOR OHV STATEX III SYSTEMS for
additional instructions.
5. Do not make open circuit Voltage checks in propulsion mode.
6. Parking brakes and service brakes have to be released for some tests. When this occurs,
make sure wheels are blocked.
E1-2
Index
E01009 3/98
CONTROL SYSTEM
E02011C1 1/96
The system . . . .
Establishes the propulsion circuit by energizing
contactors P1, P2 (if installed), MF, GF, and GFR
to power the wheelmotors.
Establishes the retarding circuit by energizing
contactors MF, GF, GFR, RP1, RP2, RP3, RP4,
RP5, (and optionally RP6, RP7, RP8 and RP9)
for extended range retarding to connect grid
resistors RG1 and RG2 in the motor circuits.
Extended
range
retarding
is
regulated
automatically by sequentially energizing the RP3RP9 contactors.
Provides current limit control so that specific rates
may be maintained in both motoring and retarding.
Provides Retard Speed Control for automatic
speed regulation on long down-hill runs.
Provides two-speed overspeed control which
allows a higher overspeed restriction when
traveling empty.
Provides Alternator Tertiary Winding protection
and Wheelmotor overcurrent protection.
Initiates the necessary operating restrictions,
including the shut down of the truck if a system
fault is detected. Lesser faults or events cause
respective indicating lights to light. All events are
recorded for future review by technicians.
Provides fault/event information to the operator/
technician as to the status of the system via the
2-digit display panel, located in the control
cabinet. This panel, showing a two digit display of
00 to 99, indicates to the technician the existence
of possible faults or other events which have
occurred within the control and/or propulsion
system.
Provides automatic and manual diagnostic selftest routines to detect faults and to assist
maintenance personnel in locating a poorly
operating system/subsystem.
Provides a statistical data history log which
indicates lifetime, quarterly, monthly and daily
performance data. This history log can be
accessed using a laptop computer, and can be
a valuable aid in determining equipment use and
maintenance schedules.
E2-1
System Operation
When the operator depresses the accelerator foot
pedal to propel the truck, two signals are generated.
One signal is generated by a potentiometer on the
foot pedal and is sent to the engine control system to
regulate engine speed. The other signal is generated
by closing a switch* and is sent to the digital input/
output card to set up propulsion circuits for power.
*Note: On trucks equipped with the Fuel Saver
option, the foot pedal potentiometer signal is sent
directly to the FL275 panel and the switch signal is
not required.
A speed sensor signal from the engine is sent to the
analog input and output card to establish the acceleration (power) reference signal used by the propulsion
control system to establish horsepower demand.
NOTE: The analog input and output card in the
17FL275 panel responds to both accelerator and
retard foot pedal signals. Both signals are processed
through the central processing unit CPU, returned to
the analog card where another signal is generated
and fed to the FM466 and FM467 Static Exciter
panels.
E2-2
E02011C1 1/96
17FL275 PANEL
The 17FL275 electronic card panel contains a microprocessor (CPU), a small computer which monitors a
variety of input signals and establishes certain controlling output signals which result in the regulation of
the propulsion system. If a laptop computer,
referred to as a Portable Test Unit (PTU) is connected, it can also provide a readout of the memory
of the operating history of many of the sub-systems
which make up the control system. This is useful to
technicians looking for problem areas during troubleshooting.
Setting up new trucks or making changes to truck
control system parameters requires a PTU and an
authorized technician to operate it. The microprocessor in the electronic card panel can only be changed
electronically with appropriate commands and programs using the PTU.
HAULPAK
E02011C1 1/96
E2-3
CARD REPLACEMENT
Card Repair
Some of the components on the cards are sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage, it is
recommended that a properly connected ground
strap be worn whenever removing, handling or
installing a card. After a card has been removed,
it must be carried and stored in a static proof bag
or container. Be certain control power is OFF
before removing a card.
NOTE: There are no adjustment potentiometers on
the control cards. Cards should not be removed
during troubleshooting unless it has been determined
that a card is at fault.
Removal
1. The FB cards are removed by first loosening
the two spring clips on the top of the hinged
cover. Swing the cover down to gain access to
the cards.
FB cards in the 17FL275 panel are not field repairable. Should one of the cards become inoperable, it
should be returned to the HAULPAK Distributor
under the GE Unit Exchange Program.
Cards should be packed in a special shipping container, designed specifically for shipping these cards.
Contact your HAULPAK Distributor for instructions
on how to obtain these containers.
PANEL WIRING
The connectors for the FB cards, located on the end
of the card that plugs into the panel, each contain
210 pins.
The panel back, or backplane, has receptacles for
the card connectors, each having 210 pins to which
wires are wrapped, not soldered. The wrapping is
done with a special tool which wraps the wire tightly
around the pin. The pins are long enough to enable
connecting multiple wires. The panel backplane also
has printed circuits on it to facilitate inter-card circuit
connections.
E2-4
E02011C1 1/96
COMPUTER DESCRIPTION
A total understanding of the following concepts is not
essential to properly maintaining and troubleshooting
the HAULPAK truck control system. This information
is presented as additional background information
concerning operation of the 17FL275 panel computer
and software programs required for operation. The
technician should however, become familiar with
basic operation of portable, IBM operating system
compatible (DOS) computers (PTU) and must have
the ability to use the menu operated software
described later in this publication. These skills are
necessary for programming the FL275 panel computer, troubleshooting, and obtaining statistical data.
Microprocessor
The microprocessor, located on the FB101 card, contains the logical elements necessary to perform calculations and to carry out stored instructions. It is
used as the central processing unit (CPU) of a computer. Computer operation is managed by a software
program, which resides in the computer's memory.
The software program also contains instructions to
test and fault isolate the system.
A program is a sequence of specific instructions in an
order that, when the microprocessor executes them,
proper results occur. A program is generally stored in
a read-only-memory (ROM). To execute the program,
the microprocessor reads an instruction from ROM,
interprets the instruction, performs whatever task that
is dictated by the instruction, and then starts the process over again by reading a new instruction from
ROM.
The microprocessor utilizes address, control, and
data buses to accomplish the above process. A bus
is a group of wires or circuits that collectively serve a
similar function. For example, the address bus identifies the location that the microprocessor is reading
from or writing to. The data bus provides a path for
the flow of data from one point to another. The control bus is somewhat different from the other two
buses in that each wire normally serves a separate
and generally unrelated function used to control the
actions of the system.
While executing the program, reading and writing of
data is often necessary. This data is stored in a random-access-memory (RAM). A RAM is a temporary
storage device, that is, if power to the RAM is lost,
the data is cleared. The RAM stores all types of data,
such as, input/status from external devices, fault
information, specific program addresses, etc.
E02011C1 1/96
SOFTWARE
Software refers to computer programs written using
coded instructions that can be understood by the
CPU.
The following is a brief description of how the software establishes and regulates propulsion and
retarding.
Base Monitor Program
The Base Monitor Program performs functions for
the system, including power-up tests on the CPU
card. This software is programmed on four Eprom
chips at the factory and installed on the FB101 card.
Runtime Monitor Program - OBJ
Running Code
The Runtime Monitor Program is used to control
common truck functions. It is downloaded to Flash
(Electrically Erasable Read Only Memory) chips on
the CPU card from OBJ files stored on the PTU hard
drive. This is done initially during factory check-out
and can be redone in the field using the PTU.
After being downloaded to Flash, it is then copied to
RAM (Random Access Memory) chips on the CPU
card at system power-up.
This software:
Controls contactors, relays, lights, solenoid, firing
pulses, etc.
Monitors truck running parameters and stores
event/fault data for later examination.
Communicates with the PTU to display operating
parameters and event/fault data.
E2-5
E2-6
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
Retarding
When the operator presses the retard pedal, acceleration is canceled and the propulsion contactors are
dropped out. The state machine enters the coast
state and then the into retarding state. It remains
in this state until all of the contactors necessary for
retarding are in the correct position.
The state machine then enters the retard state. Firing pulses are issued to the static exciters based on
operator request and on various system feedbacks.
E2-7
E2-8
E02011C1 1/96
Frames
Every few seconds the system also collects frames
which are bits of time. The time duration of each
frame is set using the PTU, in increments of 0.01
seconds. Frames are collected right after all of the
systems' input/output functions (events) are complete, as a record of system function at the time of
the event.
Each frame contains 40 floating point values, all digital input and output values, the state machine's current state at the time of the event.
Each time an event is reported, a frame (known as
the trigger frame) is kept for that event until the event
is erased.
Running Count
This is the total count of all events of this type
seen since Running Count was last cleared by
the PTU.
Life Count
This is the total count of all events of this type
ever recorded. The maximum number which
can be recorded is 4,294,967,295. When this
number is reached, the count will roll over.
Accept Limit
Windows
Some events may also have frame windows - a collection of 51 frames, that is, all the frames that occur
for 40 frames before the event, a frame at the event,
and 10 frames after the event.
The system will save each event window for the first
16 events that are qualified to have windows. They
will be saved until the event is erased. After 16 windows are stored, no additional windows can be
stored.
System Categories
All of the possible events which can occur have been
programmed to fall into eight different categories, to
enable the system to respond correctly. They are:
Active Events Count
This is the current number of events of this type
which are active, i.e., which may affect truck
operation.
Decay Active Events Count Time
This is the time in seconds which specified the
rate at which the Active Events Count decays,
allowing a certain number of events to occur
normally over a given time frame without
affecting truck operation.
Lockout DOS Limit
This controls how often a truck operator may
reset the operating restrictions caused by an
event type, using the Dump Override Switch
(DOS) switch in the cab.
E02011C1 1/96
If the Active Events Count is equal to the Lockout DOS Limit for a given type, the Override
switch (DOS) will have no effect on operating
restrictions caused by that event. The Active
Events Count (for that type) will not be decayed
by the Decay Active Events Count
E2-9
E2-10
E02011C1 1/96
NOTE: The information listed under Event Values provides additional detail for each event and is described as
follows:
Decay Time . . . . . . . . . How long events are held in active count memory (in seconds).
Lock Limit . . . . . . . . . . Operator cab reset is disabled when lock limit is reached within decay time.
Acceptable Limit: . . . . . Maximum number of occurrences of an event code which can be recorded in FL275.
Window Limit: . . . . . . . Maximum number of an event with 51 frame windows.
00
01
02
08
09
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
Reset All
(no events displayed)
Pedal Accel
Pedal Retard
EVENT RESTRICTION
11
GF Contactor
GFR Relay
E02011C1 1/96
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
None
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
1800
20
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
N/A
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck &
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck &
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
3600
10
N/A
20
System Event
10
DETECTION
INFORMATION
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
E2-11
12
13
14
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
E2-12
EVENT RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
MF Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
3600
10
P1 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
P2 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP1 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP2 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP3 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP4 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP5 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP6 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
RP7 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
E02011C1 1/96
24
25
26
27
28
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
RP8 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
RP9 Contactor
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
Forward Coil
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
Reverse Coil
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
Forward/Reverse
Call
System Event
In ACCEL: Shut down truck
and turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
N/A
N/A
30
Analog Output
(See Subcodes)
31
Frequency Output
N/A
N/A
32
Analog Input
(See Subcodes)
Software error.
Bad 101 or 102/140 card.
Check subcodes (Table II)
with PTU for more detail.
N/A
N/A
33
Frequency Input
(See Subcodes)
N/A
N/A
37
Hardware Startup
(See Subcodes)
1800
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
N/A
45
Diode Fault
E02011C1 1/96
E2-13
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
3600
10
46
Motor 1
Overcurrent
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
47
Motor 2
Overcurrent
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
Motor Field
Overcurrent
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
Motor Stall
3600
10
51
Motor Spin
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
3600
10
52
Alternator
Tertiary
Overcurrent
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
Current in alternator field tertiary windings exceeds limits for a preset time.
Check for shorted diodes or
SCRs in AFSE.
N/A
Motor Tertiary
Overcurrent
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT light only.
N/A
48
49
50
53
E2-14
E02011C1 1/96
EVENT RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
+15 Power
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
3600
10
-15 Power
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
+19 Power
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
Motor Polarity
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
PTU Configuration
System Event
In ACCEL: No propel and
turn on SYSFLT light.
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
System Event
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600
10
System Event
In RETARD: Turn on SYSFLT
light only.
3600N
10
63
N/A
N/A
10
64
Motor 1 Over
Temperature
N/A
N/A
10
54
55
56
57
59
61
62
E02011C1 1/96
E2-15
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
65
Motor 2 Over
Temperature
N/A
N/A
10
66
Overspeed
Retarding
N/A
N/A
50
67
Speed Retard
Exceeded
N/A
N/A
10
68
Retard
Overcurrent
N/a
N/A
25
69
Horsepower Low
N/A
N/A
25
70
Horsepower Limit
Exceeded
N/A
N/A
10
71
N/A
N/A
10
NOTE: * The following event codes (72 & 73) applicable only to Cummins engines with special sensors installed and options activated.
72
*Oil Pressure
Warning
73
*Oil Pressure
Shutdown
74
*Coolant Pressure
Warning
75
*Coolant Pressure
Warning
76
*Crankcase Overpressure
77
*Coolant Over
Temperature
E2-16
N/A
N/A
10
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSDWN Light.
N/A
N/A
10
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSERV Light.
N/A
N/A
10
N/A
N/A
10
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSERV Light.
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSDWN Light.
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSDWN Light.
N/A
N/A
10
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSERV Light.
N/A
N/A
10
E02011C1 1/96
78
79
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
EVENT RESTRICTION
DETECTION
INFORMATION
EVENT VALUES
Decay
Time
Lock
Limit
Accept
Limit
Window
Limit
Engine Service
Recorded in memory.
Turn On ENGSERV Light.
N/A
N/A
10
Engine Shutdown
N/A
N/A
10
N/A
N/A
10
80
Engine Speed
Retard
Recorded in memory.
81
Motor 1 Voltage
Limit Exceeded
N/A
N/A
10
82
Motor 2 Voltage
Limited Exceeded
N/A
N/A
10
83
Alternator Field
Current Level
N/A
N/A
10
88
Lamp Test
None.
N/A
N/A
10
N/A
N/A
10
90
91
92
Bad Engine
Sensor
N/A
N/A
10
98
Data Store
Recorded in memory.
N/A
N/A
11
10
Recorded in memory.
1800
99
Software
E02011C1 1/96
E2-17
SUBCODE
No.
TERM
DESCRIPTION
ANALOG OUTPUT
30:
54
AF_CURR_REF
55
MF_CURR_REF
56
BRKBLV
57
ENGRPMCMD
61
SIG1
62
SIG2
63
SIG3
64
SIG4
65
SIG5
32:
E2-18
18
GND
19
GAINCHK
20
GROUND_FAULT
21
M1_AMPS
22
M2_AMPS
23
MF_AMPS
24
ALT_F_AMPS
25
ENGHPCUT
26
SRS
27
RPINHI
28
ALTFVOLT
29
ALT_OUT_VOLT
30
M2_VOLTS
31
APINHI
32
SVBE
33
TMFSE
34
ATOC
35
MTOC
36
M1TS
37
M2TS
38
TAFSE
39
PAYLOAD
40
COOLT
41
COOLP
42
CRANKP
43
OILP
E02011C1 1/96
SUBCODE
No.
TERM
DESCRIPTION
ANALOG INPUT
32:
44
VOLTS_15P
45
VOLTS_15N
46
LO_BATT_VOLT
47
HI_BATT_VOLT
48
VOLTS_19P
49
TAMB
50
Undefined3
FREQUENCY INPUT
33:
51
ENG_SPD
52
M1_SPD
53
M2_SPD
37:
E02011C1 1/96
EPROM CRC
WATCHDOG TEST
READY TIMEOUT
CLOCK INTERRUPT
FLASH CRC
SRAM TEST
BRAM CRC
DATE/TIME CHECK
10
11
INTERRUPT OVERFLOW
12
WATCHDOG
13
BAD MEMORY
14
MANUAL
15
ANALOG READBACK
16
ANALOG A TO D
17
ANALOG GNDCHK
18
FCLOCK STATUS
19
FCLOCK STOPPED
20
FCLOCK SEQUENCE
21
FPULSE STATUS
22
FPULSE SEQUENCE
23
FPULSE COUNT
E2-19
OPERATIONAL HINTS
E2-20
APPLIES TO:
SAMPLE
Bold Type
Quotation Marks
gemenu
[Brackets]
E02011C1 1/96
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
PREPARATION
There are four diskettes in a software code release.
The diskettes are labelled as follows:
Statex Utilities
Statex PTU Screens
Statex Object Code
Statex Configuration Code
E02011C1 1/96
E2-21
E2-22
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-23
E2-24
E02011C1 1/96
CONFIGURATION (CFG)
FILE CONVERSION
When new GE software code is installed on the PTU
to replace older versions of software, it will not contain the existing truck configuration data (overspeeds, serial numbers, option choices, etc.) already
in current truck files. Previously, you were required to
retype all of this information, one file for each truck
into newly created configuration files.
The Configuration Conversion Tool (UPDATE CFG
VERSION option on the main menu) eliminates the
need for any truck configuration data retyping. It will
convert this truck data from the existing August 1993
configuration files. If March 1992 CFG files are to be
used with the July 1994 release, it is necessary to
first convert the CFG files to the August 1994
release. The August 1994 CFG files can then be converted for use with the July 1994 release.
NOTE: For the configuration conversion tool to work
properly, the OEM must have saved their OEM file in
both the \GEOHV\CFG\STXJUL94 directory and the
\GEOHV\CFG\STXJUL94\TRUCK
directory
on
diskette #4.
Conversion Procedure
Use the following procedure to convert configuration
files used with previous versions of software for use
in the current version:
Search for old CFG filenames:
1. Select the previous software version by typing
oldge at the DOS C:>> prompt.
E02011C1 1/96
E2-25
E2-26
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-27
13. Press [F4] to create the new file. The mine data
from the file in the first column is copied and put
into the OEM file in the third column to create
the name you entered in the fourth column. See
Figure 2-8. Note that both asterisks (*) have
changed to plus signs (+), indicating the file has
been created and copied to the hard disk.
14. Use the DOWN arrow to move the cursor to the
next file name. Note the equal (=) signs move
with the cursor.
15. Use the RIGHT arrow key and move the cursor
to the right.
16. Type in the new file name.
17. Press [ENTER]. The example in Figure 2-9
shows the new file name to be TEST2.
18. Use the DOWN arrow key and move the cursor
to the next file name.
19. Move the cursor to the right to position the cursor on the name.
E2-28
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-29
E2-30
E02011C1 1/96
A) Source Directory: . . .
The following examples illustrate the various selections available from the TRUCK SETUP CONFIGURATION MINE MENU and the procedure required to
create and save a configuration file for a specific
truck.
If configuration files are to be retrieved from a different directory, use the following procedure:
1. Move the cursor to line A) and press [ENTER].
If all configuration files are stored in the default directory that appears when the TRUCK SETUP CONFIGURATION MINE MENU appears, no change to
line A) is necessary.
E02011C1 1/96
E2-31
5 = GE file name
6 = GE filename.extension
E2-32
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-33
E2-34
E02011C1 1/96
i. Optional
installed
temperature
sensor
motor
temperature
sensor
N: 28 v trip
NOTE: Y is used for DDEC and MTU engine system
interface for Engine Service and Engine Shutdown
digital inputs.
c. Engine crankcase pressure sensor installed
Y:
motor
Y:
E02011C1 1/96
E2-35
manual
or
automatic
Y: Manual
N: Automatic
NOTE: It is recommended that this value is always
set to N to select automatic. In this condition the
system will automatically adjust the electrical system
load to maintain the ENGINE FULL LOAD RPM
value specified in step d.
E2-36
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-37
E2-38
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-39
E2-40
E02011C1 1/96
PRIVILEGE
200
1000
SCREEN TITLE
LEVEL
PRIVILEGE
SCREEN TITLE
1000
1100
2990
4990
Profiles Screen
E02011C1 1/96
E2-41
PTU LOGON
1. Enter your name:
2. Enter your password:
Your Privilege level is: 10000
E2-42
E02011C1 1/96
0
0
0
1
E02011C1 1/96
E2-43
E2-44
E02011C1 1/96
( ) Yes
( ) No
E02011C1 1/96
E2-45
Event Data
The EVENT DATA MENU selection from the SPECIAL OPERATION MENU allows the technician to
view event data stored in the CPU, save the event
data to a file and to erase event data when storage of
the information is no longer necessary. Event data is
used to troubleshoot system problems and is normally erased after the problem has been corrected
and the information is no longer needed.
The event data is accessed by initially selecting PTU
TALK TO TRUCK from the GE OHV STATEX III
MENU and following the procedure below:
( )
( )
EXIT
( )
( )
EXIT
FIGURE 2-28. EVENT DATA MENU
(All Menu Choices Available)
E2-46
E02011C1 1/96
A:ev00120
E02011C1 1/96
E2-47
STATISTICAL DATA
View Counters
The Statistical Data Collector uses the memory capability of the computer to record and store hundreds of
system parameters unique to each individual truck.
These parameters are divided into two types;
Counters and Profiles.
1. While the STATISTICAL DATA MENU is displayed, use the arrow keys to move the cursor
to the VIEW COUNTERS selection and press
[ENTER]. The STATISTICAL COUNTERS
SCREEN will be displayed.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the counters. Press [ESC] to return to
the exit choice.
3. When finished viewing the information, press
[ENTER] again to exit this screen.
Selecting SPECIAL OPERATION in the following procedure may present a safety hazard if the
engine is running. Control of the propulsion system may transfer to the PTU operator from the
truck driver with this software operation. Refer to
Step 1. below:
1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
SPECIAL OPERATION selection on the GE
STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU and press
[ENTER]. The screen shown in Figure 2-25 will
be displayed to alert the operator about the
state of the truck software.
This warning notifies the operator when control
of the truck is being transferred from the truck
driver to the PTU, based on the PTU selection
of SPECIAL OPERATION.
When finished and the PTU is returned to the
GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU, control of the
propulsion system is returned to the truck driver.
Before activating this command, the screen
shown in Figure 2-26 will be displayed.
The PTU user should always keep the truck
driver appraised of this control.
2. Select YES on the caution screen (Figure 225) and press [ENTER]. The SPECIAL OPERATION MENU will be displayed.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
STATISTICAL DATA MENU selection and
press [ENTER]. The STATISTICAL DATA
MENU screen will be displayed. Selections
available on this menu are as follows:
E2-48
View Profiles
This screen displays currents, voltages and speeds
as a history of truck operation. Each profile is broken
into a number of Bins and each Bin has a range of
values. In this manner, the entire range of the parameter from minimum to maximum is covered. The
result is a histogram for each parameter covered by a
profile. Refer to Table IV for a listing of all active profiles.
1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
VIEW PARAMETER PROFILES selection and
press [ENTER]. The PROFILE screen will be
displayed. Use [F3] and [F4] to move through all
profiles.
2. When finished viewing this screen, press
[ENTER] again to exit this screen.
E02011C1 1/96
E02011C1 1/96
E2-49
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
COUNT CONDITIONS
Hours
Hours
Number of hours wheel was powered in either propulsion or retard mode and:
. . . Speed is above 50 RPM
. . . Current is above 50 amps (absolute value)
Hours
Number of hours wheel was powered in either propulsion or retard mode and:
. . . Speed is above 50 RPM
. . . Current is above 50 amps (absolute value)
Hours
Hours
Hours
Hours
Idle Hours
Hours
Hours
Number of hours truck has propulsion system faults and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
. . . Clock will start anytime a fault is recorded that restricts propulsion and
. . . the propulsion mode is requested.
. . . Clock will stop when propulsion mode is no longer requested or
. . . when all restrictive faults are reset
10
Hours
Sum of propulsion mode, retard mode, coast mode and idle hours
11
Hours
12
Hours
Miles
Value is calculated by integrating the higher of the two wheel speed signals and
displaying the cumulative value in miles
. . . Active when control power (CPR) is on
. . . Not sensitive to vehicle direction
Kilometers
Value is calculated by integrating the higher of the two wheel speed signals and
displaying the cumulative value in kilometers
. . . Active when control power (CPR) is on
. . . Not sensitive to vehicle direction
13
14
20
Speed Override
Occurrences
Number of times Speed Override mode condition has changed from false to true
21
Body Up Switch
Occurrences
Number of times Dump Body Switch input has changed from false to true
22
RS Switch
Occurrences
Number of times Retard Switch input has changed from false to true
23
AS Switch
Occurrences
Number of times Accel Switch input has changed from false to true
24
Override Switch
Occurrences
Number of times Override Switch input has changed from false to true
25
Forward Switch
Occurrences
26
Reverse Switch
Occurrences
27
Neutral Switch
Occurrences
28
Retard Mode
Occurrences
E2-50
E02011C1 1/96
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
COUNT CONDITIONS
29
Propel Mode
Occurrences
30
Coast Mode
Occurrences
31
P1 Pickup
Occurrences
32
P2 Pickup
Occurrences
33
RP1 Pickup
Occurrences
34
RP2 Pickup
Occurrences
35
RP3 Pickup
Occurrences
36
RP4 Pickup
Occurrences
37
RP5 Pickup
Occurrences
38
RP6 Pickup
Occurrences
39
RP7 Pickup
Occurrences
40
RP8 Pickup
Occurrences
41
RP9 Pickup
Occurrences
42
GF Pickup
Occurrences
43
GFR Pickup
Occurrences
44
MF Pickup
Occurrences
49
Occurrences
Number of times service brake has been applied with truck speed above 8 MPH
50
Park Brake
Occurrences
Number of times Park Brake Off has changed from false to true
51
Service Brake
Occurrences
Number of times Service Brake Pressure Switch has changed from false to true
52
Loaded Switch
Occurrences
53
Reverser Moves
Occurrences
54
Occurrences
Number of times Selector Switch was moved with truck speed greater than no
motion (2 MPH)
55
CPR Pickup
Occurrences
56
Engine Starts
Occurrences
Number of times engine speed goes from <450 RPM to >450 RPM
57
Occurrences
58
Both AS & RS
Occurrences
59
Occurrences
60
Occurrences
61
Occurrences
62
RS & nomotion
Occurrences
63
RSC Switch On
Occurrences
64
Occurrences
Number of times Retard Speed Control pot is moved more than 1 MPH while
RSC is On.
65
Occurrences
Number of times MANUAL DIGITAL OUTPUT TEST screen has been selected
at the SPECIAL OPERATION WITH ENGINE STOPPED TEST menu
66
Program Truck
Occurrences
E02011C1 1/96
E2-51
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
COUNT CONDITIONS
67
Special Operation
Occurrences
68
Events Erased
Occurrences
69
Normal Operation
Occurrences
70
Occurrences
Number of times AS and Park Brake have been activated at the same time. New
counts will be recorded when a state change occurs. If both signals are present
for 2 hours, only one count is recorded.
71
Occurrences
Number of times Park Brake switch has been turned On when truck speed is
above 0.3 MPH.
72
Occurrences
80
M1 Amps Propel
Seconds
81
M2 Amps Propel
Seconds
82
M1 Amps Retard
Seconds
83
M2 Amps Retard
Seconds
84
MF Amps Propel
Seconds
85
MF Amps Retard
Seconds
86
Hours
87
Hours
88
M1 Temp Degrees C
Seconds
89
M2 Temp Degrees C
Seconds
90
Seconds
91
Seconds
98
Seconds
99
Seconds
101
Occurrences
102
Occurrences
108
Accelerator Pedal
Occurrences
109
Retard Pedal
Occurrences
110
GF
Occurrences
111
GFR
Occurrences
112
MF
Occurrences
113
P1
Occurrences
114
P2
Occurrences
115
RF1
Occurrences
116
RF2
Occurrences
117
RP1
Occurrences
118
RP2
Occurrences
119
RP3
Occurrences
E2-52
E02011C1 1/96
DESCRIPTION
120
RP4
Occurrences
121
RP5
Occurrences
122
RP6
Occurrences
123
RP7
Occurrences
124
RP8
Occurrences
125
RP9
Occurrences
126
FORWARD
Occurrences
127
REVERSE
Occurrences
130
Analog Output
Occurrences
131
Occurrences
132
Analog Input
Occurrences
133
Frequency Input
Occurrences
137
Startup Fault
Occurrences
145
Diode Fault
Occurrences
146
Motor 1
Overcurrent
Occurrences
147
Motor 2
Overcurrent
Occurrences
148
MFld Marm
Occurrences
UNITS
COUNT CONDITIONS
149
MF Overcurrent
Occurrences
150
Motor Stall
Occurrences
151
Motor Spin
Occurrences
152
Alternator Tertiary
Overcurrent
Occurrences
153
Motor Tertiary
Overcurrent
Occurrences
154
+15V Power
Occurrences
155
-15V Power
Occurrences
156
+19V Power
Occurrences
157
Motor Polarity
Occurrences
161
Retard Grid 1
Occurrences
162
Retard Grid 2
Occurrences
163
Blower Fault
Occurrences
164
M1 Overtemp
Occurrences
165
M2 Overtemp
Occurrences
E02011C1 1/96
E2-53
DESCRIPTION
166
Overspeed
Occurrences
167
Speed Retard
Exceeded
Occurrences
168
Retard Overcurrent
Occurrences
169
Horsepower Low
Occurrences
170
HP Limit Exceeded
Occurrences
171
Engine Overspeed
Exceeded
Occurrences
172
Occurrences
173
Occurrences
174
Engine Coolant
Pressure Warning
Occurrences
175
Engine Coolant
Press Shutdown
Occurrences
176
Engine Crankcase
Pressure
Occurrences
177
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Occurrences
178
Engine Service
Occurrences
179
Engine Shutdown
Occurrences
180
Engine Speed
Retard
Occurrences
181
Motor 1 Voltage
Limit
Occurrences
182
Motor 2 Voltage
Limit
Occurrences
183
Alternator Field
Amps
Occurrences
190
Battery Voltage
Low
Occurrences
191
Battery Voltage
High
Occurrences
192
Occurrences
193
Occurrences
198
Datastore
Occurrences
199
Software
Occurrences
E2-54
UNITS
COUNT CONDITIONS
E02011C1 1/96
80
DESCRIPTION
M1 Amps Propel
(In seconds)
COUNT CONDITIONS
81
M2 Amps Propel
(In seconds)
PAR
No.
82
DESCRIPTION
M1 Amps Retard
(in seconds)
COUNT CONDITIONS
83
M2 Amps Retard
(in seconds)
E02011C1 1/96
BUCKET No.
CURRENT
VALUE
(AMPS)
below 500
501 to 750
751 to 850
851 to 950
951 to 1050
1051 to 1150
1151 to 1250
1251 to 1350
1351 to 1450
10
1451 to 1550
11
1551 to 1800
12
1801 to 2150
13
2151 to 2300
14
2301 to 2600
15
2601 to 2900
16
2901 to 3200
17
above 3201
BUCKET No.
CURRENT
VALUE
(AMPS)
below 200
201 to 300
301 to 400
401 to 500
501 to 600
601 to 700
701 to 800
801 to 900
901 to 1000
10
1001 to 1100
11
1101 to 1200
12
1201 to 1350
13
1351 to 1450
14
1451 to 1550
15
1551 to 1650
16
1651 to 1750
17
above 1751
E2-55
DESCRIPTION
COUNT CONDITIONS
MF Amps Propel
(in seconds)
85
MF Amps Retard
(in seconds)
PAR
No.
86
87
E2-56
DESCRIPTION
COUNT CONDITIONS
BUCKET No.
CURRENT
VALUE
(AMPS)
0 to 100
101 to 125
126 to 150
151 to 175
176 to 200
201 to 225
226 to 250
251 to 275
276 to 300
10
301 to 325
11
326 to 375
12
376 to 450
13
451 to 550
14
551 to 650
15
651 to 800
16
801 to 950
17
951 to 9999
BUCKET No.
NET INPUT
HP RANGE
below 200
201 to 400
401 to 600
601 to 800
801 to 1000
1001 to 1200
1201 to 1400
1401 to 1600
1601 to 1800
10
1801 to 2000
11
2001 to 2200
12
2201 to 2400
13
2401 to 2600
14
2601 to 2800
15
2801 to 3000
16
3001 to 3200
17
above 3201
E02011C1 1/96
88
DESCRIPTION
M1 Temp C
(in seconds)
COUNT CONDITIONS
BUCKET No.
89
M2 Temp C
(in seconds)
PAR
No.
90
DESCRIPTION
Truck Speed
MPH
(in seconds)
COUNT CONDITIONS
91
Engine Speed
RPM
(in seconds)
E02011C1 1/96
BUCKET
No.
TEMP RANGE
(C)
-40 to 100
101 to 110
111 to 120
121 to 130
131 to 140
141 to 150
151 to 160
161 to 170
171 to 180
10
181 to 190
11
191 to 200
12
201 to 210
13
211 to 220
14
221 to 230
15
231 to 240
16
241 to 250
17
251 to 9999
TRUCK
SPEED
MPH
ENGINE SPD
RPM
0 to 1
below 600
2 to 3
601 to 800
4 to 6
801 to 900
7 to 9
901 to 1000
10 to 12
1001 to 1100
13 to 15
1101 to 1200
16 to 18
1201 to 1300
19 to 21
1301 to 1400
22 to 24
1401 to 1500
10
25 to 27
1501 to 1600
11
28 to 30
1601 to 1700
12
31 to 33
1701 to 1800
13
34 to 36
1801 to 1900
14
37 to 39
1901 to 2000
15
40 to 42
2001 to 2100
16
43 to 45
2101 to 2200
17
45 & above
above 2200
E2-57
98
DESCRIPTION
AFSE Temp C
(in seconds)
COUNT CONDITIONS
99
MFSE Temp C
(in seconds)
E2-58
BUCKET No.
TEMP RANGE
(C)
below 20
21 to 40
41 to 50
51 to 60
61 to 70
71 to 80
81 to 90
91 to 100
101 to 105
10
106 to 110
11
111 to 120
12
121 to 125
13
126 to 130
14
131 to 135
15
136 to 140
16
141 to 145
17
above 146
E02011C1 1/96
Selecting SPECIAL OPERATION in the following procedure may present a safety hazard if the
engine is running. Control of the propulsion system may transfer to the PTU operator from the
truck driver with this software operation. Refer to
Step 1. below:
1. With the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU displayed, select SPECIAL OPERATION and
press [ENTER].
The screen shown in Figure 2-30 will be displayed to alert the operator about the state of
the truck software.
This warning notifies the operator when control
of the truck is being transferred from the truck
driver to the PTU, based on the PTU selection
of SPECIAL OPERATION.
When finished and the PTU is returned to the
GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU, control of the
propulsion system is returned to the truck driver.
Before activating this command, the screen
shown in Figure 2-31 will be displayed.
The PTU user should always keep the truck
driver appraised of this control.
2. Select YES on the caution screen (Figure 230) and press [ENTER]. The SPECIAL OPERATION MENU will be displayed.
Selection of NORMAL OPERATION gives truck
control to the driver.
Continue?
( )Yes
( )No
OR
Selection of SPECIAL OPERATION will override
truck driver controls until you exit to the PTU
main menu.
Continue?
( )Yes
( )No
E02011C1 1/96
E2-59
Selecting SPECIAL OPERATION in the following procedure may present a safety hazard if the
engine is running. Control of the propulsion system may transfer to the PTU operator from the
truck driver with this software operation. Refer to
Step 1. below:
1. With the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU displayed, select SPECIAL OPERATION and
press [ENTER].
The screen shown in Figure 2-30 will be displayed to alert the operator about the state of
the truck software.
This warning notifies the operator when control
of the truck is being transferred from the truck
driver to the PTU, based on the PTU selection
of SPECIAL OPERATION.
When finished and the PTU is returned to the
GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU, control of the
propulsion system is returned to the truck driver.
Before activating this command, the screen
shown in Figure 2-31 will be displayed.
The PTU user should always keep the truck
driver appraised of this control.
2. Select YES on the caution screen (Figure 230) and press [ENTER]. The SPECIAL OPERATION MENU will be displayed.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
TEMPORARY TRUCK SETTINGS MENU
selection and press [ENTER].
Selections available on this menu are:
SPEED SETTINGS
New speed setting values may be typed over
the existing values to override the current configuration file settings.
E2-60
E02011C1 1/96
MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES
Ptu Abbreviations
Saving Data
Various screens showing event data, digital input and
output test data, real time data, etc. can be saved to
the PTU.
Many screens will have a selection labelled GET1.
When selected, the data gathered and displayed on
the screen will be suspended and can then be saved
permanently to a file. If this selection is available, it
should be chosen before pressing [F2] to save to a
file.
To use this feature:
1. When it is desired to save the screen display,
select GET1 using the arrow keys and press
[ENTER].
2. Press [F2] to save the screen to a file.
a. Follow the screen instructions for assigning a
file name and location for storing the file.
b. After the file has been saved, the PTU
screen data will remain suspended until the
next step is completed.
3. Selecting GET1 again will update the screen
with new data and hold it there. Step 2. may be
repeated to save the updated data if desired.
4. To resume and allow the data to be continuously updated, move the cursor to REPEAT
and press [ENTER].
If the GET1 selection is not available, the [F2] key is
used to save the screen display when applicable.
The availability of the [F2] key for saving the data will
be shown at the bottom of the screen.
E02011C1 1/96
E2-61
NOTES:
E2-62
E02011C1 1/96
ALTERNATOR
Refer to applicable GE Publication for service and
maintenance procedures.
RETARDING GRIDS
Refer to applicable GE Publication for service and
maintenance procedures. (Cooling Blower only).
E02011C2 1/96
E2-63
Differential Adjustment
The differential adjustment affects the reset point of
the switch. The adjustment is made by removing the
front cover and inserting a small screwdriver in the
large hole in right corner of the switch. Turn the differential adjustment screw (2, Figure 2-33) in a clockwise direction to increase the differential and
counterclockwise to decrease the differential.
E2-64
using
hardware
E02011C2 1/96
E02011C2 1/96
E2-65
E2-66
4. Potentiometer
5. Mounting Screws
6. Cover
Disassembly
1. Remove screws on cable clamps (1, Figure 234) and potentiometer cover (6).
2. Remove potentiometer mounting screws (5)
and grommet (3). Remove potentiometer (4).
Assembly
1. Position new potentiometer with the flat side
toward the potentiometer cover and install on
shaft as follows:
a. Align cutouts in shaft with the potentiometer
drive tangs.
b. Press potentiometer onto shaft until it bottoms against the housing.
2. Install screws (5) and lockwashers but do not
tighten.
3. Rotate potentiometer counterclockwise until
mounting slots contact the mounting screws
and tighten screws (5) to 15 in. lbs. (1.70 N.m)
torque.
4. Install grommet (3) and potentiometer cover.
Tighten screws to 15 in. lbs. (1.70 N.m)
torque.
5. Install cable clamps and tighten screws to 40 in.
lbs. (4.21 N.m) torque.
6. Inspect assembly and verify proper wiring clearance during operation of pedal throughout the
range of travel.
E02011C2 1/96
2. Adjustment Access
Cover
Test
Check the operation of the blower loss warning system as follows:
1. With the engine not running, turn the key switch
and control power On and place the selector
switch in FORWARD.
2. Depress the throttle pedal until the propulsion
contactors energize.
3. After 101 seconds, (or the value entered on the
TRUCK SPECIFICS SCREEN) the Motor
Blower warning light on the instrument panel
should turn on.
If the switch requires adjustment, refer to instructions
in Miscellaneous Component Test and Adjustment
in the Statex III Electrical System Checkout
Procedure in Section E3.
Removal
NOTE: If the blower pressure switch cannot be
adjusted to specifications and no air leaks are found,
a new switch assembly must be installed.
E02011C2 1/96
E2-67
This system is capable of developing high Voltage. Use caution when working with the system.
Components in the cabinet are labelled with abbreviations for identification. These abbreviations are
shown on the item number of the illustrations and are
listed alphabetically at the end of this section.
This information should be used in conjunction with
applicable electrical schematics located in the rear of
this manual when troubleshooting the electrical system.
Some of the components on the cards are sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage, it is
recommended that a properly connected ground
strap be worn when removing, handling or
installing a card. It is also recommended that
after a card has been removed, it is carried and
stored in a static proof bag or container.
NOTE: There are no adjustment potentiometers on
the control cards. Cards should not be removed
during troubleshooting unless it has been determined
that a card is at fault.
E2-68
E02011C2 1/96
E02011C2 1/96
E2-69
E2-70
E02011C2 1/96
3. Relay Board 2
(w/Optional Payload
Meter)
4. Acceleration Switch
5. Retard Panel
3. Diode Board 1
4. Isolation Transformer (w/Optional
Payload Meter)
E02011C2 1/96
E2-71
E2-72
7. Iso Amp 6
8. Iso Amp 7
9. Ground Block 1
10. Iso Amp 8
11. Iso Amp 4
4. Voltage Divider
Resistor
5. Ground Fault
Interrupt Panel
6. Voltage Measuring
Module 2
E02011C2 1/96
E02011C2 1/96
E2-73
ACC/RET
ACC
AFSE
AID
ALT
ALT(24V)
AM
BATT
BD
BIR
BM
BUR
CPD1, 2
CPR
CPRL
CPS
CSL
CSLS
CT
CTR
DB1, 2, 3
DL
DDR1, 2
EIS
ESSU
FBS
FDP
FDT
FP
GB1 - 4
GF
GFDR
GFIP
GFR
GRR
ISOA3 - 8
KS
E2-74
M1
M2
MF1, 2
MFC
MFDR
MFSE
OR
P1, P2
PBFR
PBS
PLCP
PTU
RB1- 6
RD
RET
REV
R1
RG1, 2
RLCB
RLR
RP1, 2,
RP3, 4, 5
6, 7, 8, 9
RSC
S1, 2
S3
S4
S6, 7
SBDT
SLR
SRR
SS
SSU1, 2
ST1, 2
2DD
VDR3
VMM1, 2
E02011C2 1/96
Power Supply
17FB103
Digital Input/Output
17FB101
17FB104
Digital Input/Output
17FB102/140
Analog Input/Output
EUI
CLM
FTS
CLS
OPS
CTS
OTS
DDEC
SEL
DDR
TPS
ECM
E02011C2 1/96
E2-75
NOTES:
E2-76
E02011C2 1/96
E03012 11/04
ii
E03012
I N F O R M A T I O N
This checkout procedure describes test and adjustment procedures for the G.E. STATEX III Electric
Wheel Drive Systems used on Model 445E, 510E, 630E, 685E, 730E, and 830E electric drive trucks
with the following alternator and wheelmotor combinations.
TRUCK MODEL
ALTERNATOR
WHEELMOTOR
445E, 510E
GTA-25
GTA-22
GE776, GE788
GTA-26
GE788, GE787
CONVENTION
APPLIES TO
SAMPLE
Bold Type
Quotation Marks
[Brackets]
Key to be pressed
E03012 11/04
E3-1
C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
P O R T
C H E C K
PTU Hookup
NOTE: The following procedure will verify correct PTU hookup and verify communication between
the PTU and the CPU. Additionally, all previous event data can be cleared prior to performing the
checkout procedure. If the truck has not been previously programmed, refer to Electrical
Propulsion Components, Section E of this manual for instructions.
1. Connect PTU communication cable male plug to connector A located in control cabinet near
two digit display as shown in Figure 3-1 or to cab Communications Port located near bottom
right side of selector switch console. Turn Control Power On.
Note: Connector A actual location may differ depending on truck model.
2. Connect female end of cable to serial port connector on rear of PTU.
3. Turn PTU power on. After warm-up and self-test, type gemenu3e (or gemenu if using version
14.00 software) at the C:> prompt and press the [ENTER] key. (Do not type quotes.)
4. From the GEOHV STATEX III (Main) MENU, select PTU TALK TO TRUCK and press
[ENTER].
5. At PTU LOGON screen, enter your name and assigned password. Press [ENTER].
6. When the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU appears, move the cursor to SPECIAL OPERATION and press [ENTER].
a. A screen will appear that states: Selection of SPECIAL OPERATION will override truck
driver controls until you exit to the PTU main menu. Continue?
b. With the cursor next to Yes, press [ENTER].
7. The SPECIAL OPERATION MENU will appear.
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the EVENT DATA MENU selection and press
[ENTER]. The Event Data Menu screen will be displayed.
a. If no event data has been stored, the screen will indicate 0 (zero) events stored. If no events
have been stored, the cursor will be positioned on EXIT. Press the [ENTER] key to return
to the previous menu.
E3-2
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-3
Always disconnect 74C at GFR for static testings (engine not running). Failure to do so may
result in damage to battery boost SCR and/or dead batteries.
If the truck body has not been installed or the body is raised, place a steel washer on Body Up
Switch or jumper circuit 71F to circuit 71, to simulate body down condition.
If hydraulic pressure is low, connect a jumper wire between circuit 73S and 710. (This step will
be necessary if all hydraulic brakes are installed and engine is not running).
E3-4
11/04 E03012
STEP
CIRCUIT
525(+)
to
952(-)
510(+)
to
952(-)
ACC
CARD
VOLTS
PTO
COUNTS
TZ6661
.75 (approx.)
18 1
EB2635
.78 (approx.)
17 1
EC1806
.53 (approx.)
21 3
TZ6661
.34 (approx.)
18 1
EB2635
.37 (approx.)
17 1
EC1806
.40 (approx.)
21 3
ADJUSTMENT
Position of pedal potentiometer. If unable to adjust,
replace potentiometer.
Adjust P1 on ACC card. If unable to adjust, replace
pedal assembly.
If out of tolerance, replace ACC card.
Adjust P1 on ACC card (Seal pot). If unable to adjust,
replace pedal assembly.
E03012 11/04
CIRCUIT
ACC CARD
VOLTS
510(+)
to
952(-)
TZ6661
.107 (approx.)
33 2
EB2635
.68 (approx.)
32 2
EC1806
.64 (approx.)
34 2
PTO COUNTS
E3-5
CIRCUIT
510(+)
to
952(-)
ACC CARD
VOLTS
PTO COUNTS
TZ6661
3.80 (approx.)
EB2635
4.35 (approx.)
EC1806
4.05 (approx.)
ACTION IF OUT
OF TOLERANCE
Replace ACC card or
pedal
E3-6
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-7
NOTE: If either pedals' off % is greater than 15% before making the pedal setting changes to the
configuration file, the system will interpret the pedal as being pressed and may cause the
contactors to energize.
3. Exit to the NORMAL OPERATION MENU, GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU and exit to the GE
OHV MENU.
4. Move the cursor to TRUCK SETUP (CFG) and press [ENTER].
5. Choose 1) Select a truck configuration, currently using file: .
6. Move the cursor to the configuration file for the truck and press [ENTER].
7. Select 5) Change/view Truck Specifics.
8. Compare the values recorded in steps 1 and 2 with values shown on the TRUCK SPECIFICS
screen. If the values differ by more than 3%, the configuration file must be changed to the values recorded above:
a. Move the cursor to :percent accel pedal travel off request. Type the value recorded in step
1.a above and press [ENTER].
b. Move the cursor to :percent accel pedal travel full request. Type the value recorded in step
1.b above and press [ENTER].
c. Move the cursor to :percent retard pedal travel off request. Type the value recorded in step
2.a above and press [ENTER].
d. Move the cursor to :percent retard pedal travel full request. Type the value recorded in step
2.b above and press [ENTER]
9. Move the cursor to LEAVE TRUCK SPECIFICS SCREEN and press [ENTER].
10. At the TRUCK SETUP CONFIGURATION MINE MENU, select 7) Save a truck configuration,
filename: and press [ENTER].
11. The current filename will be displayed. Press [ENTER] to accept this name. Type y to overwrite the old file with the new file containing the correct pedal values.
12. Choose 9) Quit. Type y to exit and return to the GE OHV STATEX III MENU.
13. Move the cursor to SELECT TRUCK SETUP and press [ENTER].
14. Move the cursor to the configuration file saved in step 11. and press [ENTER].
15. For the foot pedal changes to become effective, it is now necessary to reload the program into
the truck. Refer to PROGRAMMING THE TRUCK and follow the instructions for Download
Configuration Files in section E2.
E3-8
11/04 E03012
ACC
CARD
VOLTS
PTO
COUNTS
TZ6661
2.77 (approx.)
150 2
EB2635
3.63 (approx.)
162 2
EC1806
3.04 (approx.)
162 2
4. With retard pedal fully depressed, measure the voltage between the following circuits:
a. From 74N to 710:
Read 15.50 .25 vdc. If out of tolerance replace RET card.
b. From 54N to 710:
Read 12.50 vdc minimum. If out of tolerance replace retard pedal resistor.
c. DDEC equipped trucks only:
Use the DDR to read PTO counts or measure voltages at circuits 510(+) to 952(-) shown
in the following table:
ACC
CARD
VOLTS
PTO
COUNTS
TZ6661
2.77 (approx.)
150 2
EB2635
3.63 (approx.)
162 2
EC1806
3.04 (approx.)
162 2
5. Depress the throttle pedal fully, and again read the PTO Counts. If values change replace ACC
Card. Release throttle and retard pedals.
1.2.2 Electronic Retard Pedal; Fuel Saver Equipped Trucks and Current Production.
Refer to Section 1.1.2 for both, accelerator and retard pedal setup instructions.
E03012 11/04
E3-9
PTU Setup
If not done previously, Set up PTU using the communication port in the electrical cabinet.
Select the MONITOR REAL TIME DATA screen as follows:
a. From the GEOHV STATEX III MENU, select PTU TALK TO TRUCK and press [ENTER].
b. At PTU LOGON screen, enter your name and assigned password. Press [ENTER].
c. When the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU (Figure 3-6.) appears, move the cursor to
NORMAL OPERATION and press [ENTER].
E3-10
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-11
1.4 Propulsion Lockout Test (DDEC & MTU Engine Trucks Only)
1. Move Selector Switch to FORWARD, turn Control Power Switch to On, and depress throttle
pedal until propulsion contactors MF, P1/(P2), GF, and GFR pick up.
AS MF P1 (P2) GF GFR
a. Verify feedback signals are present:
MFFB P1FB (P2FB) GFFB GFRFB
Detroit Diesel DDEC engine trucks:
2A. For 16 cylinder engines, jumper circuits 509M & 509S to ground, one at a time. For 20 cylinder engines (3 ECM's) jumper circuits 509M, 509R1 & 509R2 to ground. On DDEC III
engines, jumper circuit 509 to ground. The propulsion contactors should drop out after
approximately a 7 second time delay.
MTU engine trucks:
2B. Jumper circuit 31MS to ground. The propulsion contactors should drop out after approximately a 7 second time delay.
3. Turn control power Off. Remove jumpers to restore wiring to its original condition.
E3-12
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-13
E3-14
11/04 E03012
Connect an oscillator to circuit 77 and 77A at control cabinet terminal board. Do not turn oscillator on.
1. Move Selector Switch to FORWARD. Depress throttle.
FORIN AS
a. Verify the feedback signal:
FORFB
2. Propulsion contactors MF, P1/(P2), GF, and GFR should energize.
MF P1 (P2) GF GFR
a. Verify the feedback signals:
MFFB P1FB (P2FB) GFFB GFRFB
3. Turn oscillator On and increase frequency until M1-SPD & M2-SPD reads 3 mph.
4. Move Selector Switch to REVERSE.
5. All contactors should drop out, Reverser should stay in forward position (to the right).
6. Release throttle and remove oscillator. Remove jumpers and reconnect speed sensor wires at
terminal board.
7. Reverser should shift to REVERSE position (to the left).
a. Verify the feedback signal:
REVFB
8. Move selector switch to NEUTRAL.
E03012 11/04
E3-15
4. Verify that propulsion contactors MF, P1/(P2), GF and GFR drop out and then retard contactors
RP1, RP2, MF, GF, GFR, RP3, RP4, RP5, (and RP6-RP9 if used) pick up and the Dynamic
Retard Light in the cab comes on.
RP1 RP2 MF GF GFR RP3 RP4 RP5 RP6 RP7 RP8 RP9
a. Verify the feedback signals:
RP1FB RP2FB MFFB GFFB GFRFB RP3FB RP4FB RP5FB
RP6FB RP7FB RP8FB RP9FB
5. Release throttle and reduce oscillator frequency to 0. Place selector switch in NEUTRAL.
6. Depress override pushbutton in console, and press reset button on display to clear overspeed
event code.
7. Disconnect oscillator from circuits 77 and 77A and remove. Remove jumpers and reconnect
speed sensor wires.
E3-16
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-17
E3-18
11/04 E03012
DI NAME
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE TO ACTIVATE
FUNCTION
FIRSTSRCH
FIRST SEARCH SW
LASTSRCH
LAST SEARCH SW
2DDRESET
LOCAL RESET SW
AS
ACCELSWITCH
(Non-Fuel Saver Only)
Pedal released
RS
RETARD SWITCH
(Non-Fuel Saver Only)
Pedal released
DOS
DUMP OVERRIDE
SWITCH
RSC
DBUP
2SOS
IDLESW
2 SPEED OVERSPEED
SYSTEM
(LOAD WEIGHT SWITCH)
IDLE SWITCH
(Non-Fuel Saver only)
ACCINH
FAILDIODE
E03012 11/04
E3-19
DI NAME
SRVBRKPSW
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURE TO ACTIVATE
FUNCTION
Remove jumper.
FORIN
SELECTOR SWITCH
FORWARD SIGNAL
REVIN
SELECTOR SWITCH
REVERSE SIGNAL
DSTORE
Release switch.
BLOWP
BLOWER PRESSURE
SWITCH
Remove jumper.
ENGINE SERVICE
SIGNAL
(MTU engine)
Remove jumper.
Remove jumper.
Remove jumper.
PARKBRKSW
PARK BRAKE
KEYSW
KEY SWITCH
CPSFB
CONTROL POWERSWITCH
ENGINE SERVICE
SIGNAL
ENGSERV
ENGSDWN
E3-20
11/04 E03012
For each of the digital outputs listed in the following tables, perform the procedure as specified
in steps 1 and 2, and verify the results on the MANUAL DIGITAL OUTPUT TEST SCREEN as
noted in the following table. Be sure to restore any switch settings and wiring changes to their
original condition before moving on to check the next digital output.
E03012 11/04
E3-21
DESCRIPTION
DEVICE STATE
PTU DISPLAY-DEVICE
PTU DISPLAY-FEEDBACK
*NOTE: P11, RP11, & RP22 are digital outputs (not physical devices) wired in parallel with outputs P1, RP1, & RP2 respectively.
These outputs are only used if airless contactors are installed. If installed, test by activating both outputs (P1 and P11), (RP1 &
RP11), (RP2 & RP22) at the same time and verifying the corresponding feedback signal.
P1
*P11
P2 (GTA26
only)
GF
GFR
MF
RP1
*RP11
RP2
*RP22
RP3
RP4
RP5
RP6
(optional)
RP7
(optional)
RP8
(optional)
RP9
(optional)
P1 CONTACTOR
P11 CONTACTOR
OUTPUT
P2 CONTACTOR
GF CONTACTOR
GFR CONTACTOR
MF CONTACTOR
RP1 CONTACTOR
RP11 CONTACTOR
OUTPUT
RP2 CONTACTOR
RP22 CONTACTOR
RP3 CONTACTOR
RP4 CONTACTOR
RP5 CONTACTOR
RP6 CONTACTOR
RP7 CONTACTOR
RP8 CONTACTOR
RP9 CONTACTOR
FOR
FORWARD COIL ON
REVERSER
REV
REVERSE COIL ON
REVERSER
P1 energized
P1 = on
P1FB = true
P1 de-energized
P1 off
P1FB false
P11 energized
P11 = on
P1FB = true
P11 de-energized
P11 off
P1FB false
P2 energized
P2 = on
P2FB = true
P2 de-energized
P2 off
P1FB false
GF energized
GF = on
GFFB = true
GF de-energized
GF off
GFFB false
GFR energized
GFR = on
GFRFB = true
GFR de-energized
GFR off
GFRFB false
MF energized
MF = on
MFFB = true
MF de-energized
MF off
MFFB false
RP1 energized
RP1 = on
RP1FB = true
RP1 de-energized
RP1 off
RP1FB false
RP11 energized
RP11 = on
RP1FB = true
RP11 de-energized
RP11 off
RP1FB false
RP2 energized
RP2 = on
RP2FB = true
RP2 de-energized
RP2 off
RP FB false
RP22 energized
RP22 = on
RP2FB = true
RP22 de-energized
RP22 off
RP2FB false
RP3 energized
RP3 = on
RP3FB = true
RP3 de-energized
RP3 off
RP3FB false
RP4 energized
RP4 = on
RP4FB = true
RP4 de-energized
RP4 off
RP4FB false
RP5 energized
RP5 = on
RP5FB = true
RP5 de-energized
RP5 off
RP5FB false
RP6 energized
RP6 = on
RP6FB = true
RP6 de-energized
RP6 off
RP6FB false
RP7 energized
RP7 = on
RP7FB = true
RP7 de-energized
RP7 off
RP7FB false
RP8 energized
RP8 = on
RP8FB = true
RP8 de-energized
RP8 off
RP8FB false
RP9 energized
RP9 = on
RP9FB = true
RP9 de-energized
RP9 off
RP9FB false
FOR = on
FORFB = true
FORWARD coil
de-energized
FOR off
FORFB false
REV = on
REVFB = true
REVERSE coil
de-energized
REV off
REVFB false
NOTE: After checking REV operation, silence backup horn by turning on output FOR momentarily to move reverser back to forward position.
E3-22
11/04 E03012
DESCRIPTION
DEVICE STATE
VERIFICATION
AFSE
ALTERNATOR FIELD
STATIC EXCITER
Output AFSE = on
MFSE
Output MFSE = on
ENGSRV_LT
ENGINE SERVICE
LIGHT IN CAB
ENGSDN_LT
ENGINE SHUTDOWN
LIGHT IN CAB
TS
THROTTLE SOLENOID
(Non-Fuel Saver only)
LIS
RETARD
Output TS = on
(Relay energized)
Output TS off
(Relay de-energized)
Output LIS = on
(Relay energized)
Output RETARD = on
(RLR Relay energized)
Output OVRSPD = on
OVRSPD
OVERSPEED LIGHT
Output CPRL = on
(Relay energized)
CPRL
CONTROL POWER
RELAY LATCH
Output CPRL = on
(Relay energized)
NOTE: Verify System Fault Light is not On, prior to checking next output.
FDIODE_LT
SYSFAULT
GNDFAULT
BLOWFAULT
PRKBRKOFF
SPEEDEVNT
SPEED EVENT
MOTOR
TEMP
MOTOR OVERTEMP
LIGHT (Optional)
E03012 11/04
Output FAILDIODE = on
Output SYSFAULT = on
Output GNDFAULT = on
Output
BLOWFAULT = on
Output
PRKBRKOFF = on
(Park Brake Solenoid
energized)
Output
MOTOR_TEMP off
E3-23
E3-24
11/04 E03012
The two digit diagnostic display panel should have a 00 event code to indicate that all previous
event codes have been cleared. If not, press reset button to clear codes.
For each of the analog inputs listed, perform the test procedure specified, and verify the results
on the MONITOR ANALOG INPUT CHANNELS screen. Be sure to restore any switch settings
and wiring changes to their original condition before moving on to check the next analog input.
Reset as required to clear event data after each test.
E03012 11/04
E3-25
a. Test zero offset on isolation amplifier. Place a digital voltmeter between terminals D (+) and
F (-) on ISOA3. With control power On and no other signal applied, meter should read:
Less than 30 millivolts.
b. Remove wire from input terminal B on ISOA3. Connect test jumpers from G (+15 volt) to
A, and from C to F on ISOA3 and measure the following:
Read +1.00 .05 volts from D to F.
PTU should read +1000 50 amps.
c. Remove jumper from terminal G.
d. Connect test jumper from E (-15 volt) to A.
Read -1.00 .05 volts from D to F.
PTU should read -1000 50 amps.
e. Remove jumpers and voltmeter. Reconnect wire to terminal B.
a. Test zero offset on isolation amplifier ISOA5, using same procedure as on motor 1 amps.
b. Remove wire from input terminal B on ISOA5. Connect test jumpers from G (+15 volt) to
A, and from C to F on ISOA5 and measure the following:
Read +1.00 .05 volts from D to F.
PTU should read +400 20 amps.
c. Remove jumper from terminal G.
d. Connect test jumpers from E (-15 volt) to A.
Read -1.00 .05 volts from D to F.
PTU should read -400 20 amps.
e. Remove jumpers and voltmeter. Reconnect wire to terminal B.
E3-26
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-27
a. Test zero offset on isolation amplifier. Place a digital voltmeter between terminals D (+) and
F (-) on ISOA6. With control power On and no other signal applied, meter should read:
Less than 30 millivolts.
b. Remove wire from input terminal B on ISOA6. Connect test jumpers from G (+15 volt) to
A, and from C to F on ISOA6 and measure the following:
Read +1.00 .05 volts from D to F.
PTU should read +275 20 amps.
c. Remove jumpers and voltmeter. Reconnect wire to terminal B.
E3-28
11/04 E03012
f. Reverse polarity of input. Jumper circuit 71 to terminal C and jumper circuit 710 to terminal
A at VMM1.
Verify negative value of output voltage measured in step e. and negative value on PTU
screen.
g. Remove jumpers and voltmeters. Restore all disconnected wiring.
E03012 11/04
E3-29
NOTE: Sensors for functions 16 through 19 are not installed on all trucks. To verify installation,
select the proper truck configuration file, then select View OEM Options from the TRUCK SETUP
CONFIGURATION MINE MENU screen.
E3-30
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-31
E3-32
11/04 E03012
E03012 11/04
E3-33
If the truck is equipped with the Two Speed Overspeed, remove and insulate circuit wire 73LS
going to the control cabinet junction box. There should be one circuit wire 73LS from the terminal block to the FL275 card panel.
If the 73LS circuit wire going to the control cabinet junction box hasn't been removed and insulated, damage may
result to the Rear Suspension Pressure Switches.
Wheelmotor Speed Sensors:a. Disconnect external 714 wire and external 77 wire at control
cabinet terminal board.b. Jumper from 77 to 714 and jumper from 77A to 714A. c. Connect an
oscillator to 714 and 714A.
All checks are to be made with control power On and the selector switch in FORWARD.
Obtain speed event setting information and extended range retarding pickup speeds from the
truck configuration file and use the Retard State Logic screen as instructed below:
Setup PTU
1. With the GE OHV STATEX III MENU on the screen, select TRUCK SETUP (CFG).
2. At the TRUCK SETUP CONFIGURATION MINE MENU screen, select the proper truck configuration file.
3. From the TRUCK SETUP CONFIGURATION MINE MENU screen, select 6) Change/view
Overpeeds.
4. Record the values shown on the OVERPEEDS ENTRY SCREEN.
5. Exit back to the TRUCK SETUP CONFIGURATION MINE MENU and select 1) View truck configuration screen; data curves screen.
6. Record the values for EXT RANGE PICK_UPS listed on the second screen that appears.
7. Exit back to the GE OHV STATEX III MENU and select PTU TALK TO TRUCK.
8. After logging on, select NORMAL OPERATION from the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU.
9. From the NORMAL OPERATION menu, select RETARD STATE LOGIC. Information will be
read from this screen for the following procedures.
E3-34
11/04 E03012
4.2 Two Speed Overspeed Truck (Empty Truck) - Overspeed Settings Check
1. Jumper 71 to 73LS in control cabinet to simulate an empty truck.
2. While observing the RETARD STATE LOGIC SCREEN, increase the oscillator frequency from
minimum until the retard contactors RP1 and RP2 pick up in overspeed.
3. Verify the M1- SPD and M2 - SPD mph readings agree with values recorded from the truck configuration file OVERSPEEDS ENTRY SCREEN.
4. Lower the oscillator frequency and verify that retard contactors RP1 and RP2 drop out at the
specified dropout frequency as recorded from the OVERSPEEDS ENTRY SCREEN.
4.3 Two Speed Overspeed Truck (Loaded Truck) - Overspeed Settings Check
1. Remove jumper 71 to 73LS to simulate a Loaded Truck.
2. While observing the RETARD STATE LOGIC SCREEN, increase the oscillator frequency from
minimum until the retard contactors RP1 and RP2 pick up in overspeed.
3. Verify the M1- SPD and M2 - SPD mph readings agree with values recorded from the truck configuration file OVERSPEEDS ENTRY SCREEN.
4. Lower the oscillator frequency and verify that retard contactors RP1 and RP2 drop out at the
specified dropout frequency as recorded from the OVERSPEEDS ENTRY SCREEN.
E03012 11/04
E3-35
4. Turn the oscillator frequency to maximum. Verify that the RP contactors pick up in the sequence
listed, as the oscillator frequency is slowly decreased.
a. 3 Step Extended Range Retarding - RP3, RP4, and RP5 contactors.
b. 7 Step Extended Range Retarding - RP3, RP4, RP5, RP6, RP7, RP8, and RP9 contactors.
5. Release retard pedal and place selector switch in NEUTRAL position.
6. Disconnect oscillator from 714, 714A wires.
7. Remove jumpers from 77, 77A, 714, and 714A.
8. Reconnect external 77 and 714 wires.
9. Reconnect circuit 73LS if truck has two speed overpseed.
E3-36
11/04 E03012
Setup PTU
1. With control power On, select PTU TALK TO TRUCK on GE OHV STATEX III PTU MAIN
MENU. Press [ENTER] key.
2. At Enter your name: type your name. Press [ENTER] key.
3. At Enter your password: type your password. Press [ENTER] key.
4. The GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU should appear on the screen.
5. Move cursor to select NORMAL OPERATION. Press [ENTER] key.
a. A screen will appear that states: Selection of NORMAL OPERATION gives truck control to
the driver. Continue?
b. With the cursor next to Yes, press [ENTER].
6. The NORMAL OPERATION MENU should appear on the screen.
7. Move cursor to select RETARD STATE LOGIC. Press [ENTER] key.
8. The RETARD STATE LOGIC SCREEN screen should appear. Information on this screen will be
observed for the following tests.
E03012 11/04
E3-37
E3-38
11/04 E03012
If load test must be run any longer than to just read horsepower,
the motor field leads must be disconnected to prevent overheating of the motor fields. Follow disable procedure below:
PTU Setup
Select the AUTOMATIC LOAD BOX TEST screen as follows:
a. From the GEOHV STATEX III MENU, select PTU TALK TO TRUCK, press [ENTER].
b. At PTU LOGON screen, enter your name and assigned password. Press [ENTER].
c. When the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU appears, move the cursor to NORMAL OPERATION and press [ENTER].
d. A screen appears with the message: Selection of NORMAL OPERATION gives truck control
to the driver - Continue?. With the cursor at the Yes option, press [ENTER].
e. The NORMAL OPERATION MENU will appear. Select AUTOMATIC LOAD BOX TEST
and press [ENTER].
E03012 11/04
E3-39
6. Verify the ENGINE RPM is approximately equal to the ENGINE LOAD RPM shown at the bottom of the screen.
7. Verify the calculated NET HP TO ALT value is approximately equal to the measured NET HP
TO ALTERNATOR value read from the PTU screen within 5%.
8. After completing test, restore all circuits to normal and reconnect fan clutch where applicable.
NOTE: Net horsepower may be affected by many variables such as ambient temperature, altitude,
fuel temperature, parasitic losses, tertiary losses, engine condition etc. Parasitic horsepower loss
values that have been corrected for temperature and altitude may be obtained from the Komatsu
Distributor.
E3-40
11/04 E03012
Setup PTU
Select the AUTOMATIC LOAD BOX TEST screen as follows:
a. From the GEOHV STATEX III MENU, select PTU TALK TO TRUCK and press [ENTER].
b. At PTU LOGON screen, enter your name and assigned password. Press [ENTER].
c. When the GE STATEX III PTU MAIN MENU appears, move the cursor to NORMAL OPERATION and press [ENTER].
d. A screen appears with the message: Selection of NORMAL OPERATION gives truck control
to the driver - Continue?. With the cursor at the Yes option, press [ENTER].
e. The NORMAL OPERATION MENU will appear. Select AUTOMATIC LOAD BOX TEST
and press [ENTER].
WHEELMOTOR
AUTOMATIC LOAD BOX TEST SCREEN
(PTU Screen Display)
772
776, 791
788, 787
788
(20 Element Grid)
1675
1675
1675
1250
1250
1250
ALTERNATOR VOLTS
1320
1320
1320
275
375
450
772
776, 791
788, 787
788
(20 Element Grid)
140
140
140
MF TERTIARY CURRENT
333
333
333
7. Release the retard pedal and place the selector switch in NEUTRAL.
8. Exit back to the GEOHV STATEX III MENU screen.
9. The engine may now be shutdown.
E03012 11/04
E3-41
Preparation
After normal pressures are reached, the engine is then shut down and the key switch is left in
the RUN (On) position.
On 830E trucks the key switch must first be turned Off to shut down the engine, and then
returned to the RUN (On) position to maintain hydraulic pressures.
1. With air tanks fully charged to 120 PSI or more for trucks with air brakes, or hydraulic pressure
at normal operating pressure or more for trucks with hydraulic brakes, and all brakes released,
place selector switch in FORWARD and depress the throttle pedal.
The propulsion contactors should energize.
It should be possible to remove jumper between 73R and 73P (if installed) and still get
the propulsion contactors to energize.
2. With brake lock switch On, depress the throttle pedal.
Propulsion contactors should not energize.
3. Turn brake lock switch Off, turn emergency brake switch On and depress the throttle pedal.
Propulsion contactors should not energize. (Some trucks do not have emergency brake
switch.)
4. Turn emergency brake switch Off, turn operational parking brake switch On and depress the
throttle pedal.
Propulsion contactors should not energize. Park brake light on instrument panel should
come On.
5. Turn park brake switch Off.
6. With selector switch in REVERSE, depress the throttle pedal.
Propulsion contactors should energize.
7. Depress the service brake pedal.
Propulsion contactors should drop out.
Service brake light on instrument panel should come On.
8. Operate override switch on instrument panel or on selector switch console.
Propulsion contactors should pull in and stay pulled in as long as override switch is held
manually.
E3-42
11/04 E03012
1. Setup PTU to read the MONITOR REAL TIME DATA SCREEN to monitor the BLOWP digital
input signal. This signal will be displayed in regular display (false) when the engine is off.
2. Start engine with selector switch in NEUTRAL. The BLOWP signal should be Off (false). Slowly
increase engine speed to 800 to 1000 rpm.
Verify the BLOWP signal changes from false to =true (inverse display) as engine speed
reaches 800 to 1000 rpm and remains =true at higher rpm.
3. If the switch does not operate in the above rpm range, shut down engine and readjust the
blower pressure switch.
4. After adjustment, repeat the above steps until switching occurs at the proper rpm.
1. Remove power and check that sync transformers ST1 and ST2 are properly connected.
2. Disconnect leads 716C, 716D, 716H, and 716J at sync transformers and read approximately 11
ohms across each transformer secondary windings.
3. Disconnect leads 74E, 71J, 75X, and 71K at transformers and read approximately 560 ohms
across each transformer primary.
4. Reconnect all leads that were disconnected.
E03012 11/04
E3-43
E3-44
11/04 E03012
4. Connect a jumper wire from terminal C to terminal F and another from terminal A to terminal G.
5. Turn the control power switch On.
Verify the voltage at terminal D is 1.00 0.05 volt.
6. Turn the control power switch Off. Remove the jumper wires and meter.
7. Reconnect 75A, 75C, 717S , 72T, 72W, and 73Y wires disconnected at ISOA3, ISOA4, ISOA5,
ISOA6, ISOA7, and ISOA8.
8. Reconnect 74C at GFR.
Check each wheel motor individually with the following cable hookup:
1. Place a jumper across the left wheelmotor armature (from cable 7GA1 (7G10 on the 830E) to
7J1) to check the right wheelmotor rotation.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal just far enough to enter propel state and the wheels begin to
rotate.
Verify the right wheelmotor is turning forward.
3. Place a jumper across the right wheelmotor armature (from cable 7J1 to 7J2) to check the left
wheelmotor rotation.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal just far enough to enter propel state and the wheels begin to
rotate.
Verify the left wheelmotor is turning forward.
5. Shut down the truck and remove the jumper cables.
E03012 11/04
E3-45
E3-46
11/04 E03012
28.8
5GE776HS8B
E03012 11/04
GEAR
RATIO
(xx.xxx : 1)
2.88
TIRE SIZE
30 X 51
30 X 51
5GE776KS5B, KS7B
23.0
36 X 51
28.8
36 X 51
5GE776HS2C
23.0
30 X 51
5GE776HS9B, HS10
28.8
30 X 51
5GE791AS3B, AS5B
23.0
33 X 51
5GE791AS4B, AS6B
28.8
33 X 51
5GE788DS2
26.075
37 X 57
5GE788ES1,HS2,HS4
26.1
36 X 51
5GE788ES2,FS2,FS4
26.1
37 X 57
5GE788FS1,FS3
21.7
37 X 57
5GE788HS1,HS3
21.7
36 X 51
5GE788HS8
26.825
36 X 51
5GE788HS5
22.354
36 X 51
5GE788HS6
26.825
36 X 51
5GE788FS5, FS7
26.825
37 X 57
5GE788FS6
22.354
37 X 57
5GE787FS5, FS10
36.4
40 X 57
5GE787ES1,2,3
32.4
40 X 57
5GE787FS1,FS3
31.875
40 X 57
5GE787FS2,FS4, FS8
26.625
40 X 57
5GE787FS7
31.875
40 X 57
5GE787FS6, FS9
28.125
40 X 57
E3-47
E3-48
GEAR
RATIO
XX.X:1
TIRE
SIZE
ROLLING
RADIUS
MAX.
WHEEL
RPM
MAX.
TRUCK
MPH
CONV.
FACTOR
RPM/MPH
CONV.
FACTOR
MPH/RPM
772
28.8
30 x 51
55.1
2750
31.32
87.81
0.01139
776
28.8
30 x 51
55.1
2750
31.32
87.81
0.01139
776
23.0
36 x 51
61.1
2750
43.48
63.24
0.01581
776
28.8
36 x 51
61.1
2750
34.73
79.19
0.01263
791
23.0
33 x 51
57.0
2750
40.57
67.79
0.01475
791
28.8
33 x 51
57.0
2750
32.40
84.88
0.01178
788
26.1
36 x 51
61.1
2320
32.33
71.76
0.01394
788
26.1
37 x 57
65.4
2320
34.60
67.05
0.01491
788
21.7
37 x 57
65.4
2320
41.62
55.74
0.01794
788
21.7
36 x 51
61.1
2320
38.88
59.67
0.01676
788
26.825
36 x 51
61.1
2320
31.48
73.69
0.01357
788
26.825
37 x 57
65.4
2320
33.67
68.92
0.01451
788
22.354
36 x 51
61.1
2320
37.75
61.45
0.01627
788
22.354
37 x 57
65.4
2320
40.40
57.42
0.01741
787
28.125
40 x 57
68.4
2320
33.58
69.06
0.01448
787
36.4
40 x 57
68.4
2320
25.95
89.40
0.01119
787
32.4
40 x 57
68.4
2320
29.15
79.58
0.01256
787
31.9
40 x 57
68.4
2320
29.61
78.35
0.01276
787
26.6
40 x 57
68.4
2320
35.51
65.33
0.01531
11/04 E03012
TOP
NO LOAD
RPM
*RETARDING
RPM
(No Load)
*LOW
IDLE
RPM
KTA-38
1900
2100 75
1675 10
750 25
KTTA-50-C
1900
2100 75
1675 10
750 25
KTTA-50-C
2000
2200 75
1675 10
750 25
KTTS-50-C
2100
2300 75
1675 10
750 25
ENGINE MODEL
K2000E
1900
2100 75
1675 10
750 25
QSK60
1900
2150 75
1675 10
750 25
RATED
ENGINE
RPM
TOP
NO LOAD
RPM
*RETARDING
RPM
(No Load)
*LOW
IDLE
RPM
1900
2040 10
1675 10
750 25
1900
2040 20
1675 10
750 25
1900
1910 5
1675 25
750 25
1900
2040 10
1675 10
750 25
1900
2040 20
1675 10
750 25
1675 25
750 25
1900
1910 5
1900
1920 5
1900
1920 5
See *Notes
600 25
600 25
RATED
ENGINE
RPM
1900
TOP
NO LOAD
RPM
*RETARDING
RPM
(No Load)
*LOW
IDLE
RPM
1675 10
750 25
E03012 11/04
E3-49
NOTES
E3-50
11/04 E03012
SECTION G
REAR AXLE, SPINDLES AND WHEELS
INDEX
TIRES AND RIMS . . . . .
FRONT TIRE AND RIM
Removal . . . . . .
Installation . . . .
REAR TIRE AND RIM .
Removal . . . . . .
Installation . . . .
RIM . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Removal . . .
Tire Installation . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G2-1
G2-1
G2-3
G2-3
G2-3
G2-3
G2-3
G2-4
G2-4
G2-5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G3-1
G3-1
G3-1
G3-2
G3-3
G3-4
G3-4
G3-6
G3-6
G3-7
G3-7
G3-8
G3-9
G3-10
G3-10
G3-10
G01006
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Index
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
G5-1
G5-1
G5-1
G5-2
G1-1
NOTES
G1-2
Index
G01006
G02006 8/89
G2-1
Removal
1. Apply parking brake and block rear wheels.
2. Shut down the engine and allow at least 90 seconds for the accumulator to bleed down. Turn
the steering wheel to be sure no pressure
remains. As a safety precaution, bleed down
brake accumulators.
3. Place jack under spindle or under frame directly
behind horsecollar structure.
Due to its size and weight, always keep personnel away from a wheel and tire assembly when it
is being removed or installed.
Installation
5. Visually inspect all brake components for damage or wear. Inspect hydraulic brake lines for
damage or leaking fittings.
G2-2
6. Lock Ring
7. Wheel Retainer Lug
8. Nut
9. Capscrew
10. Flat Washer
11. Lockwasher
12. Nut
13. Clamp
14. Capscrew
15. Flat Washer
16. Lockwasher
17. Bent Plate
18. Hub
G02006 8/89
G02006 8/89
5. Wheel Nut
6. Retainer
7. Spacer
8. Valve Extension
13. Spud
14. Inner Wheel Rim
15. Flange
G2-3
RIM
Tire Removal
Due to its size and weight, always keep personnel away from a wheel and tire assembly when it
is being removed and installed.
4. Repeat this procedure at locations approximately 90 from first application. Continue this
procedure until tire bead is free from rim.
G2-4
G02006 8/89
G02006 8/89
7. Nut
8. Wheel Hub
9. Tire
4. Flange
5. Lockring
6. Retainer
G2-5
unless
lockring
is
G2-6
G02006 8/89
G03006 6/98
G3-1
Installation
1. Lubricate spindle bore with multi-purpose grease
Number 2 with 3% Molybdenum Disulphide.
2. Lubricate the suspension rod taper using multipurpose grease Number 2 with 3% Molybdenum
Disulphide.
3. Position spindle and wheel hub assembly on fork
lift or similar lifting device, refer to Figure 3-3.
4. Raise the spindle and hub assembly into position
as shown in Figure 3-3.
5. Secure spindle to suspension using retainer
plate (2, Figure 3-2) and capscrews (1). First,
tighten capscrews uniformly to 500 ft. lbs. (678
N.m) torque, then in increments of 250 ft. lbs.
(339 N.m) torque to obtain a final torque of 1995
200 ft. lbs. (2705 271 N.m).
3. Spindle
4. Spindle Arm
G3-2
G03006 6/98
Disassembly
1. Remove wheel hub and spindle as covered in
Removal before proceeding to Step 2.
G03006 6/98
6. Wheel Hub
7. Brake Assembly
8. Lining
9. Adapter
10. Nut
11. Capscrew
12. Spindle
13. Bearing
14. Seal, Outboard
15. Seal, Inboard
16. Spacer
17. Capscrew
18. Capscrew
19. Disc
20. Shim
21. O-Ring
22. Level Plug
23. Sight Gauge
24. Oil Drain
25. Drain Plug
G3-3
3. Spindle
4. Spacer
G3-4
a. Handle the face seal with care to avoid damaging sealing areas.
b. The sealing face of seal must not be nicked
or scratched.
c. Remove all oil and protective coating from
seal and seal seat using a nonflammable
cleaning solvent.
d. After cleaning make sure all surfaces are
absolutely dry.
e. Face seals are matched in sets and seal
halves should not be interchanged.
f. Position seal, making sure it rests uniformly
against the seal seat lip.
g. Attach the installation tool to the seal half by
positioning the flange of the tool between the
rubber ring and seal face flange.
h. Lightly tap on seal installation tool until tool
flange contacts spindle flange.
NOTE: The seal will be properly installed when the
depth around the entire circumference is uniform.
G03006 6/98
2. Spindle
G03006 6/98
3. Oil Cloth
4. Seal
3. Assembly Stand
G3-5
G3-6
Field Adjustment
The following procedure covers adjustment of front
wheel bearings while the tire and spindle assembly
are installed on truck.
1. Park truck in a level area.
2. Apply the parking brake and block wheels to
prevent movement.
3. Lift the truck until the front tire of wheel being
adjusted is off the ground. Securely block under
truck frame.
4. Remove drain plug (25, Figure 3-4) and allow
oil to drain.
G03006 6/98
12. Loosen all capscrews and rotate wheel 3 revolutions. Tighten 2 capscrews 180 apart and
adjacent to the 0.50 in. diameter holes to 60 ft.
lbs. (81 N.m) torque. Rotate wheel or hub 3
revolutions. Tighten same 2 capscrews to 110
ft. lbs. (149 N.m) torque and rotate wheel or
hub at least 3 revolutions while tightening.
While rotating wheel or hub at least 3 revolutions, tighten same 2 capscrews again to 110 ft.
lbs. (149 N.m) torque.
13. Using a depth micrometer, measure and record
the depth to the end of the spindle through the 2
holes adjacent to the 2 capscrews.
14. Average the 2 measured depths. Subtract the
retainer (1) thickness, (etched on surface of
retainer) from the average depth. The result is
the required shim pack dimension.
G03006 6/98
G3-7
1. Nut
2. Pin
3. Steering Cylinder
G3-8
4. Bearing Retainer
5. Capscrew
6. Lockwasher
7. Rod End
8. Capscrew
9. Slotted Nut
10. Cotter Pin
11. Tie Rod
G03006 6/98
3. Connect oil lines to their respective ports. Operate steering and check for leaks and proper
operation.
NOTE: Tie rod is to be installed with clamping bolts
toward the rear of the truck. (Reference Figure 3-11).
Bearing Replacement
1. Remove capscrew (2, Figure 3-13) and lockwasher (3). Remove bearing retainer (4).
2. Press bearing (1) out of bore in steering cylinder or tie rod end.
3. Press new bearing into bore.
4. Install bearing retainers with capscrews and
lockwashers. Tighten capscrews to standard
torque.
G03006 6/98
3. Lockwasher
4. Bearing Retainer
5. Rod End
G3-9
TOE-IN ADJUSTMENT
(Radial Tires)
G3-10
G03006 6/98
4. Rotate pin and retainer plate and align capscrew holes in mounting structure.
Installation
G04004 10/98
G4-1
7. Spacer
8. Mounting Structure
9. Bearing
10. Pin
11. Seal
12. Capscrew
13. Nut
14. Seal
15. Clamp
12. Capscrew
13. Nut
G4-2
G04004 10/98
3. Flatwasher
4. Pivot Eye
2. Lift pivot eye into position on front of axle housing. Insert several capscrews (2) and flatwashers (3) to align the parts. Remove the lifting
device.
3. Install the remaining capscrews and flatwashers. Tighten alternately until the pivot eye is
properly seated.
Tighten capscrews to 1480 ft. lbs. (2007 N.m)
final torque.
G04004 10/98
G4-3
ANTI-SWAY BAR
Removal
1. Position frame and rear axle housing so force
can be applied to end of anti- sway bar pin (13,
Figure 4-4) on the rear axle housing.
2. Block securely between frame and axle housing.
3. Disconnect lubrication lines (4 and 14, Figure 44) and attach lifting device to anti-sway bar (15).
4. Remove capscrews and lockwashers (9) and
retainer bar (8).
5. Bend tabs away from capscrew heads, and
remove capscrews (3), retainer plate (2) from
stub shaft (7) on frame.
6. Remove pin (13) from end of anti-sway bar (15).
7. Remove anti-sway bar from frame stub shaft (7).
8. Remove bearing spacer (6).
Installation
1. Install spacer (6, Figure 4-4) on frame stub
shaft (7).
2. Raise anti-sway bar and slide onto frame stub
shaft. Place anti-sway bar so retainer rings (5 &
11) are toward front of truck.
3. Position opposite end of anti-sway bar in axle
housing mounting structure (10).
Disassembly
Assembly
1. Press in new bearings.
2. Install snap ring.
G4-4
G04004 10/98
WHEEL MOTOR
Removal
Removal
Installation
5. Disconnect brake, lubrication and electrical connections from wheel motor.
Approximate Weight
GE772
GE776HS/KS
GE791
GE788
G05004 06/03
G5-1
Installation
Maximum Capscrew Usage
Approximate Weight
GE772
GE776HS/KS
GE791
GE788
G5-2
06/03 G05004
SECTION H
HYDRAIR II SUSPENSIONS
INDEX
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-2
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-4
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-4
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-5
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-2
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-2
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-3
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-4
OILING AND CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-1
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-1
HYDRAIR Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-1
Installation of Charging Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-2
Support Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-2
Front Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-3
Rear Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-5
Nitrogen Gas and Hydrair Oil Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-6
H01004 7/89
Index
H1-1
NOTES:
H1-2
Index
H01004 7/89
FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT SUSPENSION
The HYDRAIRII suspensions are hydro-pneumatic
components containing oil and nitrogen gas. The oil
and gas in the four suspensions carry the gross truck
weight less wheels, spindles and final drive assembly. The front suspension cylinders consist of two
basic components; a suspension housing attached to
the truck frame and a suspension rod attached to the
front spindle. The front suspension rods also act as
kingpins for steering the truck.
The HYDRAIRII suspension cylinder requires only
normal care when handling as a unit. However, after
being disassembled these parts must be handled
carefully to prevent damage to the machined surfaces. Surfaces are machined to extremely close tolerances and are precisely fitted. All parts must be
completely clean during assembly.
2. Suspension
3. Charging Valve
Removal
1. Park unloaded truck on hard level surface.
Block wheels and set parking brake. Remove
front wheel and tire as per Removal instructions in Section G, Front Tire and Rim.
Remove front wheel hub and spindle as covered in Section G.
2. Remove boot clamp and boot from around suspension.
3. Discharge nitrogen pressure from suspension
by removing charging valve guard (1, Figure 22) and charging valve cap (2). Turn the charging
valve swivel nut (small hex) (3) counterclockwise 3 full turns to unseat valve seal (DO NOT
turn more than three turns). DO NOT TURN
LARGE HEX (see DANGER below). Wearing
face mask or goggles, depress valve stem until
all nitrogen pressure has been relieved.
H02005 3/94
Front Suspensions
6. Valve Body
7. O-Ring
8. Valve Stem
9. O-Ring
H2-1
8. Remove capscrews and washers (1, Figure 24) and nuts and washers (2).
9. Remove capscrews and washers (8), and nuts
and washers (10).
10. Remove capscrews and washers (6), and spacers (9).
11. Move suspension to a clean work area for disassembly.
Installation
Use the following procedure for preparing mounting
surfaces and mounting hardware.
1. The mounting surface of both the suspension
and the frame must be clean and dry. Use a
cleaning agent that does not leave a film after
evaporation, such as trichlorethylene, tetrachlorethylene, acetone, or lacquer thinner.
When using a cleaning agent, follow the manufacturer's instructions for use, proper ventilation
and/or use of breathing apparatus.
2. Inspect suspension and frame mounting surfaces and spotfaces for flatness. Surface finish
not to exceed 250 (RMS). Surface flatness to
be within 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).
3. Clean and dry all capscrews, nuts and washers
as stated in Step 1, above.
FIGURE 2-4. SUSPENSION INSTALLATION
1. Capscrew & Washers
2. Nuts & Washers
3. Housing
4. Mounting Surface
5. Shear Bar
6. Capscrew & Washers
H2-2
7. Piston
8. Capscrews & Washers
9. Spacer
10. Nuts & Washers
Front Suspensions
H02005 3/94
- No (0) marks.
2. Capscrew
H02005 3/94
Front Suspensions
H2-3
d1. Mark a reference line on a corner of the hexagonal capscrew head or nut and the
mounting surface opposite this corner as
shown. Then mark the position located 60
or 90 clockwise relative to the first reference line on the mounting surface.
Refer to Figures 2-5 and 2-6.
d2. To insure that the opposite end of the turning
member, either the capscrew head or nut
remains stationary, scribe a reference mark
for this check.
d3. Each corner of a hexagon represents 60.
The turning members, either the capscrew
head or nut, is turned until the marked corner is adjacent with the marked reference
line. Check to make sure that the opposite
end of the turning member has NOT turned
during the tightening procedure.
NOTE: Do not exceed 4 RPM tightening speed.
Do not hammer or jerk wrench during the tightening procedure.
e. Loosen the top two corner capscrews and
the bottom outer two capscrews on each
side (the 4 bottom capscrews with nuts) and
repeat "Turn-of-the-Nut" procedure (Steps
2d. - 2d3.) for these remaining 6 capscrews.
H2-4
Front Suspensions
H02005 3/94
Disassembly
NOTE: Refer to your HAULPAK Distributor for
HYDRAIRII repair information and instructions not
covered in this manual.
1. With suspension held in a vertical position (end
cap up), remove capscrews and hardened
washers (1, Figure 2-7). Attach hoist to end cap
(3) and lift end cap out of suspension housing
(12) until spacer (8) contacts bearing retainer
(4). Remove capscrews (5). Lift end cap (3) and
bearing retainer from housing (12).
2. Remove roll pin (10), nut (9) and spacer (8).
Separate end cap and bearing retainer.
Remove O-rings and backup rings (2).
3. Rotate the suspension 180.
NOTE: Steel balls (13) will fall free when the housing
is rotated.
4. Attach lifting device to the piston (11, Figure 27) and carefully lift out of housing (12).
5. Remove capscrews and washers (24, 28, Figure 2-8) and remove bearing retainer (20).
6. Remove and discard rod seal (21) step seal
(22) and rod wiper (23). Remove and discard Oring and backup ring (9 and 10).
H02005 3/94
Front Suspensions
8. Spacer
9. Nut
10. Roll Pin
11. Piston
12. Housing
13. Steel Ball
14. Hardened Washer
H2-5
Assembly
NOTE: All parts must be completely dry and free of
foreign material. Lubricate all interior parts with clean
HYDRAIR suspension oil (see Oil Specification
under Oiling and Charging Procedure).
H2-6
Front Suspensions
H02005 3/94
7. Install two ball checks (13, Figure 2-7) into piston rod receptacles. A small amount of petroleum jelly will prevent balls from dropping out
during assembly.
H02005 3/94
Front Suspensions
H2-7
NOTES:
H2-8
Front Suspensions
H02005 3/94
REAR SUSPENSION
REAR SUSPENSION
The HYDRAIRII suspensions are hydro-pneumatic
components containing oil and nitrogen gas. The oil
and gas in the four suspensions carry the gross truck
weight: less wheels, spindles and final drive assembly. The rear suspension cylinders consist of two
basic components; a suspension housing attached to
the truck frame and a suspension rod attached to the
final drive center case.
The HYDRAIRII suspension cylinder requires only
normal care when handling as a unit. However, after
being disassembled these parts must be handled
carefully to prevent damage to the machined surfaces. Surfaces are machined to extremely close tolerances and are precisely fitted. All parts must be
completely clean during assembly.
Removal
1. Remove suspension boot clamp and boot.
Remove charging valve cap, (1, Figure 3-1)
loosen small hex (4) on charging valve and turn
counterclockwise three full turns (DO NOT turn
more than three turns) to unseat valve seal,
connect suspension charging kit. Charge the
suspension to be removed with dry nitrogen to
fully extend suspension piston. After suspension is charged, disconnect charging kit.
H03001 9/90
6. Valve Body
7. O-Ring
8. Valve Stem
9. O-Ring
Rear Suspensions
H3-1
The rear HYDRAIRII suspension weighs approximately 1,150 pounds (552 kg). Be certain the
capacity of the lifting device used is sufficient for
lifting this load.
5. Slowly depress charging valve stem to relieve
all nitrogen pressure. As cylinder retracts, upper
ball stud stem will be pulled from mounting hole.
Wear a face mask or goggles while relieving
nitrogen pressure
.
H3-2
Rear Suspensions
H03001 9/90
H03001 9/90
14. Piston
15. Rod Seal
16. Lower Bearing
17. Rod Wiper
18. Suspension Oil
19. Capscrew
20. Ball Liner
21. Check Ball
22. Retainer Plate
23. Locknut
24. Grease Fitting
25. O-Ring
26. Ball Stud
27. Ball Retainer
Rear Suspensions
5. Locknut
6. Retainer
7. Ball Stud
H3-3
3. Housing
Assembly
Assembly must be accomplished in a clean, dust free
work area. All parts must be completely clean, dry
and free of rust or scale. Lubricate all interior parts
and bores with clean suspension oil (see Oil Specifications under "Oiling and Charging Procedure").
1. Install ball liner (20, Figure 3-4) into ball stud
housing (5). Install new O-rings (6) and backup
rings (7) in ball stud housing (5).
NOTE: Prior to securing ball stud housing (5) to
suspension housing (8), lifting ring holes should be
parallel to warning plate on suspension housing.
2. Install ball stud housing (1, Figure 3-6) into suspension housing (3). Use care during installation to prevent damage to the O-rings.
NOTE: Backup rings must be positioned toward the
flange of the ball stud housing. (See Figure 3-7).
3. Install capscrews (3, Figure 3-4) and hardened
washers (4). Tighten to 169 5 ft. lbs. (117 7
N.m) torque.
H3-4
Rear Suspensions
H03001 9/90
12. Install new rod seal (15), rod wiper (17), O-rings
(6) and backup rings (7) in their appropriate
grooves in lower bearing retainer.
NOTE: Backup rings must be positioned toward the
flange of lower bearing. (See Figure 3-7).
H03001 9/90
Rear Suspensions
H3-5
NOTES:
H3-6
Rear Suspensions
H03001 9/90
EQUIPMENT LIST
Oiling height
Nitrogen Charging height
H04004 10/96
H4-1
Figure 4-2 shows support blocks for rear suspensions which are placed between the truck frame and
final drive centercase and which fit over the bumper
pads. Dimension "A" must be determined to produce
the Rod Extensions listed in the chart.
H4-2
H04004 10/96
FRONT SUSPENSION
1. Park unloaded truck on a hard level surface.
Block wheels, apply parking brake.
2. Thoroughly clean area around charging valve
on the suspensions. Remove protective covers
from charging valves.
H04004 10/96
445E/120
1.5 (38)
9.0 (229)
330 (2275)
510E/140
1.5 (38)
9.0 (229)
330 (2275)
1.5 (38)
630E/170
3.25*
630E*/170
12 Dia. Rod (83)
9.0 (229)
8.0* (203)
390 (2689)
390* (2689)
1.5 (38)
630E/190
2.5* (64)
630E*/190
13 Dia. Rod
9.0 (229)
9.0 (229)
415 (2861)
415 (2861)
1.5 (38)
685E/210
2.5* (64)
685E*/210
13 Dia. Rod
9.0 (229)
9.0 (229)
400 (2758)
400 (2758)
H4-3
2. Remove oiling blocks and install nitrogen charging blocks. Secure blocks so they will not fly
free. Lower truck frame until the blocks are
firmly and squarely seated between the spindle
and the cylinder housing.
NOTE: Use caution to prevent damage to plated
cylinder surfaces and oil seals.
3. If removed, install charging valve with new lubricated "O" ring (9, Figure 4-4), use clean HYDRAIR oil.
4. Tighten valve body (large hex, 6) to 16.5 ft. lbs.
(22.4 N.m) torque. The valve swivel nut (small
hex, 4) must be unseated counterclockwise
three full turns.
FIGURE 4-4. CHARGING VALVE
1. Valve Cap
2. Seal
3. Valve Core
4. Swivel Nut
(small hex, 0.625 in.)
5. Rubber Washer
H4-4
H04004 10/96
REAR SUSPENSION
1. Park unloaded truck on a hard, level surface.
Block wheels, apply parking brake.
2. Thoroughly clean around charging valves on
suspensions. Remove protective covers from
charging valves.
Make certain all personnel are clear before relieving nitrogen pressure from the suspension. Use
a face mask or goggles when venting nitrogen.
FIGURE 4-6.
(PIN & BEARING MOUNT)
REAR SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS
TRUCK
MODEL
SIZE
OILING
HEIGHT
in. (mm)
CHARGING CHARGING
PRESSURE
HEIGHT
psi (kPa)
in. (mm)
170 (1172)
11.8 (299)
170 (1172)
200 (1379)
200 (1379)
11.8 (299)
TRUCK
MODEL
SIZE
OILING
HEIGHT
in. (mm)
CHARGING CHARGING
PRESSURE
HEIGHT
psi (kPa)
in. (mm)
445E/120
5.5 (140)
13.0 (330)
150 (1034)
510E/140
5.5 (140)
13.0 (330)
150 (1034)
630E/170
8.5 (216)
16.5 (419)
200 (1379)
630E/190
8.5 (216)
16.5 (419)
200 (1379)
685E/210
8.5 (216)
16.5 (419)
170 (1172)
H04004 10/96
H4-5
H4-6
H04004 10/96
Part No.
Approved Sources
VJ3911
Mobil 424
Mobile D.T.E. 15
Texaco TDH Oil
AMOCO ULTIMATE
Motor Oil 5W-30
VJ5925
NOTE: VJ3911 and VJ5925 oils are not compatible and must not be mixed in a suspension.
VJ3911 and VJ5925 oils are supplied in 5 gallon (19 Liter) cans.
Property
Value
Nitrogen
Water
Dew Point
Oxygen
99.9% Minimum
32 PPM Maximum
-68F (-55C) Maximum
0.1% Maximum
H04004 10/96
H4-7
NOTES:
H4-8
H04004 10/96
SECTION J
BRAKE CIRCUIT
INDEX
BRAKE CIRCUIT (J02016) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J2-1
Brake Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J2-1
Brake Circuit and Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J2-1
J01023
Index
with Both Carlisle and Rockwell Brakes
J1-1
J1-2
Index
with Both Carlisle and Rockwell Brakes
J01023
BRAKE CIRCUIT
Operation
The HAULPAK truck is equipped with all-hydraulic
actuated disc brakes. The front brake calipers apply
braking effort to a single disc on each front wheel.
Each rear wheel has two (armature-speed) discs with
one caliper per disc. The outboard disc also contains
a parking brake caliper.
When the brake treadle (mounted on cab floor) valve
is depressed, hydraulic brake pressure is directed to
all brake calipers, resulting in braking effort. The
braking effort is controlled with the Dual Hydraulic
Brake Controller, a differential pressure manifold, a
single piloted controller, a dry/slippery road solenoid
valve and accumulators.
As hydraulic oil enters the bleeddown manifold, it is
directed to both the steering and brake circuits. Service brake pressure is directed from the bleeddown
manifold to the piloted single controller valve and to
the dual controller treadle valve at the same time.
The piloted single controller utilizes a signal from the
rear brake apply pressure. This signal keeps the
pressure delivered to the front brakes in relation with
the pressure delivered to the rear brakes.
The dual controller independently controls the pressure of the service brakes on each rear wheel. Apply
pressure can be modulated by use of the foot pedal
from zero to maximum braking effort.
Brake apply pressure from the dual controller is
ported through the differential pressure manifold to
the rear brakes. The pressure differential manifold
also sends rear brake apply pressure to the piloted
single controller. The differential manifold also
detects an unbalance between the front and rear
brake apply pressure.
Two brake accumulators supply reserve pressure for
service brakes, the third auxiliary brake accumulator
supplies pressure to the auxiliary brake solenoid
which is controlled by the brake lock or secondary
brake switch.
The brake lock switch mounted on instrument panel
actuates brake circuit to apply the rear brakes during
loading and dump. When the switch is placed in the
"On" position, the rear brakes will be applied and the
brake treadle will not be responsive to the operators
control.
The dry/road, slippery/road control switch permits the
operator to select a braking action to compensate for
"Dry" or "Slippery" road conditions.
J02016
Brake Circuit
with Payload Meter
J2-1
J2-2
5. Auxiliary Accumulator
6. Accumulators
7. Accumulator Bleed Down Valves
Brake Circuit
with Payload Meter
J02016
FIGURE 2-2. BRAKE LOCK HOOK-UP WITH PAYLOAD METER (next page)
1. Wire
2. Toggle Switch
3. Wire
4. Wire
5. Diode
6. Housing
7. Park Brake/Sec. Brake
Lexan Overlay
J02016
Brake Circuit
with Payload Meter
J2-3
J2-4
Brake Circuit
with Payload Meter
J02016
J03001A 2/90
J3-1
J3-2
3. Floor Plate
4. Capscrew
Installation
1. Slide the front portion of brake controller (1, Figure 3-1) into the upper section of the floor plate
and install upper capscrews.
2. Slide lower floor plate onto brake controller and
install lower capscrews (4).
3. Install capscrews (2) securing the upper and
lower floor plates and tighten to standard
torque.
4. In the foot box beneath the cab, install all electrical leads to the correct terminal post.
5. Remove protective plug or caps and install each
hose to its designated port.
6. Start engine and check for leaks after hydraulic
pressure has been stabilized.
J03001A 2/90
J03001A 2/90
J3-3
J3-4
J03001A 2/90
J03001A 2/90
J3-5
J3-6
J03001A 2/90
Service
Figures 3-3 & 3-4 show the location of all electrical
components and port identification for the dual
hydraulic brake controller. The port identifications are
stamped on the valve body sections and will be used
in these maintenance instructions.
Disassembly
NOTE: During disassembly, precision machined
parts such as valve spools, sleeves, check valves,
etc. should be ink-marked or tagged for reassembly
into their original positions to assure best possible fit.
1. Remove capscrews (1, Figure 3-3) securing the
pedal to actuator cam assembly and remove
pedal.
2. Remove capscrews (2, Figure 3-3) and remove
actuator cam assembly and base plate.
Remove aluminum flat washers (6, Figure 3-5).
3. Loosen both adjuster lug lockscrews (1, Figure
3-5) and remove the adjuster lugs (2). Remove
conical return springs (3).
NOTE: In the following step, solenoid section will
drop free. To avoid damage be prepared to catch this
section.
J03001A 2/90
J3-7
J3-8
J03001A 2/90
Assembly
NOTE: Cleanliness during assembly is very
important to assure proper operation of dual
hydraulic brake controller. Lightly lubricate all parts
with clean C-3 oil during assembly. All fittings,
switches and plugs use an O-ring seal, therefore,
these parts do not require a high torque to seal.
1. Position controller section upside down and
install isolation check valve spring (23), check
valve (22), and seat (20) with new O-rings and
tighten.
2. Install Switch BL1 (26) with new seals.
3. Install a new seal on differential spool. Place a
spring on each end of spool and carefully install
assembly thru BL2 port with the non-sealed end
of the spool toward BL1.
4. Aluminum Washer
5. Controller Section
11. Install fittings "PA" and "P" into their proper port
as shown in Figure 3- 12 and 3-3).
J03001A 2/90
J3-9
23. Position controller section upright. Install a primary spring seat (13) making sure recess of
seat fits properly onto spool (16). Install primary
spring (9).
19. If regulator sleeve was removed, place new Orings on sleeve and insert into bore of Controller
Section.
J3-10
BENCH ADJUSTMENT
Equipment Required:
1. A temporary mount for Dual Hydraulic Brake
Controller.
2. An adjustable hydraulic power supply with an
operating pressure between 1900- 2500 psi
(13.3-17.5 MPa) but capable of being reduced
to 1400 psi (9.8 MPa).
J03001A 2/90
J03001A 2/90
J3-11
16. Check operation of "DB2" switch (11, Figure 32) by slowly raising and lowering the hydraulic
supply pressure.
a. Red (52b) wire to black (712) wire:
1). Increasing pressure - open at 1850 psi
(13 MPa)
2). Decreasing pressure - close at 1600 psi
(11.2 MPa)
J3-12
J03001A 2/90
Replace coil.
Remove restriction.
Remove it.
Replace it.
Reshim controller.
J03001A 2/90
J3-13
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: A Low Brake Pressure Warning Occurs When the Brakes are Not Applied
Short in electrical system.
Check wiring.
Valve Open.
TROUBLE: A Low Brake Pressure Warning Occurs When Brakes are Applied
There is a leak or other malfunction in one brake
circuit.
The controller balance is out of adjustment.
TROUBLE: A Differential Pressure Warning Occurs Briefly When Brakes are Applied or Released
Controller out of balance (not tracking).
Accumulator precharge/leak.
Check accumulators.
Bleed brakes.
Brake adjustment.
Replace bulb.
Electrical problem.
Check wiring.
TROUBLE: Differential Pressure Warning On and Off While Maintaining Brake Pressure When Pump
Cycles in an Unloading Type System
Leak in one brake circuit.
J3-14
J03001A 2/90
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Check wiring.
Replace it.
TROUBLE: A Brake Accumulator Bleeds Off Quickly When Supply Pressure is Cut Off
Accumulator leakdown valve is open.
Check plumbing.
Close valve.
Check plumbing.
Replace.
Normal.
Extreme heat.
TROUBLE: The Output Pressure At Controller is Correct but Brakes are Not Applying
Brake lines are blocked or improperly connected.
J03001A 2/90
Check plumbing.
J3-15
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: The Brake Pressures Drift Excessively While Pedal is Held Steady
Contamination in dual controller subassembly.
TROUBLE: Oil is Leaking Between the Park/Auxiliary Body and Dual Controller Subassembly
Controller not bolted tightly.
TROUBLE: The Pump Cycles Too Often Or Low Pressure Warning Comes On At Low Engine RPM
Leak in charge system.
Correct plumbing.
Pump is worn.
J3-16
J03001A 2/90
4. Disconnect lines and remove complete accumulator from mounting bracket. Cover lines to
prevent contamination.
5. Transfer accumulator to work area.
J03001B 10/89
J3-17
J3-18
3. Check all rubber items for deterioration, abrasion marks, cracks, holes, bubbles, or any similar defects.
4. Replace all O-rings and any other items
deemed unsuitable for further usage.
J03001B 10/89
8. Grasp threaded section of plug and insert poppet end into shell mouth.
9. Install anti-extrusion ring inside shell. Fold antiextrusion ring to enable insertion into shell.
Place anti-extrusion ring on plug and poppet
assembly with its steel collar toward shell
mouth.
10. Withdraw threaded end of plug through shell
mouth. (Refer to Figure 3-21).
J03001B 10/89
J3-19
J3-20
J03001B 10/89
4. Ground Wire
5. Test Port BF
6. Test Port B2
7. Test Port B1
Removal
If the differential pressure manifold is to be removed
from the cabinet for bench test or repair, tag or mark
all lines to be removed. The manifold is coded at
each port location which will be used in the assembly
and adjustment procedure. (Refer to Figure 3-24).
Installation
1. Install the pressure manifold to the control cabinet using two capscrews. Tighten capscrews to
standard torque. DO NOT remove protective
plugs until each line connection is completed.
and
tag
3. Disconnect and plug ends of all hoses and fittings. Move lines clear of the pressure manifold.
4. Remove capscrews securing pressure manifold
to the cabinet and remove manifold to a clean
work area for disassembly. Refer to "Disassembly, Cleaning and Service".
J03001C
J3-21
When installing plugs (1, 12, & 13), do not overtighten. These plugs are sealed by O-rings to prevent leaking.
J3-22
6. Stud (Ground)
7. Switch Assembly
8. Backup Ring
9. O-Ring
10. Sleeve
11. O-Ring
12. Plug
13. Plug Assembly
14. Shuttle Check Seat
15. O-Ring
16. Spring
17. Shuttle Poppet
18. Body
19. O-Ring
20. Spring
21. Backup Ring
22. O-Ring
23. Port A
J03001C
J03001C
Removal
If the piloted single controller is to be removed from
the cabinet for bench test or repair, tag or mark all
lines to be removed.
1. Release pressure from the brake accumulators.
2. Disconnect all pressure lines and plug ends of
all fittings removed. Move pressure lines clear
of the controller.
3. Remove capscrews securing the controller to
the cabinet and remove the controller to a clean
work area for disassembly. (Refer to Disassembly, Cleaning and Service).
J3-23
4. Port T
5. Port REG
6. Port PR
Installation
1. Install the piloted single controller to the brake
control cabinet and secure controller using
three capscrews. Tighten capscrews to standard torque values. DO NOT remove protective
plugs until each line connection is completed.
2. Connect all pressure fittings to their respective
locations (Figure 3-26).
3. Close brake accumulator bleeddown valves.
4. Start engine to charge the brake accumulators
and check controller for leaks.
Disassembly
1. Remove primary actuator "PLT2" (1), piston (3)
and O-ring (2). (Refer to Figure 3-27).
NOTE: Scribe a mark down the side of controller to
make sure ports are in proper relation to each other
during assembly.
2. Remove nut (20) and washer (19) from top of
controller. Do not remove studs at this time.
J3-24
J03001C
Equipment Needed:
1. One 5000 psi gauge.
2. Hydraulic supply source capable of 1700 psi
(18.9 MPa) pressure.
3. Line with regulator to limit supply pressure to
1500 psi (10.5 MPa).
Set-Up
1. Plug port "PL2" in top of controller
.
Adjustment
1. Apply 1500 psi (10.5 MPa) to port "PL1" and at
the same time apply 2700 psi (18.9 MPa) to port
"PR".
2. Observe pressure reading on gauge installed in
port marked "REG". The correct pressure
should not exceed 2500 psi (17.5 MPa). Shut
off hydraulic source and release pressure.
3. If pressure exceeds 2500 psi (17.5 MPa) on
gauge, controller will have to be disassembled
and have shims added. If pressure is less than
2500 psi (17.5 MPa), disassemble and remove
shims.
4. Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 3 until 2500 psi (17.5
MPa) pressure reading is obtained.
5. Disconnect lines and gauges. Return controller
to service.
J03001C
11. Spring
12. Regulator Spool
13. Regulator Assembly
14. Reaction Plunger
15. Spring
16. O-Ring
17. Cover Assembly
18. O-Ring
19. Washer
20. Hex Nut
J3-25
3. Electrical Leads
4. Capscrews
Installation
1. Install the solenoid valve to the brake control
cabinet and secure the solenoid using two capscrews. Tighten capscrews to standard torque.
DO NOT remove the protective plugs until each
line connection is completed.
2. Connect all pressure fittings to their respective
locations (Figure 3-28).
J3-26
J03001C
Disassembly
1. Remove nut (3, Figure 3-29) and washer (4).
2. Remove coil (2) and valve (5).
Assembly
FIGURE 3-29. SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY
1. Install new O-rings and backup rings on valve
(5). Install valve into valve body (1) and tighten.
2. Install solenoid coil (2) with washer (4) and nut
(3) and tighten.
J03001C
1. Valve Body
2. Coil
3. Nut
4. Washer
5. Valve
6. O-Ring
7. Backup Ring
8. Electrical Leads
J3-27
NOTES:
J3-28
J03001C
J04016 3/97
J4-1
J4-2
J04016 3/97
J04016 3/97
9. T Port
10. Dry/Slippery
Road Solenoid Valve
11. PL1 Port
12. PL2 Port
13. Front Brake Cut-out
Solenoid
14. Accumulator Shut-off
Valves
J4-3
J4-4
J04016 3/97
J04016 3/97
J4-5
J4-6
J04016 3/97
BRAKE CALIPERS
Lining Replacement
Linings MUST BE REPLACED when worn to recommended limits. Failure to replace linings worn
beyond limits, will result in loss of braking effort
and possible complete loss of the truck's service
brake capability.
Carrier and lining assemblies should be replaced
when the friction material is worn to 0.125 in. (0.317
cm) thickness. Replace carrier and lining assemblies
as follows:
1. Open all manual drain valves and bleed down
all brake accumulators.
J05005 9/95
J5-1
J5-2
9. Cap
10. Retainer
11. Packing
12. Piston
13. Packing
14. Retainer
15. Boot
16. Torque Plate
Assembly
J05005 9/95
Linings MUST BE REPLACED when worn to recommended limits. Failure to replace linings worn
beyond limits, will result in loss of braking effort
and possible complete loss of the truck's service
brake capability.
NOTE: Removal of piston caps (9) is not necessary
to remove pistons (12). Remove piston from area
where brake linings were removed.
3. Using Piston Removal Tool (Figure 5-7),
remove pistons (12) from torque plate assembly
(16) as follows:
a. Install 3/8-16 capscrew in threaded hole in
piston face.
b. Slide slotted end of Piston Removal Tool,
over capscrew shaft. Install 0.500-13 UNC-6
capscrew through threaded hole in tool shaft.
c. As capscrew is screwed through tool, it will
pull piston from housing.
Inspection
J05005 9/95
3. Disc
J5-3
2. Scratches, nicks, and other slight surface damage may be smoothed with fine crocus cloth.
Replace damaged parts that affect proper brake
operation.
3. Inspect piston and housing for wear:
Piston - Minimum O.D. 3.4945 in. (8.876 cm)
Housing - Maximum I.D. 3.505 in. (8.903 cm)
4. Carrier and lining assemblies (5) should be
replaced with new if cracks or damage is
present. Carrier and lining assemblies should
also be replaced when the friction material is
worn to 0.125 in (0.318 cm) thickness.
5. Inspect thrust plates for wear, cracks, or damage. Replace worn or defective thrust plates.
Brake Caliper Assembly
1. Replace all retainers, packings, and boots.
Refer to Figure 5-3.
J5-4
4. Retainer
5. Boot
J05005 9/95
J05005 9/95
J5-5
J5-6
J05005 9/95
J05005 9/95
1. BR Hydraulic Tube
2. Rear Brake
Accumulator
3. Brake Manifold
3. B1 Brake Line
4. Bleed Valve Handles
4. Front Brake
Accumulator
5. BF Hydraulic Tube
6. Brake Lock Shuttle
Valve
J5-7
SPECIAL TOOLS
J5-8
J05005 9/95
$
'
+
& -
'
!"
&
-.- -(
,
#
#
&$/ &
#(
&,
&
$
!
" #
#
#
$
&
&
'
&
"1
& & ! (
%
! 34
,
-2-
$
(
%
&
'
(
*
&
*
%)
% #,
),
!" (
-2% #
%
&
*
% #
4'
+
&
&
&
&
! ) 5#
! (
%"#
'
&
!4#
!)# '
&
$
)
#&&, &
)(
&
#
*
%
(
+ # &
# &&, &
& &
%
#
$% + # &
# &&,
#
&
(
%# (
& (
&,$
'
&
($.6'
8
*
& 2
" -2-*
)*
& 2
%
+
<
&
-.-
'
&
&
&
&
7'89 $: +
-2-*
4 -2-*
5*
& 2
;<
7
&
%#
$
<%
($.6'
0
7
"*
) 2%(
(
4'
5
;
& 2
7
*
*
"7
)7
/
'
>
5> &
?
'
'
/
-
-7
7
'
) $
!#
!)#
! 3 #2
8
%
$
(
&
!"# 2
&
%"#
4 $
-2-
!4# 2
@
" '
<%
5'
-7
'
<
)>
%
,
'
& 1%
! #
! "#
&
&
2
&3
#+ (
% #
!#
*%)
$
! #
! "#
/
&
"$
! #
4
(#
&
#$
)$
($.6'
%" +?$:,
!) 3 #
*
7
=(
5+
;1 ,
A*
=(
7
,
*
=(
/
0
"
)8
:
4*
3(
=(
'
!5
'
&
;#
!#
5
!A#
-*
3! &
3
#
#&, #
$
&3
/
!
#
(
3! &
3
3
&$
&1
5>
% #
; 7
-7
-
A$
#
#
& &
&&, (#
(# $
&
#
# &(
1
$
'
' (
-.-
' +
&
&
"*
!4#$
!4#
!53 ;#
! " !#$ % ! &
4'
&
0
&
%
/ &
!#
&
&
! #
&
&
&
<
'
< %"
0#
#
#$
# 56+ ,
4$
716
! #
%
%
&
)& &
(
#
#
(& $. &
&
&
&
589 ,
# &
*
&
# + &
% # (& ,
&#
(
1
#
,& # (
& $ * & %
# # # &,
#
%
+ &
&
&
:$;65 &$ <5$<=:
$
&
(&
& &
% &,
# (
&
#
#( $>
( (&
1
&
&
((&,
(&
+
&
#
#
$
/
& & (
# (
(&
#
&
&
&
&$
(
, &
(
&(
,
&
#&&,
#
&
& #
&+ &
&
# &
&$
#
*
&
*
*
+
,
)(
&
+ # &
# &&,
$% +
# &&,
&
(
&, $
"$
#
&
*
& &
(
%
#
# &
& (
1
&
%#(
% #
%
%
&
5$
4
(
&
#
&
&
&+ %
+&
#
#
(
#&
#
&
&
&
&
2
C
+
)$
&
&
&
+
&
&
&
&
&
&
"4 A
&
!A
54
&
#
%
& ?
&
"
#
"
&
&
& (
% +
&
%
*
#
& (:$;6< &$ <6$5=;
$2
&, #
#& &
#
#
+&
#&
&
%
#
$
; $
2
#
$
)5 %
< %)
'
6:(% 7
<
A$
!5 3 ;#
+
&
$%
!4#
2
#
#
&%
# $0:? 15;
168
&
, &
# &
, #
&
&
#
# &
&
&
&
%
'
5$
&
'
-.-
-/
;$
#(
%
&, #
#
#
1
%) $
2
&
%
5
&
; !(
"# &
&
# &
( &
#
&, (#
&@(
, +
&# %
+
, +&
#
#
&@( # &,
%
+ &&
+&
% ,
+
#
'#
#$
&
&
(#
,
4$
&1
#,
#
&, (
, &
&
$
&
% #
&
'
A+
!A#
$
!#
!5 3 ;#
5
!4# $
!" ! #$ !%
' +
@
!
;" D
&
%
! &
!A#
#
8
'
-.-
+
!"
-/
&
-/
'
&
-+
!5
;#(
-.-
" ?
)'
<
&
($.6'
'
<%
,#.
,&
, &
>?0
8
%
%
&
&
"8
A
&
&
&
#
(
&#
( !); % "; *# 0
&
"
%
!;
*
#
(
(/
2
&
)
-2
(! ) *#
&
,
' 8'
"
(! )A *#
4 ' *1:: *2
!
+
+ ( + *2( 0# $
' ( (1
+
(
( (/
*'
' ( (1
( + *2(
+
#
7
&
&
- %
# &,
&
& ( #
&,
#&&,
$
,-& ,.#
/0
$
1
2
%
;"
9
'
< %4
'
4"
4;
>
<
3
(
4
" )
* %5$
%
'
3
(
( (/
(3 *
2 (2+/
4
" )
*5
&
'
&
! (
% #
!"#
-7 %
5 F 4 "5G*
!/ 8 45
2
&
&
5'
2
& *
#
, &
,!#
!"#
;*
@
&
%
%
#
#
#
#
#
&
##
(3
&,
#
$% +
(
#&,
#
# #
#
& (!
B +&
%& (&
& &
)*
& &
&&
"*
%4#
$
!/ 8 45
#
&
! (
5
46:(% 7 "5G
@ &
#
& 2
*
$
&3
&
,-
-7'-
(
&
4'
#
#
-2-
%
&
E;
)*
&
,-
-7 "$
E;
@ &
#
@ *
.
( (/
(3 *
2 (2+/
%
&
A +
'
4'
&
&
& *
,!# 2
@
5*
& &
; +
($.6'
($.6' %
-7(-7
-7 -7
<
4" =4;
-7'-0
'
7
"7
>
%4 5" =;"
2
8
7'89 *87$: 2
)(
7
-7(-0
47
8
2
+
H &
< %5
8
(
(
& &
+
& &
"/
%
& &
*
) '
*
& &
&
&
&
&
< %;
'
<
BRAKE CALIPERS
Lining Replacement
J06005 9/95
J6-1
J6-2
1. Capscrews and
Flatwashers
2. Torque Plate
3. Brake Support
4. Capscrew
5. Parking Brake
Support
6. Tube Structure
7. Spacer
8. Capscrew
J06005 9/95
J06005 9/95
8. Hub
9. Capscrew
10. Hardened Washer
11. Caliper Mount
12. Capscrew
13. Outboard Caliper
14. Inboard Caliper
15. Capscrew
16. Spacer
6. Capscrew/
Flatwasher
7. Capscrew/
Flatwasher
8. Hub
9. Disc Adapter
J6-3
Before 5/93
After 6/93
776
791
787/788
J6-4
7. Capscrew/
Flatwasher
8. Hub
9. Disc Adapter
10. Inboard Adapter
11. Capscrew
J06005 9/95
Installation
NOTE: All mounting surfaces must be completely
clean, flat and dry. All capscrew threads are to be
lubricated, but the mating surface must remain dry
during installation.
1. Before installing service brake on wheel motor,
perform any required maintenance on wheel
motor brake components. Test caliper heads
using "Brake Caliper Bench Test" before installing calipers.
2. Thoroughly clean all mounting surfaces of
wheel motor and brake components.
3. Lubricate the threads of capscrews (15, Figure
6-4) with simple lithium base chassis grease
(multi-purpose EP NLGI) or a rust - preventive
grease as specified in Section "A", "Standard
Charts And Tables". Install inside torque plate of
caliper (14), and spacer (16) with capscrews
(15). Tighten capscrews to standard torque.
NOTE: Refer to "Brake Disc Mounting Type" Chart to
determine which style of mounting and Figure number
is applicable. Then continue to Step 4, 5, or 6.
4. For Figure 6-4 only: Install bushing (3) into disc
(1). Install disc with four capscrews and washers (7) evenly spaced around disc and tighten.
5. For Figure 6-5 only:
a. Install one 0.625-11UNC x 6.00 inch
threaded alignment stud into top screw location (7, Figure 6-5) on hub (8).
b. Install disc adapter (9) and brake disc (with
bushing) over stud. Install four capscrews
with washers (7) evenly spaced around disc
and tighten.
6. For Figure 6-6 only:
a. Install one 0.625-11UNC x 6.00 inch
threaded alignment stud into top screw location (11, Figure 6-6) on brake hub (8).
b. Install inboard adapter (10) and disc adapter
(9) over stud. Install all capscrews and flatwashers (11) and tighten to standard torque.
c. Install inboard disc (1) and bushing (3) with
four capscrews and flat washers (7). Tighten
capscrews, but not to standard torque.
7. Determine shim pack for proper lining clearance
as follows:
a. Measure dimension "A" (Figure 6-4) from the
front side of the torque plate (between the
two pistons) to the back side of brake disc.
J06005 9/95
J6-5
J6-6
J06005 9/95
J06005 9/95
9. Dust Boot
10. O Ring
11. Adjuster Sleeve
12. Compression Spring
13. Flatwasher
14. Retaining Ring
15. Adjusting Guide
16. Piston Housing
24. Capscrew
25. Flatwasher
26. Spacers (two)
27. Capscrew
28. Tube & Nuts
29. Torque Plate Spacer
30. Shim
J6-7
must
withstand
J6-8
J06005 9/95
J06005 9/95
J6-9
General
These procedures apply ONLY to the brake lining
assemblies obtained from Haulpak Parts Dept. for
use on HAULPAK Electric Drive Trucks equipped
with Carlisle (Goodrich) disc brakes.
Conditioning and burnishing of service brake linings
must be performed each time a new set of brake linings are installed, or before a new HAULPAK Truck
is put into operational service. A surface pyrometer is
required to measure brake disc temperatures during
the conditioning procedures.
If "Brake Certification" type tests are to be run, all linings and discs should be new and the factory should
be notified. For in-service testing of service brakes,
new linings or discs are not necessary.
Front discs should be in serviceable condition with no
metal smearing or metal buildup from previous use
and not extensively rough or grooved. Inspect discs
for wear limits.
Rear discs will operate at higher temperatures and
can be dark blue in color and show periodic spots
[approximately 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) in size] and still be
serviceable. A disc that is extremely heat-checked
with radial cracks open to show a gap should not be
used.
IMPORTANT! To prevent lining damage during
burnishing, as well as for stop distance tests, release
the brakes as quickly as possible at the end of each
cycle or stop.
The burnish procedure consists of:
1. Alternately applying and releasing the service
brakes until the recommended brake disc surface temperature is reached: then allow brakes
to cool. Cool brakes, if necessary, by driving
machine. (Rear brakes will normally cool faster
than fronts.) Repeat cycle 3 - 4 more times.
2. To expedite the burnishing cycles of heating
and cooling, operate the brakes on only one
axle at a time, so that the other system will be
cooling (operate front brakes with rear brakes
disconnected, or rear brakes with front brakes
disconnected).
J6-10
J06005 9/95
BLEEDING PROCEDURE
Attach brake lines and bleed brake calipers according to the following instructions:
The location for disconnecting the front brakes is different for the model 830E than for the 445E, 510E,
630E, and 685E HAULPAK Truck Models.
Refer to next page for these locations.
3. With engine at idle, make partial brake application of dual brake controller, maintain partial
application, open bleeder valve until a clean
stream of oil is discharged from caliper. Close
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat above Steps until all air is bled from all
calipers.
J06005 9/95
J6-11
J6-12
3. B1 Brake Line
4. Bleed Valve Handles
J06005 9/95
!
!
$ '
!
"
% &
$
! "#
(
$
(
!
) * +,(-
! "
!
0.,(.&/1 , '
&
.&/ ,' !
!
$&
- 2"
!
!
$$ "
!
#
'
! '
! "
# $
% &
'( )
* #+
'*+ &
,
-
. ,
( /
'. )
'(+ /
* !+
'*+
'(+
*"
'#+
'!+
'%+ $
0$
! 4
# 7
% 9
)23 $ * ! 4 $5263 $ 5
7
. 8 6
(
*7
7
8:*::0 !!;:!
'. )
$
* #+
1 $
$
'#+
"
$
$
4
'!+
8* !
$
! 2
$"
'# )
* %+
'!+ -
# 2
'<+
'#:+
'0+ '0+
=
!#
%&% %'($)* +%,- %- )! . =
% 2
'!<+
'0+
=
. 9
'!<+ ',
)23 $ * #
. 7
(
*
@
@
* %+
'!
! $"
1!
!
, $!
$ 5 7 /24 $
! 7
# $
% 7
> >)
("
-
>>
' $
'!<+
<$
)
* %+
: 10(
< 67 !.
*"
'.
?2
'(+
!! "
'<+
?
"
(
: :.( : :(( "
: :!:
=
: :(!
: :.:
!: $
: :(!>
4
7
'!*+
'!(+
0$
'!<+
"
'1+ "
'!%+
$
'(+ $
'!.+
12
'!#+
0;1 67 !*
'!1+
'%+
!# $
<2
'!!+ $
'!1+
!: 2
'1+
!% $
)
* %+
: 10(
< 67 !.
"
'<+
'!0
!! 2
'!#+ -
!* $
'!1+
'!0+
!% $
)! .
'!<+ $
'!:+
'!1+
!0 $
'!0+
!. 2
'0+
'1+ 2
'!!+ -
'<+
'!!+
!1 $
!# 2
'!1+
'!+
)! .
'#+
8* #
'!<+
'!#+
'!<+
'!#+ $
'*+
'!:+
!. $
!( "
"
$
$
4
= !#
'!!+ %&% %'($)* +%,- %-
8:*::0 !!;:!
1
2!
34
2.
')'&' ) 2 !
54 $$
')'6' ) 2 !
54 $$
:
!
#
%
:
!
#
%
:
!
#
%
:
!
#
%
:
!
#
:
:
:
:
!
!
!
!
#
#
#
#
%
%
%
%
.
.
.
: ::: A: ::(
: ::( A: :!(
: :!( A: :#(
: :#( A: :%(
: :%( A: :.(
: :.( A: :((
: :(( A: :*(
: :*( A: :0(
: :0( A: :1(
: :1( A: :<(
: :<( A: !:(
: !:( A: !!(
: !!( A: !#(
: !#( A: !%(
: !%( A: !.(
: !.( A: !((
: !(( A: !*(
: !*( A: !0(
: !0( A: !1(
!( 2
#. $
'(+
'.+ -
0;1 67 !*
'(+
!* 2
'%+
!0 2
'!*+
'!(+ -
=
!1 9
'%+ B
C
> >)
',
!< "
. %0(
"
'!! !!%
* %+
!1
+'1+
'!*+ $
"
7
#: 9
"
')
! 7
#
% 4
. 7
(
*"
07
1
<
!:
#! $
'(+
## 2
'1+
#% 2
"
!<
'!*+
'!.+2
'!(+ -
8:*::0 !!;:!
"
$
$
4
)23 $ * % $
=
;)
;)
;)
,
,
$ ,2"7 $ 5
<D #:+
!!
!#
!%
!.
!(
!*
!0
!1
!<
#:
7
7
"
;)
;)
7
,
7
;)
;)
,
"
8* %
#( 2
'$
>/
#* 2
>+
#0 2
7
>4
2
>
#1
$
>"
7
89" $4
34
9 4 0;< .=
3 '
#!
4,
! "
>
>
>
: $2 "
4 ! ,5
0&. - 0
! $
$ +&0
, $
$#
'. )
$
* #+
# $
$
'#+
'!+
% $
)
*% +
: 10(
< 67 !.
'*
. $
'(+
("
'!#+
'!!+
"
'!:+ "
'0+
$
'(+ $
'.+
'1+
*$
'<+ $
'!:+
0$
: 10(
'!%+
<
67 !.
1$
'!.+
)23 $ * %
=
')
!
#
%
.
(
*
0
1
7
4
7
"
8* .
;)
$ ,2"7 $ 5
< "
!*+
<
!:
!!
!#
!%
!.
!(
!*
,
D)
7
,
7
'!#+
'!!+ $
'0+
!: $
D)
'!#+
'1+
'!.+
!! $
'!(+
'%+
'#+
"
;
"
"
$
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
$
! 2
$"
'# )
*% +
!. 2
'!:+ 2
!#
=
'<+ '%+ -
# 2
'<+
0;1 < 67 !.
!( 2
0;1 67 !.
'
!%+ 2
'!(+
: 10( < 67 # (
=
% 2
'(+
!* 2
'!#+
'.+
: 10( < 67 # (
=
=
=
!0 2
'!#+
'!!+ -
. 9
=
'
'!#+ ,
1!
!
$
, $!
("
!(+
> >)
'!
! $"
>>
. %0(
>"
?
'.+ B
' $
C
>>)
',
% +
!< "
. %0(
'!#+
*$
!1 9
*%
"
'!! !!%
!1
+'!:+
'!*+
'!#+
>
#: 9
?2
"
: :.( : :((
: :!:
"
#! $
( : :(!>
: :(!
2!
2 $: :.:
'!!+
## 2
'!#+
'0+
'!#+
=
#% 2
"
!<
'!:+
'!#+
'1+ 2
'!!+ -
0$
'!!+
'!!+
'!#+
1$
#. 2
: 10( < 67 # (
'!(+
< 2
'*+
$
'*+
'!.+
'!(+
!: 2
'0+
"
'*+
#( 2
'!*+
'!#+
'(+
'$
>/
#* 2
>+
2
'1+
!! 2
'!!+
-
'!!+
!# 2
#0 2
7
=
'!.+
>4
2
>
#1
'!%+
$
>"
!% $
>
>
>
'!%+
-
8:*::0 !!;:!
'!%+
"
$
$
4
8* (
>
$"
!*?
! "#
! 4
'!+
'$
# F
* 0+
'!:+
'!+
%
: #(
'* %(
7
. $
'!#+
&
'0+
'!*+
!
F
# $
4 E
% &$
.
(
*
0
$
4
,
4
4 6
"
"
'0 )
&
* .+
'%+
(6
. E
'(+
'#+
* 2
(2
$"
!*?
'*+ 5
$"
! 2
# 2
9
?
4
&,
# *#!
'** (
+!
2, # *%:
'** 1
+! @! 4!
*4
! 4!
'. )
2
* 0+
$
$"
!*?
$"
F
&</
! /
7%
# 2
&
'0 )
* 0+
'7
% 2
!
+
'!*+
0 4
&
8* *
"
$
$
4
*(
8:*::0 !!;:!
6'
$$
$!
,$
!
! $ '
!
!
$'
&
4( $ &
! =
4"
)
*1
# "
% 4
' )
* *+
'
1 2
<)
>
-
>
)23 $ * * 3$24 "4 7 6,
26"- // -2&6 "/ @ "
>
'
'
! $
!
'$
!
'!
. E
'$ $ !
!
$ '$
$"
$!
$ !
!$$-,'
! "
'
!$$$
&
$, !
$
&
!
!!
"
H
($
H
: :(( : :0%
'! *( ! 1(
*/
$4
9"
'!. )
'1+
* 0+
!1: #(:
'(+
'(+
'.+
0"
'!!+ E
!1: #(:
'1:1 !!!# 6+
'
+
'1:: !!!# 6+
2
'!( )
* 0+
4 $;
'
+
4
'!. )
: :*( : :0%
8:*::0 !!;:!
'
* 0+ $ =
'! *( ! 1(
+
'.+
+
$
"
% . D (+
"
$
$
4
8* 0
1$
"
'1:1 6+
!1:
!%( !.:
'*:* *#1 6+
'!. )
$#
'
* 0+
$- ' $
7
!
!
!
$
$- '
! !
!
!
$
$$
$$- '
$
! $ !
! $! "
!
# ! "8 $- ,
'!$$)23 $ * 0 ,2"7 $ 5 42"-2&6 "" 9 /G
!
#
%
.
(
*
0
1
$
4 6
&$
E
$
$
"
$
3
&$
&
"
3
<
!:
!!
!#
!%
!.
!(
!*
2
$
4
,
4
/
"
4
"
7
$
9"
'* )
=
* 0+
'!:+ 3
-
"
.:: '!00<
$
$
6+
1::
=
'%((1 6+ 2
* <D * !:
"
+
=
*< '
% (% =
'## 0 #
6+
'%((16+
3
!!:
'!((1 4 +
.::
'!00<
'00< 4 +
1::
##* '!((1 4 +
'0(1 4 +
#%:
!!%
(::
'%..0
4 +
4
E
)
'
* !:
* < D * !:
8* 1
"
$
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
% $
')
2
* !:+
=
4
;
%
4 !
! 6
"
')
* <+
')
* <+
4
'!00< %((16+
.:: 1::
# 2
'!00<6+
"
.::
"
1::
'%((1 6+
! 4
D
')
* *+
* !!
2
1::
'%((16+
#
.:: '!00< 6+
8:*::0 !!;:!
"
$
$
4
1::
'%((1 6+
8* <
(2
* !% 4
"
% 2
'
)
* !%+
. 2
.::
' +')
'!00<6+
* *+
9"
4 !
* !%
! 2
"
! 111
'%:
+
! !#( '#1 (
+
%;1 #.
6) %
# 9
'1 )
)
)23 $ * !# 9
8* !:
"
$
* 0+
* !#
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
"
! * ? "(
!*?
'!. )
* 0+
?
'*+
"
')
! $
* !#+
&
'%+
# $
4
H
$
* !#+
% -
$"
'# )
* 0+
'!(+
% 4
')
'+
+
)
')
"
# '+
**
* !.+
'. )
* 0+
E
2
"
!1: '1:: 6+
#::
'1<: 6+ 2
!1:
'1:: 6+
( "
'!.+
8:*::0 !!;:!
"
$
$
4
8* !!
! * ? "(
$"
!*?
( 7
'!: )
'1 D <+
'!!+
'(+
#
' + ')
'
* !(+
+ "4 $ ;
'!;1
-
" :
+
* *+
=
*2
'!+
0/
7%
. E
'
'# )
12
* !(+
'. )
'1+
&
* !(+
'%+
<2
'!#+
!: $
>7
'!!+
2
>
1
2
: #:::
': !. 94 +
'
! #(
'%! 0(
+
!:
'#( .
! 2
3
=
-
;
=
# 2
% 7
)23 $ * !( 42"-&6 "" 9 /G
!
#
%
.
(
*
/
$
&$
$
"
4
8* !#
$
$
4 E
$
$
"
0
1
<
!:
!!
!#
&
$
3
2
4
,
"
4
"
3
%
"
"
$
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
!
%
&
'
: %!
'0 1
.
(
*3
'1 . 94 +
!#::
0$
*
': 94 +
"
12
:
': 94 +
<
>
'!
! $
'
$-"
$ $
!: 2
>2
>
"
8:*::0 !!;:!
"
$
$
4
8* !%
! )
'#
* !*+
#
')
$
$"6'
#
'$
!
!'
!
'
!
$ $
$,
$
* !0+
!
!
#
!"6$
$
!,
!' $
$$$$
!
$
$
-
!
"
. 2
% 2
: :*
'! (#
+
: 11
'## %
+2
2
6
E
$$ !
!$- $ !$$- $
, ' !!$$- !' !
!
$
'
, $
!$$#$
$!
$
'
$- '
'' &
# "6$
$,
$ #$
$
'
!
!
!
!
!$$"
$
( 2
)
*
'#
* !*+
/
#0!
&A' ($)* )+%/, )! .
07
'!+
7
/
: :%
': 0*
2
E
1
'
8* !.
"
$
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
"
"
$"
+4
)*+
>
5
;3
5
-
4
=
"
$"
+4
7
)(
5
,
=
2>
"
>
! $
)
)
! "
( $
$ $! '
"
)$&6$ "
!!
$
$
4
$- $ &
$ !
2
$
# ,
!: 94F
B
!(
'% 1
(
'
HC
>E
>
*::J)
'%!*J7+
69
$
3 1
$-,
?
!
! '
!
# $ !$$$
!
$, !
'
&
$
$
$
$
$!
?
(
.//01 23450&6
?
7
'$
$
#(:J)'!#!J7+
% .
. $
# -
(2
'
*$
"
+
% )
8:*::0 !!;:!
?
)
'
$ "
! "
;
+
02
"
$
$
4
8* !(
! "
("
?
*
"
9" $
$ "
?
%
! )
79 7:"
# "
;/
&
% E
7
. $
"
(7
1%:
5
$
*%:
*1(
7
8
"
&
8* !*
"
$
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
("
0<'
>
9" $
9"
0,/ "! $ 4 4
"
>
*
9" $
"! $ 4 4
("
,<'
! $
"
! $
>
# ,
>
> )>
>
'! )
( !<+
% 2
K1 : 0( !* 6) #
'E #(*0
=
+
=
7
. 7
%0J
-
# ,
7
7
'
> )>
6
6
!
!
'
"
$4
!
*$
7
!
- $
>
'
%+
=
'!+ -
%0J
( #:+
2
'E #(*0
$$
!
!
!
' $
!
!
$
!!
'4
$!
"8
# ,
'
!$!
! !
!
$ '
< ,$
#$ '$
@
>
>
'( )
K1 : 0( !* 6) #
=
+
7
>->
(7
0$
9"
% 7
. 7
17
< "
'
($
>
*$
>
'(+ =
07
1 "
)23 $ ( #: 1%:
$ 5 7&6-$&/ 7
% > !>
/
.
@
F
! > $>F
# $
%
9
26 -
"
$
$
4
$ 5 7
. )
( > )>F
*
/
26 "
8* !0
8* !1
"
$
$
4
8:*::0 !!;:!
!"
# $% # $ &
'
(
/+
)*+,-.
0
$ '
!
!
!
"
% &
$
)1- #2
)1- $3
! 4
&
!
)1- #2
4
&5
)1- $3
)1- $3
!3&
5
"59, ( # $
$
71
=:
<2#228 $42$
'
1
/
1
!
)1- $3
)1- #2
8
"59, ( # $
$
71
=:
'
1
&
7
)1- #2
4
/
1
<# $
$-
!= "
!$>&
# 7&
!$#&
7+
=5
"
$)
!7
# $&
!"#$%& %'()# % *
85
! "
#
+
,-.
'
/#*
$
%
#
#
$
7.
=!3& -
!8 "
# $&
7 -
!>&
!3& 6
=-
!= "
!$#&
8-
8)
!7&
!$>&
!$3&
!=&
3
# 7&
!=&
!$&
!7&
>
!$3&
#
!$>&
&
&'(
B2 22$C2 227
,
!2 2227C2 2223
E
!$>&
&D
&
8 $48
?1
!
.
.
.
( $
$)
! "
<# 7
5
? @&
@
)
)
! $
$ !$
!
!
!
$ $
!
$
+
,,#! /
!
!.
!
$
!
'
$ * +,* $
)!*
&,./) ("-'
.
01"-'
$*+,* $
2 '"! " 31 " /
#
'
!"4
!
!
! $
$ !
!' !
! $)566
"4
+ 01
#
<2#228 $42$
G
% &
!=&
!$&
$2
!$>& 1 !
$7 H
!=&
?1
&
5
.
$48
$$ *
-' $
'
7
&
8
'
$ !$ "9
22 0 :22
'
%
$"
!$>&
!$#&
!
/$ !
! ) )
+2"; <
0 +=" <
$
%
#
#
0+
1 (
1 231 41
5---
$=
!=&
% &
&,- 6
A
!$>&
!=&
$8
?
$3 H
!
?+""@
I&
2 #%#3#
1
%'#%3!0
#%#)0 %
2 "%0)(
>
-' $
'
7
&
8
'
$!$ $
220 :22
'
%
$"
0+
1 (
"59, ( # 7
$
7
=
8
3
>
#
F
G
;
*
1
H
)
.
)
!5
= @ +;
'
!84
/$ !
! ) )
+2";< 0+=" <
1 231 41
5---
&,- 6
$> 5
7
.
5
)
)
)
<
!7&
.
)
.
$# 1
1
$8
? @ ?1
@
?@
&
! #
$
6=2&;
!/? @ + / $
$
<2#228 $42$
'' $
#
!
4 $) /
<# =
,-.
'
"0*
!$>&
&
&'(
,
!2 2227C2 2223
E
B2 22$C2 227
!$>&
&D
&
8 $48
$
7 -
!= "
=-
#7 &
!$#&
8-
!$>&
!$3&
G*
!=&
!$&
$ * +,* $
)!*
&,./) ("-'
.
01"-'
$*+,* $
2 '"! " 31 " /
#
'
!"4
!
!
! $
$ !
!' !
! $)566
"4
+ 01
#
+
,,#! /
!
!.
!
$
!
'
!$>&
!$#&
!7&
$2
% &
>
!$3&
$
%
#
#
$$
?
$
'
@
!$$)& &
! $
!$$)& &
$7 H
!=&
?1
"59, ( # 7
$;
7*
=1
1
8H
3>+
#
F.
G)
!74
<# 8
'
'(
$2
$$
$7
$=
$8
$3
$>
$#
5
.
))(: -; !)1-$3&
)
+
)
)
<
!7&
-' $
'
!
7
&
8
'
/$ !
! ) )
$!$ "
9
22
+2"; <
<- -<9<0 :22
+="
<
<5A-<9<
'
%
$"
&
<2#228 $42$
$= 1
&
$> 5
$# ! &
)
?+""@ !
& ,
#%#!# 2 #%#(#
'#%/3)2 "%#"3
$8 5
&
$F H
!
+""
&
$G 1
$=
J
1
"%#"3
5
H
-
#%#!#:#%#(#
!=&
!$>&
46
$G
72 *
$=
4 45
, 4
4 .
4 45
4
46 "7 ( .
$ ,-.
+&
4 #%##8 %'#%))9
*
% '#%/3):
!$>&
!$#&
')90 % *
7$ 1
1
)"# $%& %
A
?@
&;
!=&
$= 5
$8 ! &
$!
$)
!
$3 5
$%& %'"/# % *
$> 1
.&
!=&
")0
&,
#%#!#:#%#(# %'#%/3):"%#"3
$# 5
.&
,
+""
$ $ $
$) 3/B)
=&
$ !
/
$
% $ +=
$
$ %
$
! +? $
;
$!
$
$
$"
%
$
! +?
$!
$
@ 5
!$$ "
7!$>&
,
$>
!$#&
!$&
!=&
!$&
8
!
"
;
!=&
$
")0
A
!$>&
-.
+&
'#%))9
*
!8&
!7&
5
$%& %'"/# % *
# 747 &
!7&
$=
4 45
, 4
4 .
4 45
4
46 "7 9 '
+6 6* .
$ ,:
46 +
4
4 #%##8 %
!F&
!$3&
!$3&
>
!$2&
#
+
!> %# "
!> %# "
7 &
!$8&
G
+
!G&/
!>%# "
7&
!3&
!> %# "
7 &
7&
!=&
<2#228 $42$
<# 3
>5
!G&
#5
1
< %
!= % $>&
F 5
$1
&
$ $8,/) 7
7 5
G5
5
&
34F
=:
J
J
!)1-#2&
!)1-$3&
!)1-#2&
!)1-$3&
!(5 *( &
+.
+.
+.
+.
+
J
5. 8 32=
5. 7 328
!)1-#2&
!)1-$3&
$$,/1 7
8 8G8 !$$8 $
&
8 8G3 !$$8 7
&
7 8G= !>= =
&
7 8G3 !>= 8
&
8 $7> !$28 F
&
= .
!$$8 8
&
!>= >
&
7 F>G !#= >
7 F#7 !#7 G
85
&
&
!7&
7
6$$)
-$!
! $
$& +2& * 9
&
3 5
)
!2 223
2 227
&
=22 322
0+
<# >
<2#228 $42$
&;
$,
$7 "
<
!>%
# 7&
K8 ! A
1
75
"
7 &
7&
= 5
"
7 &
7&
&
!$7 % $=
!$7 %$= "
$1
@
!> %#
!> %# "
?
@
?.
!$8 "
!3&
1
# 7&
!$2&
=5
!3&
!$8& !
?-
!$8&
&
-'!$$)
35
>-
!G&
$
"*
/
# !$
5
#
!$3&
1
@
5
!F&
!$3&
!G&
+
F5
!$3&
=32N" C 322N"
!$##N1 C7>2N1&
G5
!F&
$2
!$&
$$
!=
!7&
!8&
$7 )
!$>&
7
$)
!=&
!
9
)
!
)!* +
<=
$ $ $
&
$
$)
9:;
$
+:C )
!$)
!$#&
L
6
$= 5
)
!3&
6
&
$3
!8 >
!$$&
5
?
@
1
$
7:
?+ @
1
!
&
<2#228 $42$
<# #
<# F
<2#228 $42$
4. Disconnect and cap parking brake line to prevent entrance of foreign material.
5. Capscrews
6. Shims
7. Crossover Tube
J07005 7/94
J7-1
J7-2
4. Shims
5. Brake Caliper
6. Spacer (Used
ONLY w/2 Caliper
Installation)
J07005 7/94
J07005 7/94
4. Mounting Bracket
(Parking Brake
Support)
5. Capscrew
6. Flatwasher
7. Shims
8. Capscrew
with 0.75-10UNC X 7.00 inch threaded rod.
Remove remaining five capscrews.
1. Brake Disc
2. Service Brake Head
3. Parking Brake
Caliper, Piston, and
Housing
J7-3
J7-4
3. Prior to attaching new carrier and lining assemblies (7), clean screws (6) with a solvent to
remove old adhesive and other foreign material.
Apply a liberal coat of an epoxy adhesive to
threads of screws (6).
NOTE: Thread adhesive must tolerate temperatures
up to 350F (177C). 3M Scotch-Weld Number
2158B/A adhesive is recommended.
4. Install new carrier and lining assemblies (7) to
pistons (13) of each brake housing with adhesive coated screws (6). Tighten screws to standard torque. Refer to "Caliper Installation" to
install and adjust brake housings.
Caliper Disassembly
If the brake caliper is a seven spring model, (six
screws through brake lining), the following test can
be done before disassembly to determine quality of
the springs.
1. Mount caliper half in a press capable of producing 15 tons of force.
2. Gradually apply force to the piston. Do not
apply force directly to the lining. If the force
required to bottom out the piston is less than
19,780 lb. the springs are worn out and must be
replaced.
J07005 7/94
13. Piston
14. Backing
15. Backup Ring
16. Packing
17. Backup Ring
18. Bleeder Screw
19. Piston
Housing (Inboard)
20. Piston Housing
(Outboard)
J07005 7/94
4. Install piston and lining assemblies (13 & 7, Figure 7-4) into housings (19 & 20), being careful
not to damage packings. Make sure thread
holes are free of lubricant, clean and dry.
5. Install capscrews (8) and flat washer (9) into
caps (10). Install springs (11 & 12) over capscrews (6) protruding through cap (10).
J7-5
J7-6
J07005 7/94
ACTION
A. Replace disc.
C. Replace linings
and crossover
tube.
2. Lining Carrier
J07005 7/94
3. Lining
J7-7
CLEARANCE DIMENSION IN
STEP 9
120C,445E
510E
170C/D
630E w/776
wheel motors
630E w/788
wheel motors
685E
830E
J7-8
J07005 7/94
!"
# $% # $ &
'
(
/+
)*+,-.
0
$ '
!
!
!
"
% &
$
)1- #2
)1- $3
! 4
&
!
)1- #2
4
&5
)1- $3
)1- $3
!3&
5
"59, ( # $
$
71
=:
<2#228 $42$
'
1
/
1
!
)1- $3
)1- #2
8
"59, ( # $
$
71
=:
'
1
&
7
)1- #2
4
/
1
<# $
$-
!= "
!$>&
# 7&
!$#&
7+
=5
"
$)
!7
# $&
!"#$%& %'()# % *
85
! "
#
+
,-.
'
/#*
$
%
#
#
$
7.
=!3& -
!8 "
# $&
7 -
!>&
!3& 6
=-
!= "
!$#&
8-
8)
!7&
!$>&
!$3&
!=&
3
# 7&
!=&
!$&
!7&
>
!$3&
#
!$>&
&
&'(
B2 22$C2 227
,
!2 2227C2 2223
E
!$>&
&D
&
8 $48
?1
!
.
.
.
( $
$)
! "
<# 7
5
? @&
@
)
)
! $
$ !$
!
!
!
$ $
!
$
+
,,#! /
!
!.
!
$
!
'
$ * +,* $
)!*
&,./) ("-'
.
01"-'
$*+,* $
2 '"! " 31 " /
#
'
!"4
!
!
! $
$ !
!' !
! $)566
"4
+ 01
#
<2#228 $42$
G
% &
!=&
!$&
$2
!$>& 1 !
$7 H
!=&
?1
&
5
.
$48
$$ *
-' $
'
7
&
8
'
$ !$ "9
22 0 :22
'
%
$"
!$>&
!$#&
!
/$ !
! ) )
+2"; <
0 +=" <
$
%
#
#
0+
1 (
1 231 41
5---
$=
!=&
% &
&,- 6
A
!$>&
!=&
$8
?
$3 H
!
?+""@
I&
2 #%#3#
1
%'#%3!0
#%#)0 %
2 "%0)(
>
-' $
'
7
&
8
'
$!$ $
220 :22
'
%
$"
0+
1 (
"59, ( # 7
$
7
=
8
3
>
#
F
G
;
*
1
H
)
.
)
!5
= @ +;
'
!84
/$ !
! ) )
+2";< 0+=" <
1 231 41
5---
&,- 6
$> 5
7
.
5
)
)
)
<
!7&
.
)
.
$# 1
1
$8
? @ ?1
@
?@
&
! #
$
6=2&;
!/? @ + / $
$
<2#228 $42$
'' $
#
!
4 $) /
<# =
,-.
'
"0*
!$>&
&
&'(
,
!2 2227C2 2223
E
B2 22$C2 227
!$>&
&D
&
8 $48
$
7 -
!= "
=-
#7 &
!$#&
8-
!$>&
!$3&
G*
!=&
!$&
$ * +,* $
)!*
&,./) ("-'
.
01"-'
$*+,* $
2 '"! " 31 " /
#
'
!"4
!
!
! $
$ !
!' !
! $)566
"4
+ 01
#
+
,,#! /
!
!.
!
$
!
'
!$>&
!$#&
!7&
$2
% &
>
!$3&
$
%
#
#
$$
?
$
'
@
!$$)& &
! $
!$$)& &
$7 H
!=&
?1
"59, ( # 7
$;
7*
=1
1
8H
3>+
#
F.
G)
!74
<# 8
'
'(
$2
$$
$7
$=
$8
$3
$>
$#
5
.
))(: -; !)1-$3&
)
+
)
)
<
!7&
-' $
'
!
7
&
8
'
/$ !
! ) )
$!$ "
9
22
+2"; <
<- -<9<0 :22
+="
<
<5A-<9<
'
%
$"
&
<2#228 $42$
$= 1
&
$> 5
$# ! &
)
?+""@ !
& ,
#%#!# 2 #%#(#
'#%/3)2 "%#"3
$8 5
&
$F H
!
+""
&
$G 1
$=
J
1
"%#"3
5
H
-
#%#!#:#%#(#
!=&
!$>&
46
$G
72 *
$=
4 45
, 4
4 .
4 45
4
46 "7 ( .
$ ,-.
+&
4 #%##8 %'#%))9
*
% '#%/3):
!$>&
!$#&
')90 % *
7$ 1
1
)"# $%& %
A
?@
&;
!=&
$= 5
$8 ! &
$!
$)
!
$3 5
$%& %'"/# % *
$> 1
.&
!=&
")0
&,
#%#!#:#%#(# %'#%/3):"%#"3
$# 5
.&
,
+""
$ $ $
$) 3/B)
=&
$ !
/
$
% $ +=
$
$ %
$
! +? $
;
$!
$
$
$"
%
$
! +?
$!
$
@ 5
!$$ "
7!$>&
,
$>
!$#&
!$&
!=&
!$&
8
!
"
;
!=&
$
")0
A
!$>&
-.
+&
'#%))9
*
!8&
!7&
5
$%& %'"/# % *
# 747 &
!7&
$=
4 45
, 4
4 .
4 45
4
46 "7 9 '
+6 6* .
$ ,:
46 +
4
4 #%##8 %
!F&
!$3&
!$3&
>
!$2&
#
+
!> %# "
!> %# "
7 &
!$8&
G
+
!G&/
!>%# "
7&
!3&
!> %# "
7 &
7&
!=&
<2#228 $42$
<# 3
>5
!G&
#5
1
< %
!= % $>&
F 5
$1
&
$ $8,/) 7
7 5
G5
5
&
34F
=:
J
J
!)1-#2&
!)1-$3&
!)1-#2&
!)1-$3&
!(5 *( &
+.
+.
+.
+.
+
J
5. 8 32=
5. 7 328
!)1-#2&
!)1-$3&
$$,/1 7
8 8G8 !$$8 $
&
8 8G3 !$$8 7
&
7 8G= !>= =
&
7 8G3 !>= 8
&
8 $7> !$28 F
&
= .
!$$8 8
&
!>= >
&
7 F>G !#= >
7 F#7 !#7 G
85
&
&
!7&
7
6$$)
-$!
! $
$& +2& * 9
&
3 5
)
!2 223
2 227
&
=22 322
0+
<# >
<2#228 $42$
&;
$,
$7 "
<
!>%
# 7&
K8 ! A
1
75
"
7 &
7&
= 5
"
7 &
7&
&
!$7 % $=
!$7 %$= "
$1
@
!> %#
!> %# "
?
@
?.
!$8 "
!3&
1
# 7&
!$2&
=5
!3&
!$8& !
?-
!$8&
&
-'!$$)
35
>-
!G&
$
"*
/
# !$
5
#
!$3&
1
@
5
!F&
!$3&
!G&
+
F5
!$3&
=32N" C 322N"
!$##N1 C7>2N1&
G5
!F&
$2
!$&
$$
!=
!7&
!8&
$7 )
!$>&
7
$)
!=&
!
9
)
!
)!* +
<=
$ $ $
&
$
$)
9:;
$
+:C )
!$)
!$#&
L
6
$= 5
)
!3&
6
&
$3
!8 >
!$$&
5
?
@
1
$
7:
?+ @
1
!
&
<2#228 $42$
<# #
<# F
<2#228 $42$
SECTION K
AIR SYSTEM
INDEX
AIR SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2-1
Component Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2-2
AIR SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR
Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Dryer/Aftercooler (See NOTE below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Manual Drain Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Pressure Regulator Valve (Detroit Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Regulator Valve for Contact Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air System Lubricator (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K3-1
K3-1
K3-1
K3-1
K3-3
K3-4
K3-5
K3-6
NOTE:
Due to several different customer options for Air Dryers and/or Aftercooler, service for these components
are not covered in this section. When Air Dryer or Aftercooler service is required, refer to Section M,
Options and Accessories, in this manual.
K01010 6/95
Index
K5-1
K5-1
K5-1
K5-1
K1-1
K1-2
Index
K01010 6/95
K02009 11/95
Air System
K2-1
Air Dryer/Aftercooler
Air Compressor
The air compressor is driven by the engine and is
controlled by an air governor. The compressor operates whenever the engine is running, but the actual
compression of air is controlled by the air governor
which is set to control air system pressure at 115-135
psi (790-930 kPa). A safety valve installed in the
main air tank prevents a build-up of air pressure
above 175 psi (1200 kPa).
When system pressure reaches 135 psi (930 kPa)
the air governor pilot pressure holds intake valves on
the compressor open, stopping the compression of
air. When system pressure falls below 115 psi (790
kPa) the air governor pilot pressure is removed
allowing the intake valves to close and charge the
system back to 135 psi (930 kPa).
Air Starter Circuit (If Equipped*)
*Some trucks may be equipped with an Electric
Starter system. This circuit is not used in those installations.
Air pressure from the main air tank is ported to the
dump valve. Air pressure through internal porting is
allowed to pass through the dump valve to the air
start solenoid. Air is blocked at these valves until
actuated by the key switch. When the key switch is
turned to the start position the air start solenoid valve
opens and air pressure engages the air starter
engagement mechanism. After the engagement
mechanism is engaged, pilot pressure from the
engagement mechanism housing is ported to the
dump valve. The pilot pressure opens the dump
valve allowing main system air pressure to be ported
to the starter. When the key switch is released, the
air starter solenoid valve closes, cutting off air to the
starter and allowing the engagement mechanism to
disengage.
Due to several different customer options for Air Dryers and/or Aftercooler, service for this component is
not covered in this section. When Air Dryer or Aftercooler service is required, refer to Section "M",
Options and Accessories, in this manual.
K2-2
Air System
K02009 11/95
Check Valve
The air governor supplies an air signal to the moisture ejection valve to eject moisture. Each time the
air governor unloads the air compressor, air is
directed into the drain valve at Port A. (Refer to Figure 2-3). Also, the drain valve is operated when
these air signals are removed. Each time air is
applied or removed at Port A the piston in the drain
valve is cycled allowing moisture collected within
Port B to be exhausted to atmosphere. Manual
draining can be accomplished by turning the manual
shut-off handle clockwise until air is exhausted out
Port C. Further advance of the manual shut-off handle will block the air escape opening, thus trapping
the air in the main air tank.
NOTE: The automatic/manual drain valve should be
manually activated after every 8-10 hours of
operation.
When the operator manually drains or opens the
valve, the handle should be turned clockwise until
moisture begins to eject, then turned an additional
turn clockwise to allow all moisture to eject. The handle is then turned fully counterclockwise. If there is
pilot pressure from the air governor on Port "A", the
manual valve will not drain air. After operating manual valve, be certain to turn it fully counterclockwise.
K02009 11/95
Air System
K2-3
Air Governor
Air pressure from the air tank enters the inlet port (4,
Figure 2-4) of the governor, passes through a filter
and acts on the bottom of the piston and valve.
When air pressure reaches 135 psi (931 kPa), the
piston moves upward unseating the valve. Air pressure flows through the drilled passage in the piston
and out the unloader port (3, Figure 2-4) to the compressor intake valve.
As the pressure drops to 115 psi (793 kPa), force
exerted by air pressure on the bottom of the piston
(1) will be reduced so that the spring force will move
the piston down. The inlet valve closes and the
exhaust valve opens allowing pressure in the
unloader line to vent through the exhaust port (2).
With pressure released in the unloader line, the compressor will pressurize the air tank.
K2-4
3. Unloader Port
4. Inlet Port
Air System
K02009 11/95
K02009 11/95
Air System
K2-5
NOTES:
K2-6
Air System
K02009 11/95
AIR GOVERNOR
Disassembly
1. Loosen and remove top cover (17, Figure 3-2).
2. Remove the spring assembly retaining ring (12)
and lift out spring assembly.
AIR DRYER/AFTERCOOLER
Due to several different customer options for Air Dryers and/or Aftercooler, service for this component is
not covered in this section. When Aftercooler or Air
Dryer service is required, refer to Section "M",
Options and Accessories, in this manual.
SAFETY VALVE
K03008 6/95
4. Stem
5. Spring
1. Valve Spring
2. Inlet & Exhaust Valve
3. Piston
4. Grommet
5. Washer
6. Spring Guide (Lower)
7. Spring
8. Spring Guide
9. Spring Guide (Upper)
10. Locknut
11. Adjusting Screw
12. Retaining Ring
13. Exhaust Stem
14. Exhaust Stem Spring
15. Body
16. Filter
17. Cover
18. O-Ring
K3-1
Adjustment
1. Install an accurate air gauge to monitor main air
pressure. Start engine and allow air system to
fully charge. Watch the air pressure gauge to
determine the point at which the compressor
cuts-out (stops delivering compressed air).
This pressure should be 135 psi (930 kPa).
2. Open air drain valve to expend system air pressure and note at what pressure the compressor
cuts-in (delivers compressed air). This pressure should be 115 psi (790 kPa).
3. If the above pressures are not at the recommended levels, adjust air governor valve as follows:
a. Remove cover (17, Figure 3-5).
b. Hold adjusting screw (11) with a screwdriver
and loosen locknut (10).
c. Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise to
raise the cut-out pressure, clockwise to
lower the cut-out pressure. The cut-in
pressure should automatically follow to the
correct level. Hold adjusting screw and
tighten the locknut to secure. Cycle the compressor several times to check the cut-out
and cut-in pressures. One turn of the
adjusting screw changes pressure settings
approximately 16 psi (110 kPa).
d. Replace cover (17).
Leakage Tests
With governor in cut-out position, check the
exhaust port by applying soap suds to determine
leakage at the exhaust valve.
Any leakage in the cut-out position could be at the
upper piston grommet or exhaust valve.
With governor in cut-in position, check for leakage
at the inlet valve by applying soap suds at the
exhaust port.
Any leakage in cut-in position could be at the bottom piston grommet or inlet valve.
K3-2
K03008 6/95
Disassembly
1. Remove cap (2, Figure 3-3) with shut-off valve (1).
Removal
1. Block the truck securely to prevent any movement.
2. Release all air pressure from system.
3. Remove the air line and heater wire (if
equipped) from the drain valve. Remove drain
valve. Cap air line to prevent contamination.
Installation
1. Install valve assembly on main air tank and
reconnect air lines.
2. Charge air system and check valve for leaks
and proper operation.
K03008 6/95
6. Seat Spacer
7. Valve Seat
8. O-Ring
9. Piston
10. O-Ring
11. Capscrew
12. Dirt Cap
13. Shoulder Bolt
14. Spring Cap
15. Small Spring
K3-3
Disassembly
Assembly
1. Install valve seat (7, Figure 3-3) and slide piston
(9) with new O-rings into valve body (3).
2. Install seat spacer (6) and valve seat (5) using
seat bolt and washer (4).
3. If removed, install springs (15 & 16) and seat
washer (17). Install spring cap (14) using capscrews (11).
4. Install shoulder bolt (13) and replace dirt cap
(12).
5. Install shut-off valve (1) and cap (2).
K3-4
K03008 6/95
3. Inspect all parts for wear or damage. Pay particular attention to the diaphragm (8, Figure 3-4),
valve seat (12), and plunger (15).
4. Lubricate all metal surfaces with number 7
Lubriplate and all rubber parts with Dow Corning Number 55 Pneumatic grease.
Assembly
1. Install O-ring (19, Figure 3-4), washer (18),
spring (17). Position O-ring (16) on plunger (15)
and install plunger.
K03008 6/95
8. Bonnet
9. Diaphragm
10. Poppet
11. Button
12. Adjustment Screw
13. Jam Nut
14. Capscrew
K3-5
Assembly
1. Install poppet (10, Figure 3-5) and spring (4) in
bore of body (1).
2. Install cap (2) with gasket (3) and tighten.
3. Place diaphragm plate (5) in body as shown.
4. Lay diaphragm (9) on top of diaphragm plate
and body assembly.
5. Place spring (6) and button (11) on top of diaphragm. Install bonnet (8) and secure in place
with screws (14).
6. Install adjusting screw (12) with jam nut (13).
Do not tighten adjusting screw at this time.
Refer to Adjustment.
Adjustment
1. Screw regulator inlet port onto threaded coupler.
Service
1. With engine shut down and air pressure
released, remove fill cap (Figure 3-6).
2. Removal of cap will release any pressure inside
of canister and allow access to the fill hole. Fill
with SAE 10W oil.
3. Replace fill cap to pressurize canister.
Adjustment
1. Turn adjusting screw in as far as possible.
2. Back adjusting screw out 1 to 1 1/2 turns.
NOTE: As a general rule lubricator should be
adjusted to produce one drop of oil per minute at 90
psi (620 kPa) and 20 CFM (0.6 cmm) air flow.
K3-6
K03008 6/95
K04001 7/90
3. Dump Valve
4. Air Starter Solenoid
Air Starter
K4-1
DUMP VALVE
AIR STARTER
The air starter (1) operation is controlled by the air
starter solenoid valve and the dump valve.
Air pressure is ported to the bendix inlet, the pinion
engages with the engine flywheel, air pressure
through the dump valve is then ported through the
starter to turn the engine flywheel. After the engine
starts, the pinion retracts from the engine flywheel.
K4-2
Air Starter
K04001 7/90
Service
1. Breather
2. Yoke
3. Coil
4. Coil Pole
5. Spring
6. Plunger Assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove breather (1, Figure 4-4) from yoke (2). Lift
off yoke (2) and coil (3). Unscrew and remove coil
pole (4) with spring (5) and plunger assembly (6).
2. Remove capscrews and lockwashers (7) securing valve body (8) to mounting bracket (11).
Remove O-ring (10) in valve body.
Assembly
1. Install O-ring (10, Figure 4-4) around roll pin (9)
on valve body (8). Align valve body to mounting
bracket (11) and secure with capscrews and
lockwashers (7).
3. Press coil lightly until threads of coil pole protrudes through coil. Install breather (1) onto coil
pole. Tighten securely.
7. Capscrews &
Lockwashers
8. Valve Body
9. Roll Pin
10. O-Ring
11. Mounting Bracket
DUMP VALVE
Removal
K04001 7/90
Air Starter
K4-3
AIR STARTER
Installation
1. Connect air pressure inlet and outlet lines. Connect pilot pressure lines.
Removal
1. Mark or tag all lines. Open drain cock on main
air tank to discharge system air pressure.
5. Spring
6. Body
7. Piston
Removal
2. Remove lubricator.
Installation
1. Prelube lubricator with diesel fuel prior to installation.
2. Install lubricator into starter lubricator port.
Disassembly
K4-4
Air Starter
K04001 7/90
K04001 7/90
33. Seal
34. Bulkhead Retainer
35. Bulkhead
36. O-Ring
37. O-Ring
38. Piston Bumper
39. Cup Retainer
40. Spring Cup
41. Clutch spring
42. Clutch Jaw
43. Clutch Jaw
44. Bearing
45. Washer
46. Lockwasher
47. Bearing Retainer
48. Bearing Retainer
Air Starter
49. Piston
50. O-Ring
51. Seal
52. Bearing
53. Drive Shaft
54. Backup Ring
55. Piston Bumper
56. Return Spring
57. Spring Seat
58. Gear Case
59. Bearing Retainer
60. Bearing Retainer
61. Bearing
62. Drive Gear
K4-5
26. Press the rear drive shaft bearing (52) off the
drive shaft.
27. Remove motor housing cover capscrews (4).
28. Pull motor housing cover (2) from motor housing (1). It may be necessary to dislodge the
motor housing cover by tapping it with a plastic
hammer.
29. Tap gear case (58) with a plastic hammer to dislodge it from the motor housing.
K4-6
Air Starter
K04001 7/90
37. Remove the rear end plate (9) from the rotor
shaft.
10. Install the rear end plate (9), bearing end up,
onto the rotor shaft.
11. Screw the rotor clamp nut (12) onto the rotor
shaft with the shoulder toward the bearing.
Tighten the nut until there is a 0.001 in. (0.02
mm) to 0.003 in. (0.07 mm) clearance between
the rear end plate and rotor.
Assembly
18. Lubricate and install the two outside cylinder Orings (8).
K04001 7/90
Air Starter
K4-7
the air ports of both the cylinder and the rear end
plate align.
20. Lubricate each vane (15) and insert one in each
of the rotor vane slots.
21. Slide the front end plate (16) over the pinion end
of the rotor. The other protruding end plate
alignment pin (6) in the face of the cylinder
should align with the dowel hole in the front end
plate.
29. Install the two housing cover plugs (3) into the
motor housing cover inlet boss and tighten
securely.
30. Press the rear drive shaft bearing (52) onto the
drive shaft.
31. Slide the small bearing retainer (48), convex
side first, onto the drive shaft. Press it into position in accordance with the instructions packaged with the new retainer.
22. Insert the two motor wave washers (17) into the
front end plate well.
23. Install the front rotor bearing (18) into the front
end plate well.
K4-8
Air Starter
K04001 7/90
K04001 7/90
Air Starter
K4-9
5. Motor Seals:
Plug the exhaust and apply 30 psi (207 kPa)
pressure to the inlet of the motor. Immerse the
starter for 30 seconds in a nonflammable solvent. If the starter is properly sealed no bubble
will appear.
K4-10
Air Starter
K04001 7/90
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Inadequate Lubrication
Repair unit.
Repair Unit.
K04001 7/90
Air Starter
K4-11
NOTES:
K4-12
Air Starter
K04001 7/90
Installation
1. Install treadle valve assembly and attach the air
lines. If necessary, adjust capscrew under heel
of pedal to eliminate any free play.
2. Completely check valve for proper operation
before putting truck to work. Charge air system
and check valve completely.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Treadle Valve
The treadle valve is pressure compensating, the
valve is a pressure regulator with a pedal to control it.
When the pedal is depressed, air flow enters the inlet
port and due to a compensating spring in the valve
and the pressure applied at the pedal, metered air
pressure is directed out the cylinder port to actuate
the throttle air cylinder. A booster spring located
under the pedal increases pedal effort and provides
feel for the operator. Maximum air pressure from
valve is 90 psi (620 kPa).
Service
1. Every month or after 500 hours of operation,
lubricate treadle roller and hinge pins with
engine oil. Lift boot from mounting place and
apply a few drops of SAE20 grade engine oil
between mounting plate and plunger. Replace
boot.
2. After two years of operation, disassemble treadle valve and clean all parts. Install new inlet
valve. U-cups and all O-rings.
COMPONENT REPAIR
The following procedure should be used for service
of the throttle treadle valve.
Removal
1. Relieve air pressure, tag and disconnect air
lines from throttle treadle valve. Cover ends of
lines and cap inlet and outlet ports of valve to
prevent entry of foreign material.
2. Remove capscrews and lockwashers securing
valve assembly to cab floor. Remove valve
assembly.
K05004
4. Outlet Port
5. Breather
Disassembly
1. Remove clips (5) from ends of push rod pin (10,
Figure 5-2) and treadle pin (4). Remove pins (4
& 10) from mounting bosses of pedal assembly,
roller (9), spring (3) and separate pedal from
valve assembly.
2. Remove push rod (11, Figure 5-2) and dust
boot (12) from inlet portion of valve body (15).
Match mark relationship of mounting plate (8) to
the valve body. Remove nut (13) and separate
mounting plate from valve.
3. Match mark inlet (2, Figure 5-3) and outlet (14)
portion of valve. Remove the machine screws
(16) and separate outlet body from inlet body.
Remove barrier plate assembly (8) and O-ring
(6). Remove small O-ring (7) from inlet body (2).
K5-1
Inspection
Discard O-rings, U cups and poppet seals and
replace with new. Check all parts for wear, cracks or
breakage and replace if necessary.
9. Roller
10. Push Rod Pin
11. Push Rod
12. Dust Boot
13. Nut
14. Air Filter
15. Valve Assembly
K5-2
9. U-Cup Seal
10. Thrust Ring
11. Balance Piston
12. Spring
13. Shim
14. Outlet Body
15. Plug
K05004
Assembly
1. Lightly coat all moving parts with moly grease
2. Install piston sleeve (3) with new O-ring (4) into
top of barrier plate (5). Install piston (2) and Ucup (1), open side down, into piston sleeve (3)
making sure U-cup seal is properly seated.
Place cage assembly (6) over the piston rod
end and into the barrier plate. Install inlet poppet (7) and support disc (8) on the piston rod
end (2). Fully depress piston into cage and
install retaining ring (14) into the groove on the
bottom of the piston rod end.
K05004
8. Support Disc
9. Retainer Ring
10. Spring
11. Poppet Plate
12. Exhaust Poppet
13. Disc Ring
14. Retainer Ring
K5-3
NOTES:
K5-4
K05004
SECTION L
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
INDEX
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L2-1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L2-1
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L2-1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENT REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-1
PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-2
Pump Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-2
Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-3
Cartridge Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-4
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-6
Cartridge Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-7
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-9
HYDRAULIC TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-10
Filling Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
STRAINER AND DIFFUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
Inspect and Clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-12
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FLUSHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-13
STEERING CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-1
STEERING CIRCUIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-1
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L4-1
STEERING CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-1
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-2
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-3
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L5-5
L01016
Index
L1-1
L1-2
Index
L01016
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
L02014
4. Unloader Valve
5. Hydraulic Tank
6. Breather (Air Filter)
7. Hoist Cylinder
Hydraulic System
L2-1
Hydraulic Tank
L2-2
5. Capscrew
6. Hoist Valve
7. Hoist Inlet
(From Unloader)
8. Bleeddown Manifold
9. Unloader Valve
10. High Pressure Filter
(Steering & Brakes)
11. Hydraulic Tank
12. Hoist Cylinder
Hydraulic System
L02014
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(With Trolley Assisted Option)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The following information describes the basic operation of the Haulpak truck hoist, steering, and wheelmotor blower cooling hydraulic systems.
Detailed information related to the hoist and steering
circuits and components can be found in this Section
of the manual. Refer to Section J for additional information on the hydraulically operated service brake
system components.
Refer to Figure 2-1. The hoist pump (3), cooling
blower pump (2), and steering/brake pump (1) are
supplied by a common reservoir (4) containing
approximately 134 gal (507l) type C-4 hydraulic oil.
Oil flowing from the bottom of the tank passes
through a 100 mesh wire suction strainer to the inlet
ports of the pumps. A shut-off valve located at the
bottom of the tank blocks oil flow during hoist and
steering/brake pump repair or replacement. The
blower pump shut-off valve is located at the pump
inlet.
L02014
Hydraulic System
L2-3
NOTES:
L2-4
Hydraulic System
L02014
L03014 1/95
5. Capscrew
6. Hoist Valve
7. Hoist Inlet
(From Unloader)
8. Bleeddown Manifold
9. Unloader Valve
10. High Pressure Filter
(Steering & Braking)
11. Hydraulic Tank
12. Hoist Cylinder
L3-1
Installation
1. Attach a suitable lifting device to the hydraulic
pump that can safely handle 300 lbs (136 kgs).
Align driveshaft splines with pump splines and
secure to truck with capscrews and lockwashers.
2. Uncap outlet lines and attach to the proper connections.
3. Install inlet hose to pump and secure with capscrews.
Pump Disassembly
1. Support the pump on blocks or clamp the body
in a vise as shown in Figure 3-2. If a vise is
used, use protective jaws to avoid damage to
outlet body and its machined surfaces.
2. Mark the pump inlet, outlet and cover for correct
reassembly (Figure 3-2).
3. Remove the cover screws (1, Figure 3-5) and
lift end cover (2) from the pump. This will
expose the cover end cartridge. Discard square
cut seal (5) and O-ring (6).
4. Pull cover end cartridge from the inlet housing
(Figure 3-3).
L3-2
L03014 1/95
Pump Assembly
1. Clamp outlet body (25, Figure 3-5) in a vise or
place on 2 x 4 wood blocks to facilitate assembly.
2. Lubricate primary shaft seal (24) with petroleum
jelly and place in position within outlet body
(25), garter spring up. See Figure 3-6 for seal
arrangement.
L03014 1/95
8. Seal Pack
Sub-Assemblies
9. Flex Side Plate
10. Rotor
11. Vanes & Inserts
12. Ring
13. Flex Side Plate
L3-3
L3-4
3. Steel Ball
L03014 1/95
3. Place the cartridge on a flat surface (outlet support plate down) and remove the two sockethead screws (17, Figure 3-5)
L03014 1/95
L3-5
FIGURE 3-10. REVERSE CARTRIDGE, USE A PIECE OF WOOD TO HOLD RING, ROTOR, AND VANES
10. Remove the vanes and inserts in order, starting
at the arrow. Keep them in order for inspection.
L3-6
L03014 1/95
Cartridge Assembly
L03014 1/95
L3-7
L3-8
L03014 1/95
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Check all strainers and filters for dirt and sludge. Clean
if necessary.
Disassemble the pump and check the shaft and cartridge for damage.
Coupling misalignment.
L03014 1/95
L3-9
HYDRAULIC TANK
Filling Instructions
L3-10
5. Fill Cap
6. FULL Oil Level
7. ADD Oil Level
8. Strainer (Inlet)
9. Cover
10. Strainer (Outlet)
11. Capscrews
12. Capscrews
13. Capscrews
14. Capscrews
L03014 1/95
HYDRAULIC TANK
STRAINER AND DIFFUSER
Removal
Removal
Do not loosen or disconnect any hydraulic line or
component connection until engine is stopped
and key switch has been "off" for at least 90 seconds.
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can
have sufficient force to enter a person's body by
penetrating the skin and cause serious injury and
possibly death if proper medical treatment by a
physician familiar with this type of injury is not
received immediately.
Take care to avoid contact with hot oil if truck
has been operating. Avoid spillage and contamination.
1. Turn key switch "Off" and allow at least 90 seconds for the steering accumulators to bleeddown.
2. Drain the hydraulic tank (3, Figure 3-12) by use
of the drain (2) located in the bottom of the tank.
3. Thoroughly clean the outside of the hydraulic
tank and attached equipment.
4. Disconnect hydraulic lines. Plug lines to prevent
spillage and possible contamination to the system. Tag each line as removed for proper identification during installation.
5. Attach a lifting device to the hydraulic tank.
6. Remove the capscrews and lockwashers securing the hydraulic tank to the frame.
7. Move hydraulic tank to a clean work area for
disassembly or repair.
Installation
1. Install hydraulic tank and secure with capscrews and lockwashers. Tighten to standard
torque.
2. Uncap hydraulic lines and attach to the proper
connections.
3. Fill the hydraulic tank with C-4 hydraulic oil.
4. Bleed all air from hydraulic pump suction line
before starting engine.
7. Gasket
8. Gasket
9. Drain Valve
10.Cover
11.Cover
L03014 1/95
L3-11
Installation
L3-12
L03014 1/95
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
FLUSHING PROCEDURE
The following instructions outline the procedure for
flushing the hydraulic system.
9. Start engine and run at 1000 RPM while performing the following:
L03014 1/95
L3-13
NOTES:
L3-14
L03014 1/95
STEERING CIRCUIT
STEERING CIRCUIT OPERATION
The hydraulic pump supplies oil to the unloader
valve. The unloader valve diverts oil between the
steering and hoist circuit, with priority to the steering
circuit. When the steering circuit reaches 2500 psi
(17.5 MPa) the unloading valve directs the oil flow to
the hoist circuit. If there is no demand on the hoist
circuit the oil is returned to the hydraulic tank.
Oil leaving the unloader valve for the steering circuit
goes to the bleeddown manifold. The bleeddown
manifold supplies oil to the steering accumulators
and the steering control valve via the flow amplifier.
Oil entering the accumulators pushes the floating pistons within the accumulators upward, compressing
the nitrogen on the opposite side of the pistons. The
nitrogen pressure increases directly with steering circuit pressure. The top side of the pistons are precharged to 1050 psi (7.4 MPa) with pure dry nitrogen.
When the steering circuit pressure reaches 2500 psi
(17.5 MPa) the accumulators will contain approximately 4 gal. (23 l) of hydraulic oil in each accumulator under pressure. The accumulators supply
hydraulic oil to the steering circuit in an emergency
situation should the hydraulic steering oil supply be
lost for any reason.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Steering Control Valve
The steering control valve is mounted to the underside of the deck beneath the cab.
Operation of the steering valve is both manual and
hydraulic in effect. The steering valve incorporates a
hydraulic control valve. Steering effort applied to the
steering wheel by the operator actuates the valve,
which in turn directs hydraulic oil through the flow
amplifier valve to the steering cylinders to provide the
operator with power steering.
Unloader Valve
The hydraulic pump supplies oil to the unloader valve
which is mounted on the outside of the left frame rail
to the rear of the front suspension mount (mounting
location may differ slightly, depending on truck
model). The unloader valve diverts oil between the
steering and hoist circuit, with priority to the steering
circuit. If the truck is equipped with all-hydraulic
brakes, the steering circuit port also supplies the
brake circuit. When the steering circuit reaches 2500
psi (17.5 MPa) the unloading valve directs the oil flow
to the hoist circuit. If there is no demand on the hoist
circuit, the oil is returned to the hydraulic tank.
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-1
L4-2
housing. The oil flow is blocked by the Pilot Unloading Valve poppet and the oil pressure holds the pilot
valve pilot spool against its lower seat.
As oil pressure in the steering circuit reaches 2500
psi (17.5 MPa), the poppet in the Pilot Unloading
Valve moves off its seat and allows this oil to flow
back to the hydraulic tank which causes a pressure
drop on the top side of the poppet in the Differential
Pressure Sensing Valve. The incoming pump pressure moves the poppet off its seat allowing oil flow to
go out the hoist/tank circuit port. See Figure 4-3. This
also causes a pressure drop across the Check Valve.
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-3
Bleeddown Manifold
All check valves, relief valves and bleeddown solenoid are replaceable. Valves and solenoids are
replaced as a unit and are not made to be repaired.
The steering circuit pressure is normally maintained
at 2500 psi (17.5 MPa) by the pilot unloading valve in
the unloader valve. Should a malfunction occur and
system pressure exceed this setting, the bleeddown
manifold relief valve will relieve the pressure at 3000
psi (21 MPa). The bleeddown solenoid will bleed off
pressure contained in steering accumulators each
time the key switch is turned to the Off position.
Bleeddown Solenoid
Each time the key switch is turned Off, it activates a
timer that energizes the bleeddown solenoid. When
the bleeddown solenoid is energized, all hydraulic
steering pressure, including the accumulators, is bled
back to the hydraulic tank.
After approximately 90 seconds the timer will deenergize to close the return port to tank. By this time
all the oil in the accumulators should be returned to
tank.
Accumulators
The accumulators are a floating piston type. The top
side of the accumulators are charged to 1050 psi (7.4
MPa) with pure dry nitrogen. Oil entering the accumulators pushes the piston upward compressing the
nitrogen on the top side of the piston. The nitrogen
pressure increases directly with steering circuit pressure. When steering circuit pressure reaches 2500
psi (17.5 MPa) the accumulators will contain a quantity of oil under pressure which is available for steering the truck. The accumulators also provide oil to be
used in case of an emergency situation should the
pump become inoperative.
L4-4
Located at the bottom of one accumulator is a pressure switch. The pressure switch is a normally closed
device used to activate a warning buzzer and a red
warning light when the key switch is turned to On
position. These alarms will signal anytime steering
circuit pressure decreases to less than 1850 psi (13
MPa). Secured to the top of each accumulator is
another pressure switch. These pressure switches
are electrical devices used to activate the accumulator precharge warning light should the nitrogen pressure fall below 1000 psi (7 MPa). Should the
precharge warning light come on anytime the keyswitch is On, the nitrogen must be recharged to
1050 psi (7.4 MPa).
High Pressure Filter
The high pressure filter is a secondary filtering system, filtering oil for the steering, brake, and hoist circuits. Oil is filtered through a 12 micron (absolute)
filter to reduce the possibility of contamination and
subsequent damage to the hydraulic system.
A switch located near the filter inlet will activate a
warning light on the instrument panel if flow through
the filter becomes restricted. The indicator light may
illuminate when oil in the system is cold. If this occurs,
the light should go out when system warms up. If the
warning light illuminates after the oil warms up, notify
maintenance personnel at earliest opportunity.
The high pressure filter element should be changed
every 500 hours or when the steering pump filter
warning light comes on. If the pressure differential
indicator becomes defective, replace it with a new
one.
Flow Amplifier
The flow amplifier (Figure 4-4) is located on the left
frame rail forward of the front suspension. The flow
amplifier is used in the steering circuit due to the
large volume of oil displacement required for steering. The flow amplifier uses the amount of flow from
the steering control valve to determine the amount of
amplified flow to send from the bleed down manifold
to the steering cylinders.
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-5
No Steer
L4-6
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-7
Steering Left
(Refer to Figure 4-6):
When the operator turns the steering wheel left, the
steering control unit valve is opened to allow oil coming in port P to pass to the gerotor section of the control unit to turn the rotor. Oil in the other side of the
gerotor flows through other passages in the control
unit valve and out steering control unit port L. This oil
enters port L of the flow amplifier assembly and goes
to a closed area B in the directional valve. As pressure in this area builds, it also passes into the spool
through orifice C to the spring area on the end of the
directional valve. The pressure then moves the spool
compressing the springs on the opposite end. This
movement allows the oil entering area B to pass
through the directional valve to area D of the amplifier valve through sleeve E holes to a passage
between sleeve E and valve F through hole G in
sleeve E where it initially is blocked by the valve
body. As pressure builds up in this area, oil also flows
from area D around the OD sleeve E around pin H
through orifice J to build pressure on the end of the
amplifier valve and opens hole G only enough to
allow the flow of oil coming from the steering control
unit to pass to the control area of the directional
valve. At the same time, the movement of sleeve E
opened the holes near the spring end to allow the oil
L4-8
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-9
Steering Right
(Refer to Figure 4-7):
Only a few differences occur between steer left and
steer right. When the operator turns the steering
wheel right, oil is supplied out ports R and LS of the
steering control unit. The oil enters the flow amplifier
assembly at port R and shifts the directional valve the
opposite direction. The oils flow through the amplifier
valve exactly the same. The combined oil from the
amplifier valve passes through the center area Q of
the directional valve to port CR where it goes to the
opposite ends of the steering cylinders to turn the
wheels right. The returning oil comes back through
port CL to go to the tank. The LS oil operates exactly
the same as steer left.
L4-10
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-11
L4-12
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L04012 6/91
Steering Circuit
L4-13
NOTES:
L4-14
Steering Circuit
L04012 6/91
L05006 7/98
Installation
1. Insert stub column through opening in deck and
align spline shaft with U-joint (6, Figure 5-1).
Install capscrews and nuts (4). Tighten capscrews to standard torque.
2. Install capscrew, lockwasher and nut (5)
through lower yoke (6) and tighten to 40 ft. lbs
(54 N.m) torque.
L5-1
3. Remove plugs from four hydraulic lines. Be certain that the previously tagged hydraulic lines
are connected to their respective ports according to the markings on the steering control
assembly.
NOTE: Some trucks may use an inline filter to
provide additional protection to the steering control
valve (see Figure 5-3). If equipped, this filter must be
installed in the port marked P on the steering
control housing.
L5-2
L05006 7/98
3. Housing
L05006 7/98
L5-3
L5-4
7. Bearing Assembly
8. Ring
9. Pin
10. Neutral
Position Springs
11. Cardan Shaft
12. Spacer
13. Tube
14. O-Ring
15. Distribution Plate
16. Gear Wheel Set
17. O-Ring
18. O-Ring
19. End Cover
20. Washers
21. Rolled Pin
22. Capscrew With Bore
23. Capscrews
L05006 7/98
Assembly
NOTE: When assembling the spool and sleeve, only
one of the two possible matching positions of the
spring slots can be used. The reason is that in the
other end of the sleeve and spool (opposite end of
the spring slots) there are three slots in the spool and
three holes in the sleeve. These must be opposite
each other on assembly so that the holes are partly
visible through the slots in the spool, refer to Figure
5-10.
2. Centering Springs
3. Spool
4. Sleeve
d. Slide the inner spool in the sleeve. Compress the ends of the neutral position springs
and push the neutral position springs in
place in the sleeve. Install the cross pin.
L05006 7/98
L5-5
L5-6
L05006 7/98
L05006 7/98
1. Gearwheel Set
2. Cross Pin (Outline)
3. Rotor
4. Cardan Shaft
L5-7
NOTES:
L5-8
L05006 7/98
Removal
Disassembly
1. Remove differential pressure valve. Refer to
Figure 6-1. Disassemble differential pressure
valve. Remove and discard poppet seal ring.
2. Remove pilot unloading valve. Disassemble
pilot unloading valve. Remove and discard all
seal rings, O-rings and back-up rings.
3. Remove steering circuit check valve using tool
shown in Figure 6-2. Remove check valve seal
ring.
L06003 3/99
L6-1
L6-2
L06003 3/99
BLEEDDOWN MANIFOLD
Removal
NOTE: Bleeddown Manifold may not have to be
removed from the truck to replace components. If
problem area has been isolated simply remove bad
component and replace with a new one.
Adjusting Relief Valve
1. Bleed down the system and install a 5000 psi
(35 MPa) pressure gauge in the pressure test
port (6, Figure 6-5) of the bleeddown manifold.
2. Start engine and run at low idle speed.
3. Loosen locknut on relief valve (4). Loosen locknut on unloader valve sensing unit.
4. Adjust the unloader valve sensing unit, raising
unloader cut-out pressure until bleeddown manifold relief valve opens at 3000 psi (21 MPA).
L06003 3/99
5. If bleeddown manifold system relief valve setting is below 3000 psi (20.6 MPa) it may be necessary to carefully raise both bleeddown relief
valve pressure setting and unloader cut-out
pressure until 3000 psi (20.6 MPa) is obtained.
NOTE: Each 1/16 turn of the adjusting screw is
equivalent to a setting change of approximately 100
psi (689 kPa).
6. Secure bleeddown manifold system relief valve
with locknut, install acorn nut and tighten.
7. Adjust unloader valve sensing unit to 2500 psi
(17.2 MPa). Secure sensing unit with locknut
and lockwire.
L6-3
7. From Accumulator
8. To Flow Amplifier
9. From Flow Amplifier
10. Accumulator
Bleeddown Solenoid
11. Quick Disconnects
L6-4
L06003 3/99
FLOW AMPLIFIER
Disassembly
Removal
Installation
1. Support the flow amplifier and move into position.
The flow amplifier valve is a precision unit manufactured to close tolerances, therefore complete cleanliness is a must when handling the flow amplifier
valve. Work in a clean area and use lint free wiping
materials or dry compressed air. Use a wire brush to
remove foreign material and debris from around the
exterior of the valve before disassembly. Clean solvent and type C-4 hydraulic oil should be used to
insure cleanliness and initial lubrication.
1. Remove counterpressure valve plug (17, Figure
6-6), and O-ring (16). Remove counterpressure
valve assembly (15).
2. Remove relief valve plug (18) and seal (19).
Using an 8 mm hex head allen wrench, remove
the relief valve assembly (20) if installed.
Remove steel seal (21).
3. Remove capscrew (37) and capscrews (36)
using a 10 mm and 13 mm hex head allen
wrench. Remove lockwashers (38 & 39).
Remove end cover (47).
4. Remove spring stop (41) and spring (42).
Remove spring stop (34) and springs (32 & 33).
Remove O-rings (40 & 49) and seal plate (50).
5. Remove spring control (31) and main spool
(29). Remove priority valve spool (43). Remove
spring control (25), springs (23 & 24) and spring
stop (22)
L06003 3/99
L6-5
L6-6
L06003 3/99
1. Capscrew
2. Lockwasher
3. Capscrews
4. Lockwasher
5. Cover
6. O-Ring
7. O-Ring
8. O-Ring
9. Item not used
10. O-Ring
11. O-Ring
12. Shock/Suction Valve (Complete)
13. Orifice Screw
14. Valve Housing
15. Counterpressure Valve (Complete)
16. O-Ring
17. Plug
18. Plug
19. Seal
20. Relief Valve (Complete) or Plug
21. Steel Seal
22. Stop
23. Spring
24. Spring
25. Spring Control
26. Orifice Screw
27. O-Ring
28. Shock/Suction Valve (Complete)
29. Main Spool
30. O-Ring
31. Spring Control
32. Spring
33. Spring
34. Spring Stop
35. Orifice Screw
36. Capscrews
37. Capscrew
38. Lockwasher
39. Lockwasher
40. O-Rings
41. Stop
42. Spring
43. Spool
44. Name Plate
45. Orifice Screw
46. Spring
47. Cover
48. Pins
49. O-Rings
50. Item not used
51. Amplifier Spool Assembly (Complete)
52. O-Ring
53. Orifice Screw
54. Check Valve
55. Spring
L06003 3/99
L6-7
7. Retaining Ring
8. Inner Spool
9. Spring
10. Plug
11. Orifice Screw
Assembly
1. Thoroughly lubricate each part prior to installation using clean, type C-4 hydraulic oil.
2. Reassemble the Amplifier spool assembly in
reverse order. Refer to steps 12 & 13, and Figure 6-8 under disassembly.
3. Install orifice screw (13, Figure 6-6). Tighten orifice screw to 4 in. lbs. (.5 N.m) torque.
4. Install check valve (54). Tighten check valve to
8 in. lbs. (1 N.m) torque.
5. Install orifice screw (53). Tighten orifice screw
to 8 in. lbs. (1 N.m) torque.
L6-8
9. Install amplifier spool assembly (51). Install priority valve spool (43) and spring (42). Install
spring (55).
10. Install spring control (31), springs (32 & 33) and
spring stop (34).
11. Lubricate O-rings (6, 7 & 8) with molycote
grease and position on cover (5) with seal plate
(9). Install end cover (5). Install capscrews (3)
with lockwashers (4). Tighten capscrews to 2 ft.
lbs. (2.7 N.m) torque. Install capscrew (1) and
lockwasher (2). Tighten capscrew to 6 ft. lbs. (8
N.m) torque.
12. Lubricate O-rings (40 & 49) with molycote
grease and install on cover (47). Position seal
plate (5) on end cover. Install end cover (47).
Install capscrews (36) with lockwashers (39).
Tighten capscrews to 2 ft. lbs. (2.7 N.m) torque.
Install capscrew (37) with lockwasher (38).
Tighten capscrew to 6 ft. lbs. (8 N.m) torque.
13. To prevent contamination, fit plastic plugs to
each valve port.
L06003 3/99
ACCUMULATORS
Removal
1. Insure key switch has been Off for at least 90
seconds to allow accumulator oil to drain back
to tank.
2. Remove charging valve guard (3, Figure 6-10)
and loosen small hex on charging valve three
complete turns. Depress the valve core until all
nitrogen pressure has been relieved.
L06003 3/99
1. Accumulator
2. Pressure Switch
Cover
3. Charging Valve
Guard
4. Charging Valve
L6-9
Disassembly
1. Remove charging valve (3, Figure 6-11).
2. Use a spanner wrench (Part Number TN0058)
to remove gland (4).
NOTE: Some accumulators may be equipped with a
screw-in type lower gland.
3. Remove plug (11). Using a round rod, push piston (6) out of accumulator.
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean parts using fresh cleaning solvent, lint
free wiping cloth and filtered compressed air. All
parts must be absolutely free of any foreign
matter larger than 3 microns.
2. Check piston bearings (7 Figure 6-11) for
excessive wear.
3. Minor defects may be corrected by lapping or
stoning. Clean parts to remove abrasive residue
after lapping or stoning.
4. Replace all O-rings and backup rings (5).
Assembly
Assemble the accumulators in a dust, lint free area.
Maintain complete cleanliness during assembly to
prevent possible contamination.
1. Lubricate all components with clean Type C-4
hydraulic oil.
2. If bearings (7) need replacing, specific bonding
instructions are required to properly replace the
bearings. If replacement is necessary contact
the HAULPAK distributor for proper procedure.
NOTE: Prior to piston installation, coat the O.D. with
rust preventive oil.
3. Install T ring (8) on piston and install the piston
with the concave side toward gas end of accumulator cylinder housing (9).
4. Install new O-rings and backup rings on glands.
5. Install gland (4) and tighten the glands to 850 ft.
lbs. (1152 N.m) torque.
FIGURE 6-11. ACCUMULATOR ASSEMBLY
1. Capscrew
2. Cover
3. Charging Valve
4. Gland
5. O-Ring & Backup
Ring
L6-10
6. Piston
7. Bearing
8. T-Ring Seal
9. Tube
10. Plug
11. Plug
L06003 3/99
6. Valve Body
7. O-Ring
8. Valve Stem
9. O-Ring
If nitrogen pressure is present in the accumulators, make certain only the small swivel hex nut
is turned during the next step. Turning the complete valve assembly may result in the valve
assembly being forced out of the accumulator by
the nitrogen pressure inside.
3. Remove charging valve cap (1, Figure 6-12).
Turn small swivel hex nut (4) three complete
turns counterclockwise.
4. Depress the valve stem and hold down until all
nitrogen has been released.
5. If a loss in nitrogen pressure is &(the reason for
recharging, inspect the charging valve and
accumulator for damage. Replace or repair
items, as necessary, before charging procedure.
6. Connect the nitrogen charging kit to the charging
valves. Open the regulator and charge the accumulators simultaneously to 1050 psi (7.2 MPa).
NOTE: If a loss in nitrogen pressure occurred during
operation, oil may still be present in the accumulator
below the piston. This oil can be bled off during the
nitrogen charging procedure by turning the steering
wheel back and forth or by actuating the bleed down
solenoid by turning the key switch On and then
Off.
L06003 3/99
L6-11
STEERING CYLINDERS
The steering cylinders and tie rod are mounted in the
same manner. The removal and installation instructions can be used for both. See Section G.
Disassembly
1. Remove capscrews (5, Figure 6-14) and pull
rod (12) and gland (9) out of cylinder.
2. Remove locknut (2) and piston (1). Remove piston bearing (3) and piston seal (4) from piston.
3. Pull rod (12) free of gland (9). Remove O-ring
(8) and backup ring (7). Remove rod seal (10)
and rod wiper (11).
4. Inspect cylinder housing, gland, piston and rod
for signs of pitting, scoring or excessive wear.
Clean all parts with fresh cleaning solvent and
lubricate with clean Type C-4 hydraulic oil.
Assembly
1. Install new rod seal (10, Figure 6-14), rod wiper
(11), backup ring (7) and O-ring (8) in gland (9).
2. Push rod (12) through top of gland, slowly
advancing rod over rod seal and rod wiper.
3. Install new piston seal (4) and piston bearing (3)
in piston (1). Secure piston to rod with locknut
(2). Tighten locknut to 2000 ft. lbs. (2712 N.m)
torque.
NOTE: Installation of the piston seal (4) may require
the following:
a. Heat piston seal (4) in boiling water for 3 to 4
minutes.
b. Remove piston seal from water and assemble on piston. DO NOT take longer than 5
seconds to complete as seal will take a permanent set.
L6-12
4. Spindle
5. Tie Rod
6. Spindle Arm
L06003 3/99
L06003 3/99
4. Piston Seal
5. Capscrew
6. Cylinder
7. Backup Ring
8. O-Ring
9. Gland
L6-13
L6-14
6. Bypass Valve
7. Filter Element
8. Housing
9. O-Ring
10. Plug
L06003 3/99
L06003 3/99
L6-15
L6-16
FIGURE 6-16.
1. Brake Circuit Supply
2. Bleeddown Manifold
3. Return to Tank
4. Pressure Relief
Valve; 3000 psi
(21 MPa)
5. Check Valve
6. Test Port
7. From Accumulators
8. To Flow Amplifier
9. From Flow Amplifier
10. Accumulator
Bleeddown Solenoid
11. Quick Disconnects
L06003 3/99
L06003 3/99
L6-17
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Replace pump.
Broken centering springs (Spool Valve, Steering Unit). Replace centering springs.
Worn mechanical linkage.
Repair or replace.
TROUBLE: Slip - A Slow Movement of Steering Wheel Fails to Cause Any Movement of the Steered
Wheels
Leakage of cylinder piston seals.
Replace seals.
Air in hydraulic system. Most likely air trapped in cylin- Bleed air from system. Placing ports on top of cylinder
ders or lines.
will help avoid trapping air.
L6-18
L06003 3/99
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Replace cylinder.
TROUBLE: Free Wheeling - Steering Wheel Turns Freely with No Back Pressure of No Action of the Front
Wheels
Lower splines of steering column may be disengaged
or damaged.
Check for loose fitting bearings at anchor points in steering linkage between cylinder and steered wheels.
Clean the steering control unit and filter the oil. If another
component has malfunctioned generating contaminating
materials, flush the entire hydraulic system.
L06003 3/99
L6-19
POSSIBLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: Steered Wheels Turn in Opposite Direction When Operator Turns Steering Wheel
Lines connected to wrong cylinder ports.
L6-20
L06003 3/99
HOIST CIRCUIT
HOIST CIRCUIT OPERATION
The following hoist circuit operation description
describes the basic hoist circuit. Further circuit
description is outlined under the individual component descriptions.
Hydraulic fluid is supplied by a tank located on the left
frame rail. The tank's service capacity is approximately
134 gal. (507 L). Refer to (10, Figure 7-1), Hoist Circuit
Schematic. Hydraulic oil is routed to a tandem vane
type pump, (9). The pump is driven by an accessory
drive at the end of the traction alternator.
Pump output is directed to two high pressure filters
(5), one mounted to the inboard side of the right hand
frame rail near hydraulic pump, and the other on the
outside of the left frame rail near the hydraulic tank.
L07014
4. Hoist Up Limit
Solenoid
5. High Pressure Filter
6. Hoist Pilot Valve
7. Unloader Valve
Hoist Circuit
L7-1
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Tank
The hydraulic tank supplies hydraulic oil for the hoist,
steering and brake circuits. The tank is located on the
left hand frame rail forward of the rear wheels. The
service capacity of the tank is 134 gal. (507 l). Type
C-4 hydraulic oil is recommended for use in the
hydraulic system. Oil used in the hoist circuit flows
through a 100 mesh wire suction strainer to the inlet
housing of the pump. Air drawn into the tank during
operation is filtered by dual air filters located on the
top of the tank. Oil level can be checked visually at
sight glasses located on the front face of the tank.
Hydraulic Pump
The hydraulic pump is a tandem, vane type pump
driven by a drive shaft passing through the end of the
alternator. The pump has a total output of 143 GPM
(541 l) at 1900 RPM. The front (shaft end) cartridge
delivers oil to the hoist valve and the rear (cover end)
cartridge supplies oil to the unloader valve. The
unloader valve directs priority oil for use in the steering and brake circuits and the remaining oil to the
hoist valve.
Hoist pressure is regulated by relief valves located
within the hoist control valve. Pressure test ports are
located at the outlet port of each pump cartridge.
High Pressure Filters
Hoist pump output oil is directed to the high pressure,
7 micron filters, one mounted to the inboard side of
the right hand frame rail near hydraulic pump, and
the other on the outside of the left frame rail near the
hydraulic tank. The filter assemblies are equipped
with a bypass valve which permits oil flow should the
filter element become plugged.
Flow restriction through the filter element is sensed
by an indicator switch. This switch will turn on an
instrument panel mounted red warning light to indicate filter service is required. The indicator light will
illuminate when restriction reaches approximately 40
psid (276 kPa). Actual filter bypass will result when
the filter element restriction reaches approximately
60 psid (414 kPa).
Hoist Valve
The hoist valve (Figure 7-2) is mounted to the
inboard side of the left hand frame rail. Hydraulic oil
from the shaft end of the hydraulic pump and the
unloader valve is routed to the hoist valve (or through
the high pressure filter from the pump).
L7-2
3. Spool Section
4. Inlet Section
Hoist Circuit
L07014
The load check allows free flow from the inlet to the
high pressure core and prevents flow from the high
pressure core to the inlet.
The anti-void check valve allows free flow from the
low pressure core and prevents flow from the high
pressure core to the low pressure core.
The spool section of the hoist valve consists of the
following components:
Pilot ports
Main spools
Work ports
Check poppets
The pilot ports are located in the spool section cover.
These ports provide connections for a pilot line to the
hoist pilot valve. Each work port has a corresponding
pilot port.
The work ports provide for a line connection between
the spool section and the hoist cylinders. One main
spool for each work port is spring biased at both ends
to block the work port from the high and low pressure
cores when there is no flow through the spool cross
holes. When there is flow through the pilot ports to
the spools, a positive differential pressure at the top
of the spool will overcome the bottom spring bias and
the spool will shift to connect the work port to the
high pressure core. When there is flow from the main
valve work port to the pilot port through the crossholes, a positive differential pressure at the bottom of
the spool will overcome the top spring bias and the
spool will shift to connect the work port to the low
pressure core. The check poppets located in the
spool section permit free flow from the work port to
the pilot port and restrict flow from the pilot port to the
work port. These check poppets control spool
response and spool movements during void conditions.
L07014
Hoist Circuit
L7-3
Float Operation
L7-4
Hoist Circuit
L07014
L07014
6. Hoist Cylinders
7. Rod End Spool
8. Head End Spool
9. Head End Work Port
10. Return Port
11. Supply Port
12. Pilot Supply Port
Hoist Circuit
L7-5
L7-6
Hoist Circuit
L07014
L07014
6. Hoist Cylinders
7. Rod End Spool
8. Head End Spool
9. Head End Work Port
10. Return Port
11. Supply Port
12. Pilot Supply Port
Hoist Circuit
L7-7
L7-8
Hoist Circuit
L07014
L07014
6. Hoist Cylinders
7. Rod End Spool
8. Head End Spool
9. Head End Work Port
10. Return Port
11. Supply Port
12. Pilot Supply Port
Hoist Circuit
L7-9
L7-10
Hoist Circuit
L07014
L07014
6. Hoist Cylinders
7. Rod End Spool
8. Head End Spool
9. Head End Work Port
10. Return Port
11. Supply Port
12. Pilot Supply Port
Hoist Circuit
L7-11
L7-12
Hoist Circuit
L07014
L07014
6. Hoist Cylinders
7. Rod End Spool
8. Head End Spool
9. Head End Work Port
10. Return Port
11. Supply Port
12. Pilot Supply Port
Hoist Circuit
L7-13
NOTES :
L7-14
Hoist Circuit
L07014
Removal
L08012 7/95
5. Capscrew
6. Hoist Valve
7. Hoist Inlet (From
Unloader)
8. Bleeddown Manifold
9. Unloader Valve
10. High Pressure Filter
(Steering & Brakes)
11. Hydraulic Tank
12. Hoist Cylinder
L8-1
Disassembly
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the individual
valve sections to accomplish repair, unless
emergency field repair is required to replace the Orings between sections to prevent leakage.
Loosening and retorqueing of the main valve tie rod
nut could cause distortion resulting in binding or
severely sticking plungers, poppet and spools.
The following procedure is for replacing the O-rings
between the valve sections.
1. Remove the four tie rod nuts and washers (7, Figure 8-2) from one end of the valve. Slide the tie
rods from the valve and separate the sections.
2. Inspect the machined sealing surfaces for
scratches or nicks. If scratches or nicks are
found, remove by lapping on a smooth flat steel
surface with fine lapping compound.
3. Lubricate the new O-rings lightly with multipurpose grease. Replace O-rings between sections.
Stack the sections together making sure O-rings
between the sections are properly positioned.
4. Install the four tie rods with the dished washer
between the nut and housing as shown in Figure 8-3.
5. Tube
6. Tie Rods
7. Nuts and Washers
8. Inlet Section Cover
FIGURE 8-4. TORQUE SEQUENCE
L8-2
L08012 7/95
INLET SECTION
Disassembly
1. Match mark or identify each part when removed
in respect to its location or respect to its mating
bore to aid reassembly.
2. Disconnect the external tube at the cover end
and remove. Remove capscrews (14, Figure 85), and cover (13). Remove springs (12), poppets (11) and O-rings (10).
NOTE: Inlet section shown removed from main valve
body for clarity.
3. Remove capscrews (1) and cover (2). Remove
springs (3 & 5) and main relief valve (4).
Remove sleeve (6), low pressure relief (7) and
O-rings (8). The main relief valve (4) is factory
preset at 2500 psi (17,238 kPa). Replace only
as a complete assembly. If adjustment is necessary, refer to "Checking Hoist System Pressure
Relief Valve" later in this section.
4. O-Ring
5. Backup Ring
6. Sleeve
L08012 7/95
5. Spring
6. Sleeve
7. Low Pressure Relief
8. O-Rings
13. Cover
14. Capscrews
L8-3
SPOOL SECTION
Disassembly
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the inlet or
outlet sections to accomplish spool section
disassembly.
Reassembly
1. Coat all parts including housing bores with
clean type C-4 hydraulic oil. Lubricate O-rings
lightly with a multipurpose grease.
4. Install O-rings (10), and cover (13). Install capscrews (14). Tighten capscrews to 60 ft. lbs.
(81 N.m) torque.
L8-4
3. O-Ring
1. Restrictor Poppet
2. O-Ring
3. Backup Ring
4. O-Ring
5. O-Ring
L08012 7/95
L08012 7/95
L8-5
3. Spool Section
POPPET
COLOR
ORIFICE
DIAMETER
DRILL
SIZE
Red
9/64
Green
#35
Black
#42
White
#52
Blue
#56
Gray
#65
L8-6
L08012 7/95
Disassembly
Removal
1. Place the hoist control lever in the body down
position. Make sure the body is in the full down
position. Release the hoist control lever to return
the hoist valve spool to the neutral position.
L08012 7/95
6. Flatwasher
7. Lockwasher
8. Nut
9. Floor Plate
10. Pilot Valve Body
1. Snap Ring
2. Ball (4)
3. Detent Pin
4. Spring
5. Spacer
6. Capscrew
7. Housing
8. Nut
9. Tie Rod
10. Nut
11. O-Ring
12. O-Ring
13. Wiper
14. Spool
15. Housing
16. O-Ring
17. Wiper
18. Seal Retainer
19. Spring Seat
20. Spring
21. Ball (1)
22. Detent Sleeve
23. Spacer
24. Cap
25. Seal Plate
L8-7
L8-8
4. O-Ring
5. Housing
1. Nut
2. Tie Rod
3. Nut
4. Tie Rod
5. Housing
L08012 7/95
HOIST CYLINDERS
Removal
1. Be certain engine and key switch has been Off
for at least 90 seconds to allow accumulators to
bleed down.
L08012 7/95
4. Snap Ring
5. Bearing
6. Hoist Cylinder
4. Snap Ring
5. Bearing
6. Spacer
L8-9
4. At the pivot point under the body, remove capscrews and lockwashers (2, Figure 8-15).
Remove retainer plate (1). Using a brass drift,
drive pin (3) from bore of mounting bracket.
5. Carefully lower cylinder until it lays against the
inside dual tire. Attach a lifting device to the
upper cylinder mounting eye.
6. At the pivot point on the frame, remove capscrews and lockwasher (1, Figure 8-16) securing retainer (2). Remove locking plate (3).
7. Install retaining strap or chains to prevent
extension of hoist cylinder while handling.
8. Pull cylinder from the pivot point on the frame
and remove from machine
.
NOTE: Do not lose spacer (6) between cylinder
bearing and frame.
9. Clean the exterior of the cylinder thoroughly
and move to a clean work area for disassembly.
Installation
Disassembly
1. If removal of the hoist cylinder eye bearings is
necessary, remove retainer ring (4, Figure 8-15)
and press out bearing (5).
2. Mount the hoist cylinder in a fixture which will
allow it to be rotated 180.
3. Position cylinder with the cover (10, Figure 817) mounting eye on top. Remove capscrews
(11) and lockwashers retaining cover to housing
(4).
4. Using two 0.88 in. dia. x 9 in. long, threaded
capscrews, thread them into the two threaded
holes in the cover. Screw the capscrews in
evenly until the cover can be removed. Lift
cover (10) straight up until quill assembly (22) is
clear. Remove O-ring (12) and backup ring (23).
5. Remove capscrews (7) and flatwashers (5)
attaching the rod bearing retainer (6) to the rod
(1). Remove the seal (8).
L8-10
L08012 7/95
L08012 7/95
6. Piston Bearing
Retainer
7. Capscrew
8. Seal
9. Snap Ring
10. Cover
11. Capscrews
12. O-Ring
13. Bearing
14. Bearing
15. Seal
16. Seal
17. Bearing
18. Buffer Seal
19. Bearing
20. Rod Seal
21. Rod Wiper
22. Quill Assembly
L8-11
2. Quill Assembly
L8-12
L08012 7/95
L08012 7/95
3. Plug
4. Check Ball
L8-13
L8-14
L08012 7/95
Assembly of Cylinder
1. Install seals (15, Figure 8-17) and bearing (14)
on second stage cylinder. Install bearings (19)
and buffer seal (18), rod seal (20) and rod wiper
(21) on first stage cylinder. Lubricate with clean
hydraulic oil (Type C-4).
2. Align and slide the second stage cylinder (2)
inside the first stage cylinder (3). Allow the second
stage to protrude far enough to install the snap
ring (9) on the inside of the first stage cylinder.
3. Mount the housing (4) in the fixture with the
cover end positioned at the top. Install bearings
(19) and buffer seal (18), rod seal (20) and rod
wiper (21) in the housing.
4. Install lifting tool used during disassembly in the
second and first stage cylinder assembly.
5. Install bearings (13) on the first stage cylinder
(3). Lift and align this assembly over the housing (4). Lower the second and first stage cylinders into the housing.
6. Install retainer used during disassembly to hold
the second and first stage cylinder in place
when the housing is rotated. Rotate housing
180 to position the lower mounting eye at the
top.
L08012 7/95
3. Piston
L8-15
L8-16
7. Filter Element-7
Micron
8. Housing
9. O-Ring
10. Plug
L08012 7/95
L08012 7/95
6. Sleeve
7. Low Pressure Relief
8. O-Rings
9. Inlet Valve Body
L8-17
NOTES:
L8-18
L08012 7/95
SECTION M
OPTIONS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
INDEX
FIRE CONTROL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2
ANSUL FIRE CONTROL - MANUAL SYSTEM (M02004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M2-1
ANSUL FIRE CONTROL - CHECKFIRE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM (M02002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M2.2-1
ANSUL FIRE CONTROL - CHECKFIRE ELECTRIC SYSTEM (M02003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M2.3-1
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM (M03001). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3-1
M3-1
M3-3
M3-3
M3-5
M4-1
M4-1
M4-1
M4-4
M4-7
M4-8
M01022 7/95
Index
M1-1
M7-1
M7-2
M7-3
M7-4
M7-5
M1-2
M10-1
M10-1
M10-1
M10-2
M10-3
M10-1
M10-1
M10-2
M10-2
M10-3
M10-3
M10-4
M10-1
M10-1
M10-1
M10-1
M14-1
M14-1
M14-2
M14-2
M14-4
M14-5
M14-6
Index
M01022 7/95
M01022 7/95
Index
M1-3
NOTES:
M1-4
Index
M01022 7/95
DETECTION TUBING
The detection tubing passes through each area identified as a hazard and is terminated at the pressure
make-up device at one end and the detection and
actuation device at the other. It is pressurized with
nitrogen at 70-90 psi (483-621 kPa). If the tube temperature should reach about 355 10F (179
5C), it is designed to burst, relieving the pressure
and actuating the detection and actuation device.
M02002
M2.2-1
When sufficient pressure has built up in the low pressure chamber [approximately 80 psi (552 kPa)], the
piston is forced back allowing the valve to close. This
process repeats itself every time the low pressure
side drops below 65 psi (448 kPa).
The pressure switch assembly is connected in series
with the detection tubing. When the SCAD system
pressure falls to about 45 psi (310 kPa), the pressure
switch closes and the warning light flashes and
instrument panel horn sounds. This indicates that the
SCAD pressure is below required levels and should
be serviced or a fire has caused the pressure to drop.
NOTE: The system pressure must drop to 21 psi
(145 kPa) before the DAD will actuate.
M2.2-2
M02002
DAILY INSPECTION
1. Check the system for general appearance,
mechanical damage and corrosion.
2. The system should be checked daily for significant pressure leaks.
M02002
M2.2-3
M2.2-4
M02002
M02002
M2.2-5
Warning Light
DAD Gauge
PMD Gauge
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
On
Red
Red
Off
Red
Red
On
Red
Green
Off
Red
Green
On
Green
Red
Off
Green
Red
On
Green
Green
Off
Green
Green
System Operational
1 or 2
None
CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. Check system and recharge SCAD and extinguishing systems if fired.
2. Replace the PMD cartridge.
3. Remove the DAD cartridge and actuate SCAD
system by operating the pressure relief valve
located on DAD component. If DAD does not
reset (light-off- condition), relieve all remaining
pressure through the relief valve. Remove the
top cap of PMD component and replace valve
core. Recharge the SCAD system.
4. Replace the DAD gauge.
M2.2-6
M02002
M02003
M2.3-1
M2.3-2
M02003
M02003
M2.3-3
M2.3-4
M02003
FIGURE 2.3-15.
FIGURE 2.3-16.
M02003
M2.3-5
Daily
The machine operator should manually test system
power by pushing the button and noting illumination
of indicator light. This confirms battery power is available. If light is not illuminated, refer to "Troubleshooting" covered in this section.
Normal Maintenance Based On Actual Operating
Hours
Total system should be checked monthly or sooner,
depending on working conditions or truck maintenance to perform total system check.
NOTE: The squib should be replaced after being in
service for five years. The proper disposal of the old
squib should be done by actuating the squib within
the actuator body. To do this, remove actuator LT-5-R
cartridge (PB0674) from body. Install test jumper
assembly to end of linear detection wire assembly.
This jumper will service as a wiring short and cause
the squib to discharge.
Remove jumper, clean actuator, install new squib
and reinstall cartridge.
M2.3-6
M02003
10. Remove the test kit from the system by disconnecting the squib connector from the test module (Figure 2.3-21).
IN CASE OF FIRE
Procedure to follow during and after a fire. In the
event of a fire, the following steps should be taken:
1. Turn the machine OFF.
2. Manually activate fire suppression system, if
possible.
3. Move away from the machine taking a hand portable extinguisher along if you can.
4. Stand-by with a portable fire extinguisher to put
out any possible re- ignition of the fire after the
fire suppression system is expended.
Explanation of the above steps.
1. If you leave the machine running, it may add
fuel to the fire or restart the fire with sparks.
2. May help put fire down more quickly.
3. By leaving the immediate fire area, you protect
yourself from windblown flames, explosions or
other dangers created by the fire.
M02003
M2.3-7
What to Expect
When a fire suppression system discharges, there is
some noise, accompanied by clouds of dry chemical.
While breathing foreign particles is not pleasant, the
agent is non-toxic.
What to Do After the Fire is Out
The machinery should not be restarted until it has
been serviced and cleaned (water spray or steam
may be used to remove the dry chemical). If the Electric Detection and Actuation System cannot be
recharged immediately, at least recharge the remainder of the fire suppression system so that manually
actuated protection is available.
Recharging the Electric Detection and Actuation
System
The recharge of the Electric Detection and Actuation
System is similar to the original procedure for installing and placing the automatic detection system into
service. Follow these procedures as outlined previously in this manual, omitting the section which deals
with mounting the bracket and power wire.
Replace the entire length(s) of detection wire
involved in the fire area.
Before the system is put back into service, it is important that the inside chamber of the actuator be
cleaned thoroughly. Failure to do so may cause
excessive carbon build-up on the internal O-ring and
piston chamber. This build- up will also stop the
puncture pin from returning to its up-most position.
To clean actuator (See Figure 2.3-22):
1. Remove squib.
2. Remove actuator from bracket and loosen upper
portion of body.
3. Apply pressure to the bottom of the puncture
pin. This will force out the puncture pin and
spring.
M2.3-8
M02003
Dead battery
Wire broken
Dead battery
M02003
M2.3-9
NOTES
M2.3-10
M02003
Actuators
Check Valves
Operation
To actuate the fire control system, pull the safety ring
on either of the actuators and depress the lever. One
actuator is located in the cab near the operator.
Another actuator is located on the left fender structure near the bumper.
NOTE: Operating either actuator will activate fire
control system.
When either actuator is depressed, a nitrogen cartridge will pressurize the dry chemical tank. Once the
dry chemical tank has pressurized to a sufficient
pressure, a bursting disc in the tank outlet will break,
allowing the fluidized chemical to flow to the nozzles.
The nozzles will direct the agent at the fire and extinguish the flames.
M02004
5. Actuator Receiver
6. Cartridge
7. Bursting Disc Union
8. Dry Chemical Tank
M2-1
8. Remove the cartridge guard from the dry chemical tank and remove the cartridge.
9. Insure that the cartridge puncture pin is fully
retracted.
10. Weigh the new cartridge. The weight must be
within 0.25 ounce (7.0 grams) of the weight
stamped on the cartridge.
11. Screw the new cartridge onto the actuator
assembly, hand tight.
12. Replace the cartridge guard and install the dry
chemical tank into its bracket.
13. Connect line at the bursting union, and line at
the tank actuator.
14. Remove the cartridge guard from the remote
actuators and replace the cartridges.
15. Replace the cartridge guards, and install ring
pins on the push buttons.
16. Inspect hose, fittings and nozzles for mechanical
damage. Replace all hose that has been
exposed to fire areas.
Recharging Procedures
After actuating the fire control system, the system
should be recharged. Follow the procedure below for
each dry chemical tank and actuator installed:
M2-2
M02004
Components
Operation
The automatic lubrication system (Figure 3-1) is controlled by an electric timer and an electrically operated
solenoid valve. During truck operation, the timer periodically operates a switch which energizes the solenoid air valve. As the solenoid air valve opens,
regulated air enters the pump air motor, and the pump
begins to operate, delivering lubricant through the
supply lines to each injector. At the same time, as regulated air is applied to the air motor, regulated air is
applied to the vent valve which keeps the vent valve
closed until the 3-way solenoid air valve is denergized.
After the injectors have cycled, lubricant pressure
rises quickly to 2500 psi (17.5 MPa), and the pump
stalls against this pressure. The pump will remain
stalled for a few seconds until the timer switch contact is broken and the solenoid air valve is de-energized, shutting off the air supply. Trapped air
exhausts, the vent valve opens, and lubricant pressure in the supply line is vented back to the reservoir.
The injectors reload and the system is reset and
ready for the next lube cycle.
Figure 3-1 shows input air supply to the pump going
through the solenoid air valve, then through an air
regulator to the air powered pump. A branch line of
regulated air is routed directly to the vent valve.
1. Air Pressure
2. Air Regulator and Gauge
3. 24 VDC Solid State Timer
4. 3-way Solenoid Air Valve
5. Lube Injectors
6. Grease Reservoir
7. Air Pump Motor
Description of Components
1. Air Powered Reciprocating Pump
a. 50:1 Pressure Ratio.
b. Reservoir Grease Capacity of 60 lbs. (27.2 kg).
2. Air Regulator and Gauge
a. Normal Operation - regulator output should
be set at 60-65 psi (414-448 kPa).
b. Extreme Winter Conditions - regulator output
may be reset to 90 psi (621 kPa).
3. 24 VDC Solid State Timer:
Operating Temperature Range -20F to 131F
(-29C to 55C). The timer is mounted in the cab
to help insure temperature stability.
M03001 12/98
5. Vent Valve
6. Unloader
7. Pump
8. To Lube Point
M3-1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
System Priming
M3-2
4. Suspension, Top LH
5. Body Pivot LH
6. Body Pivot RH
7. Suspension, Top RH
M03001 12/98
4. Voltage checks at the timer should be accomplished if the above checks do not identify the
problem.
a. Insure timer ground connection is clean and
tight.
b. Using a Volt-Ohm meter, read the voltage
between positive and negative posts on the
solid state timer with the truck keyswitch
"ON".
Normal reading should be 18-26 VDC,
depending upon whether or not the engine is
running.
24 VDC Solid State Timer Adjustment
The timer is factory set for a nominal 2.5 minute (off
time) interval. Dwell time is approximately 1 minute,
15 seconds. A longer interval (off time) is obtained by
turning the Selector knob (3, Figure 3-3) to the
desired position..
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
To check system operation (not including timer), proceed as follows:
1. Lift the passenger seat and connect a jumper
wire between SOL terminal and LUBE SW
terminal on the 24 VDC solid state lube timer.
Turn keyswitch "ON". Pump should operate.
NOTE: If terminal post identification on the solid state
timer is not legible, refer to Figure 3-5 for terminal
positions.
2. Keep jumper wire connected until the pump
stalls.
3. Disconnect jumper wire. System should vent.
Turn keyswitch OFF".
M03001 12/98
3. Timer Selector
M3-3
Injector Specifications
a. Each lube injector services only one grease
point. In case of pump malfunction, each
injector is equipped with a covered grease
fitting to allow the use of external lubricating
equipment.
b. Injectors are available in banks of two, three,
four and five as well as single replacement
units.
c. Injector output is adjustable:
Maximum output = 0.08 in (1.31 cc)
Minimum output = 0.008 in (0.13 cc)
d. Operating Pressure:
Minimum - 1850 psi (12 755 kPa)
Maximum - 3500 psi (24 133 kPa)
Recommended - 2500 psi (17 238 kPa)
Maximum Vent Pressure - (Recharge)
600 psi (4 137 kPa)
Injector Adjustment
1. Adjusting Screw
2. Locknut
3. Piston Stop Plug
4. Gasket
5. Washer
6. Viton O-Ring
7. Injector Body
Assembly
8. Piston Assembly
9. Fitting Assembly
M3-4
M03001 12/98
INJECTOR OPERATION
STAGE 1.
The injector piston (2) is in its normal or rest
position. The discharge chamber (3) is filled
with lubricant from the previous cycle. Under the
pressure of incoming lubricant (6), the slide
valve (5) is about to open the passage (4) leading to the measuring chamber (1) above the
injector piston (2).
STAGE 2.
When the slide valve (5) uncovers the passage
(4), lubricant (6) is admitted to the measuring
chamber (1) above the injector piston (2) which
forces lubricant from the discharge chamber (3)
through the outlet port (7) to the bearing.
STAGE 3.
As the injector piston (2) completes its stroke, it
pushes the slide valve (5) past the passage (4),
cutting off further admission of lubricant (6) to
the passage (4) and measuring chamber (1).
The injector piston (2) and slide valve (5) remain
in this position until lubricant pressure in the
supply line (6) is vented (relieved at the pump).
STAGE 4.
After venting, the injector spring expands, causing the slide valve (5) to move, so that the passage (4) and discharge chamber (3) are
connected by a valve port (8). Further expansion of the spring causes the piston to move
upward, forcing the lubricant in the measuring
chamber (1) through the passage (4) and valve
port (8) to refill the discharge chamber (3).
M03001 12/98
M3-5
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Adjust air pressure to 60 - 65 psi (414 - 448 kPa), if necessary [90 psi (621 kPa) during cold weather].
Timer malfunction.
Pump malfunction.
NOTE: On initial startup of the lube system, the timing capacitor will not contain a charge; therefore, the first timing
cycle will be about double in length compared to the normal interval. Subsequent timer cycles should be as specified.
NOTE: System air applied to the lube system air pump is also applied to the vent valve. When the pump is operating, air pressure keeps the vent valve closed and grease is directed from the pump outlet and to the injectors.
When air supply to the air motor is interrupted, the vent valve opens and supply pressure vents back to the reservoir.
Safety unloader valve faulty.
NOTE: The safety unloader valve prevents buildup of excessively high pressure in the lube system which could
damage components. This valve is factory preset to open between 3750 - 4250 psi (25.9 - 29.3 MPa). The valve
is not serviceable, nor is it adjustable.
Outlet check valve clogged.
M3-6
M03001 12/98
POSSIBLE CAUSES
All injectors inoperative - pump buildup not sufficient to Service and/or replace pump assembly.
cycle injectors.
M03001 12/98
5. Fuse Holder
6. Keyswitch
7. To Battery (+)
8. To Ground (-)
9. Solenoid
10. Relay
11. Timer (Solid State)
M3-7
NOTES:
M3-8
M03001 12/98
!
"
$ !
#
$
$
$ "
%
# %
&
#
!
(
#
%
"
&
#
#
& #
, &
(*
<%
&
-# "
()
$ !
'
(+
%84
#%
. &
#""
"# "
& &
%
/
#
$
%*
"
&
!
$
# #
# =
%
"#
#"
&
#
!
"# " !
& & %0
#
"
%>
! %
* # -"
= ! #
6 4 " 37 6
# %
;
! #
&
7%* #
0
"# "%
"
;
#
- 5
"# "
2- 3 4 " 5% 1 #
" 376 %84 - 5%
!
& %
& &%
"
"
#
!
"" 1
64
%,
"# "
"
" &
%
%*
&
"# "
%
%9
!
%*
" 3
#""
& &%
- 5
#
#
&
"
%:
;
;
#
%
#
$ / #
!%
4%
!
!
"
&
# %
"# "$
4%*
&
& !
"
$ %
%*
& # 3 <=
3 45
"# "$
%*
#
# %
8% "
3 5%
"# %
8%9
#
#
5
3 5%
/!
3 5
35
&
3< ? 75
& 3 5%
3 5%
!
"
35
92@*+
%
%
8%
#
&
$
!
#$ + $ !
%>:0 +* 9* 9: +*9A2 B
%*
. &
4%)
#
<%> ! ,
+
7%+& #
%+
> !
$
92@*+
% )B,* @:9 -@ 7%, & 2
%
%
%
&
%- #
%*
&
%
8%
*
%*
4%A
<%, & 2
%
8%
"*
% #
4%: /!
<%A#
! "#
%9 "
"
$%9 "
%
!
%9
%
%9
%9 "
/
%9
$#
#
"
"# "
$ %0
& $
"# " " %
!
!
%
%
385
"
%
35
& =$
8%-
%
=
4%9
9
& !
%9
"
3 5=
3 5%
"
&
!
"
"
3<? 75%
3 5=$
385
%
3 5%
92@*+
%
%> !
8% 1
<%9
($%) * +
%)
4%
& =
D# %
#
#
"
"
"
#
4%
D#
#
#
"
3 85%
%- / "
"# "%
!
$
#
"
=, &#'
'(- * +
/ =
"# "
# %
%
8%- #
D# %
#
& %
%
%
+ >:B
<%: /
7%>
$
%9
0 0*
#"
7%- /
%9
"# "%
=0
"
"
"%
D# %
=
"
"
#C
/!
4 " 3 8 /- 5 #
# %>
#
"
#
"
"
D# %
92@*+
%2
%E
8%
%
4% #
<%9 2
7%>#
%0 *
"*
%,
" &
%
!
&
4%*
"
"
38=
!
"
85
%
345
%@
%
#"
$ !
&
#
#"
"
$
8%!
;! %
%:
%
&
%@
$ !
&
"
! 3 85
&
"
%
& %@
= "
3 45%: "
/
&
!
$
<%*
& 0
3 <5="
#
3 5=
$ / #"
3 5%
7%*
& "
# "
3 5
;#
$
&
$ #
8% "
!
%
4% & <%0 *
7%# -
&
"
#"
$
"
%9
=
"
3 75%*
& 0
"
# " %
35
%
% "
%
%
&
;#
%:
#
$#
/
1
0 0*
%2
%0 *
%0 *
%> /#"*
%:
8%*
!
%)B,* @:9
3<5
3 5!
"
"
#"
%, !
3= #
45
"
" %
#
!
#
"
$
"
&
%
#"
"
&
! /$
"
3 5%
&
!
&
=#
"#
#%-
&
!
""
" <
"#
5%)
&
&
/
""
"
"
# $
"
!
"
%
D#
%+1
%9
3 %8
&
5
"
$
%9 1
& !
#
$
# "
%
#
$ C
%9
& $ = "
%
# $
$ / #"
!%
9%,%G
$
=
"
"
&
% 0
# $
/
%
"
7%9
3 5%
%9
3 5%
"
%
#
%
45
&
"
345%
&="
%9
38=
<5
"
"
0
!
"
$
#
&
#
& "
#
$ / #"
!
#"=
"
"
"
!
% "
"
& " %
&
/
%9
"
#
& % "
# %
""
=
34=
"3
<5
!
=
/
#=
& !
!
!
$
"
#
=
/ #
%9 "
#
! %9
<%
&
=
# $
! 1
" #&
"
!
"
38= #
35 # $ "
"
& " %, !
=$#
$
"
%
&
"
"
%9 / !
&
%
"
%9 $
&
= ;
= "
8%+1
4%>
;#
=
=
= !
"
"
""
!
!
%
% 4F
& $
!"
"%
3= #
$
"
0
0
"
%+1
H
%
4
!
0%,%
!
#
4%9
"
"
"
0%,%
8%9
#
$
"
#
&
"
! =
<
!"
"
"
"
%)
$
0%,%
0%,%;
#
%
%
$
"
% ""
& #
$
3 &
$ 5
;
#
0#
"
"
%
/ !
%9
&
38=
%-
""
&
$ !
" !
! "#
%-
%9
!
%
. #
$%
"#
# #
#"
$ %,
#
" " %9 ! #
&
&
!
!
/ #
%
=#
#%
!
# !
#
%
&
&
#%,
$
#%
="
$ %
&
"#
$
#
"#
!
"
"" "
8%
$
#
" #%
%* "
%
$
38=
$
%@
45
"
5
$
"
!
# "
!
#
=
#"
0
# "
"
#
$ C
$
%
# "
""
"
$
# "
C
%
%
! =
%
8%
0
/ " "
"
# !
!
!
"
!
/
#
& %0
"
&
"
%
"
#
! %
4%@
!
4% 0.+* -:
% %0 *
% %0 *
8%8%> /#"*
%9
"
%
%, !
4% & <%, & 2
$ / #"
=0
%@
=
&
& %
"
#
"
8%
/ !
"
! =
D# %
=
"
&
$ %
! /
1 #"
%
!
)%&#' '(11 * + D# %
%9
>
!
%
%
$ !
#"
+ + :
! 3 8= #
5
!
%9
!
3 5
"
12&#'
($21 * + D# %
! &
!
=
/
# %9 ! $
$#
# #
$%
()'134+ 1 #
!
#
92@*+
!
=
! #
" %># "
"
! =
0
"
=
& "
/ ! %
"
D# %
"
.
%*
& $ !
%:
#
!
$ !
8%*
&
#
#
1
%
#"
# =!
& %*
38=
"
#
!
&
85
#
$ !
%:
$ !
%
4%*
&
# $ !
$ !
#
<%
92@*+
<%-*+
9A
::
% "
%# -
@*+ -:
90A
8%2
%, !
# $
/ %
$ !
1 #
! "
%:
"
#
85
%-#
8%*
"
# $
#
"
$
& $
$
!
!
%
/
#
#
3<=
#
%*
& $
4%
*
"
"
$#
&
#
$
"
"
$
#
%
"
&
<%*
#
!
&
%
$%*
"#
!$
"
7%&
$ !
%#
%
/
&
1
%
!
#
$
! =
"
%9
$
#
#
=$
# #
8%9
$
9
!
=
!
4%
$
/!
""
$
"
%*
%9
/!
$ !
#
#" %
$
$ !
!
# %
"
)%
!
!
<%9
#
8%*
!
&
1
"
! =
# %
#
# # %
! %
#
D# %
%
%9
%9
#
#
"%
"%
"
"!
! = # =
&
&
# /%
0
$
!
,
" /
!
& %
%
!
%:
8%9
=
&
$ !
%
#
&
#
,
8
!
%9
# %
#
% 1
/
%
)% ' '(5',% * + D# %
$ !
D# %
7%*
=
#
#$
% #$
,
& #
!
"
"
! %* "
" 8%
1 #"
!
)% ' '(5',% * + D# %
$ !
&
% #""
#
%
#
&
%
6 4
%-
"
%*
5 1
$
/
'(5',% * + D# %
'
#
!
$
5
%3
#"
#$
$ $ !
!
&
! $
#
=
%3
#
%
&
$#
$
$
'
$
#
&
"
$ !
9 1
&
%*
#
%
%9
# =
# $
"
#$
# %
! = /!
D# %
"%
3. Fuel Receiver
4. Fuel Level Gauge
NOTE: This illustration represents a typical installation. Fuel tanks may vary in size,
shape, and location depending on truck model.
M05002 10/96
M5-1
Disassembly
1. Remove spring clamp (4, Figure 5-2) from outlet.
2. Pull off rubber cover and screen (3).
3. Unscrew nut (5) from top of breather valve.
Remove cover (6), spring (7), and steel ball (8).
4. Slide valve assembly (9) from housing.
5. Disengage tapered spring (1) containing three
balls (2) from valve stem.
Assembly
1. Clean and inspect all parts. If valve, body, or
springs are damaged, replace complete
breather valve.
2. Install in order; tapered spring, one steel ball,
one cork ball and one hollow aluminum ball.
3. Engage three coils of spring on small end of
valve stem with hollow aluminum ball.
4. Install valve into housing.
5. Place steel ball (8) on top of valve. Install spring
(7).
6. Place cover (6) over spring. Screw on large nut
(5).
7. Install screen and rubber cover (3) over outlet.
8. Install spring clamp (4).
M5-2
6. Cover
7. Spring
8. Steel Ball
9. Valve Assembly
10/96 M05002
3. Frame Rails
4. Fuel Tank
5. Filler Cap
6. Receiver Assembly
7. Refueling Box
8. Capscrew
9. Tapped Bar
NOTE: This illustration represents a typical installation. Installation may vary depending on truck model.
M05002 10/96
M5-3
NOTES
M5-4
10/96 M05002
COMPONENTS
Input
(Refer to Figure 6-2): The input for the clutch is
through the pulley (1) and bearing retainers (2,3)
which are bolted together forming the pulley cavity.
The pulley cavity is sealed at the shaft (5) and fan
mounting hub (4) by rotating seals and is supported
by heavy duty ball bearings (6). The slotted cup section of the front bearing retainer drives the externally
tanged steel clutch plates (7) and the clutch piston
(8).
M06001
1. Pulley
2. Front Bearing
Retainer
3. Rear Bearing
Retainer
M6-1
Output
(Refer to Figure 6-3): The output for the clutch is
through the clutch facing plates (1) which are splined
to and drive the clutch hub (2). The inside diameter of
the hub is splined to and drives the fan mounting hub
(3). The fan is bolted to the fan mounting hub. A fan
spacer (4) is used on the fan mounting hub to position the fan relative to the radiator.
Stationary Components
2. Pilot Tubes
OPERATION MODES
(Refer to Figure 6-5): With no control pressure in the
pressure cavity, the fan clutch is always disengaged.
The thermal sensor (2) senses engine coolant temperature through its thermal tip. The sensor is calibrated to respond within a specific coolant
temperature range by sending an electrical signal to
drive the solenoid (1). The operating range of the
thermal sensor can be determined by the tag
attached to the body. Some applications require mul-
M6-2
M06001
2. Thermal Sensor # 1
Remember:
M06001
1. When the upper limit of the designed temperature limit of the thermal sensor is reached, full
oil pressure is passed through the solenoid
valve, and the clutch fully locks up for a 1:1 pulley-to-fan drive.
2. Modulated oil pressure from the solenoid valve
produces and controls the variable slip ratios of
pulley rpm -to- fan rpm.
3. When the lower limit of the designed temperature of the thermal sensor is reached, minimum
oil control pressure exists in the pressure cavity
allowing the clutch to fully release.
4. If the truck is equipped with two thermal sensors, either sensor can control the solenoid
valve.
Lubricating & Cooling Oil
(Refer to Figure 6-6): Lubricating and cooling oil is
supplied to the fan clutch from the engine oil pressure supply system. The fan clutch oil supply originates at an engine oil pressure port which supplies
cooled, filtered oil. The exact location varies on different engine makes and models. A flow-limiting orifice
fitting is factory-installed in the fan clutch "oil in" port
of the shaft and bracket assembly to regulate the
amount of oil supplied to the clutch. Engine oil travels
through the oil supply line from the engine to the "oil
in" port on the fan clutch bracket.
M6-3
The pilot tubes pump oil from the pulley, maintaining low internal pressure in the fan clutch. Do
not run the engine without belts driving the fan
clutch pulley.
MAINTENANCE
The fan drive system requires a minimum of maintenance. A few simple checks made periodically will
assure correct operation and long life.
M6-4
M06001
M06001
M6-5
TROUBLE SHOOTING
M6-6
MAX. ROTATIONAL
MOVEMENT
INCHES
METERS
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
68
1.7
1.12
28.4
M06001
Refer to instructions which follow for testing the thermal sensor and solenoid valve.
M06001
M6-7
Overheating Complaint
Any time an overheating complaint is being investigated, the fan clutch can be operated temporarily in
the lockup mode. In the lockup mode, the fan clutch
functions as would a standard (no clutch) fan hub.
To put the fan clutch in lockup:
On Truck Test
M6-8
3. Voltmeter
M06001
SENSOR VOLTAGE
SOLENOID PRESSURE
+24 VDC
Temperature Within Thermal Sensor Operating Range +24 VDC - 0.0 VDC(2)
Temperature Above Thermal Sensor Operating Range
0.0 VDC
NOTE 1: Actual 0.0 psi will not be attained if tested under normal operating conditions (connected to a fan clutch).
0.0 - 8.0 psi (0.0 - 55 kPa) internal clutch pressure will read on the gauge.
NOTE 2: As water temperature increases or decreases within the temperature range of the thermal sensor,
voltage output from the thermal sensor and pressure output from solenoid valve should also increase or decrease
(although not in direct proportion). An increase in water temperature produces an increase in voltage output and a
decrease in pressure.
M06001
M6-9
NOTES
M6-10
M06001
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
PROBABLE CAUSES
TROUBLE: Engine runs hot, Fan does not lock up, Fan idles continuously.
Coolant level low.
Replace thermostat.
If bolts extend through hub and contact front of bearing retainer, fan will run continuously. Replace bolts
with grade 8 bolts that fit full thread in fan mounting
hub, but do not extend through. (Check to insure bearings in clutch are not damaged.)
M06001
M6-11
PROBABLE CAUSES
Relieve Restriction.
Replace thermostat.
Check components of the system to insure false signal is not being sent to solenoid causing full lockup.
TROUBLE: Fan drive cycles off and on continuously at abnormally high rate.
Coolant level low.
Clean radiator.
Replace either thermostat or thermal sensor with correct temperature setting to obtain proper sequential
operation. (Refer to Parts Catalog).
Internal wear.
M6-12
M06001
PROBABLE CAUSES
Failed bearing(s)
Remove restriction.
Rebuild or repair.
M06001
M6-13
M6-14
M06001
DESCRIPTION
End Cap
Front Bearing
Facing Plates
Clutch Hub
Sleeve Bearing
Sleeve Bearing
O-Ring Seal
REF.
10
11
12
13
OUTPUT COMPONENTS
O-Ring Seal
Rear Bearing Retainer
Rear Oil Seal
Internal Snap Ring
Seal Ring (small)
24
25
26
Bolt
21
23
Lockwasher
20
22
17
Pulley
Piston
16
19
15
18
Bolt
Lockwasher
14
DESCRIPTION
REF.
INPUT COMPONENTS
37
38
35
36
Pilot Tube
Rear Wear Sleeve (With Notch)
34
32
33
31
30
28
29
Spring Washer
Internal Snap Ring
27
DESCRIPTION
REF.
STATIONARY COMPONENTS
2. Separate the front bearing retainer from the pulley, lift it off, and set it aside on the bench. (A
small screwdriver may be used at the split-line
to break the bearing retainer loose from the pulley).
M06001
M6-15
M6-16
M06001
M06001
M6-17
M6-18
M06001
17. Remove the seal rings (18 and 26) from the piston.
M06001
M6-19
M6-20
M06001
25. Press the rear bearing (37) out of the rear bearing retainer (23).
M06001
M6-21
29. Coat the I.D. of the front wear sleeve (4), and the
wear sleeve diameter of the shaft with Loctite
#290 (or equivalent). NOTE: The front wear
sleeve (4) is NOT interchangeable with rear
(notched) wear sleeve (34). Press the wear
sleeve onto the shaft, flush with the shoulder.
M6-22
31. Turn the fan mounting hub over on the bed of the
press. Again using a proper installation tool,
press the front sleeve bearing (10) into the fan
mounting hub until the front end of the sleeve is
0.25 in.- 0.28 in. (6.3 - 7.1 mm) below the shoulder.
M06001
32. Coat the bore of the fan mounting hub (2) with a
thin coating of Loctite #290 (or equivalent).
FREEZE THE END CAP IN A FREEZER OR
DRY ICE FOR 15 MINUTES TO 1/2 HOUR.
When frozen, press the end cap (1) into the fan
mounting hub, to the bottom of the bore.
Note: When the end cap is properly seated, it's O.D.
will be tight against the fan mounting hub.
M06001
M6-23
37. Turn the retainer over on the press bed. Coat the
O.D. of rear oil seal (24) with Loctite #290 (or
equivalent). Install the oil seal in the rear bearing retainer, flush with the rear face.
M6-24
M06001
M06001
M6-25
44. Turn the retainer over on the press bed. Coat the
O.D. of front oil seal (11) with Loctite #290 (or
equivalent). Install the oil seal in the front bearing retainer, flush with the front face.
46. Install the clutch hub (7) on the fan mounting hub
splines with the open end down.
M6-26
M06001
48. Install the small seal ring (26) in the piston (17).
Lubricate the seal ring groove with an oil-soluble lubricant. Squeeze the "L shaped" seal ring
to form it into a tight "V" shape all the way
around its diameter. Then install the seal ring
into the groove.
49. Install the large seal ring (18) in the piston (17),
as was done with the small seal ring.
Lubricate the seal ring groove with an oil-soluble lubricant. (petroleum jelly or a 50%-50%
mixture of engine oil and STP work well).
Squeeze the "L shaped" seal ring to form it into
a tight "V" shape all the way around its diameter. Then install the seal ring into the groove.
M06001
M6-27
M6-28
M06001
M06001
M6-29
60. Install orifice fitting (35) in the "oil in" port of the
bracket.
M6-30
M06001
REF.
DESCRIPTION
REF.
DESCRIPTION
20
Lockwasher
32
Seal Rings
21
Bolt
33
Pitot Tubes
22
O-Ring Seal
34
23
35
Orifice
24
36
25
37
Rear Bearing
31
38
REF.
DESCRIPTION
REF.
DESCRIPTION
17
Piston
27
Spring Washer
18
29
19
Pulley
30
Shim
26
M06001
M6-31
REF.
DESCRIPTION
REF.
DESCRIPTION
Front Bearing
13
O-Ring Seal
14
Bolt
Clutch Hub
15
Lockwasher
16
11
28
12
REF.
DESCRIPTION
REF.
DESCRIPTION
End Cap
Sleeve Bearing
10
Sleeve Bearing
M6-32
M06001
INSPECTION OF PARTS
PART INSPECTION
WEAR LIMITS
General:
(35): Orifice
Re-use
(19): Pulley
Pilot bore for bearing retainer must be free of nicks
that extend above the pilot surface.
Flat surface(s) that mate with bearing retainer must be
free of nicks that extend above the surface.
Pulley grooves must not be severely worn or damaged.
General:
M06001
M6-33
PART INSPECTION
WEAR LIMITS
(17): Piston
General:
M6-34
M06001
PART INSPECTION
WEAR LIMITS
General:
M06001
M6-35
PART INSPECTION
WEAR LIMITS
General:
(30): Shim
Replace
M6-36
M06001
Running in completed.
Low wear rate starts when
bronze is exposed.
Typical appearance
after half useful life.
Bronze beginning
to smear near end
of useful life.
M06001
M6-37
REBUILD TOOLS
The tools illustrated below are necessary for proper
installation of the Retainer/Seal Assembly, Sleeve Bearings,
and Wear Sleeves. These tools can be fabricated from locally.
FIGURE 6-9. SLEEVE BEARING (9), (10) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TOOL
M6-38
M06001
HEATING ELEMENT
Removal
1. Disconnect the external power source at the
plug-in receptacle.
2. Close the shut-off valves located at the inlet and
outlet ports.
Heaters
Thermostats
Maintenance
To check for operation of the heating units, the outlet
water hoses should feel warm to the touch.
1. Check all electrical connections to insure proper
connections are made.
2. Check for a burned out heating element. (Do not
remove heating unit from the truck.)
a. Remove the two Phillips head screws and
slide end cover out of the way.
b. Connect a voltmeter at the two electrical terminals and check for operating voltage (220
to 230 volts) while coolant temperature is
below 120F (48C). If correct voltage is
present, the heating element is defective and
should be replaced.
4. Heating Element
5. Cover
6. Terminals
M07001 03/95
M7-1
THERMOSTAT
Removal
1. Disconnect the external power source at the
plug in receptacle.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the thermostat
assembly from the heater.
2. Remove the two screws and slide cover out of
the way.
3. Disconnect the two electrical leads.
4. Loosen the two setscrews and remove the temperature sensing unit.
FIGURE 7-2. THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
Installation
1. Install a new temperature sensing unit and
secure in place with two setscrews.
1. Cover
2. Temperature
Sensing Unit
3. Housing
4. Setscrew
M7-2
03/95 M07001
6. Element Cover
7. Housing Cap
8. Electrical Leads
9. Wire Connectors
HEATING ELEMENT
Removal
1. Disconnect the external power source at the
plug-in receptacle.
NOTE: Heater element replacement can be
accomplished without draining the crankcase oil by
disassembling all parts from the element cover.
Figures 7-2 and 7-3 show the complete heater
assembly removed from the pan.
2. Remove cap (7, Figure 7-2), remove connectors
(9) and disconnect wires (8).
3. Remove cord grip cap (2) and remove power
cord from the housing.
4. Remove the heater housing from the element
cover.
FIGURE 7-1. ENGINE OIL HEATER
1. Heater Assembly
2. Power Cord
M07003
M7-1
3. Element Retaining
Setscrew
Installation
1. Install a new heater element and secure in
place with the setscrew (3, Figure 7-3).
The Detroit Diesel front pan requires 300 watt elements. The rear requires one 600 watt element.
Do not interchange.
2. Coat the threads of the element cover with an
anti-seize compound and install the housing (5,
Figure 7-2).
3. Insert the power cord (1), cord grip bushing (4),
washer (3) and cap (2) into the housing.
4. Twist the wires together and place a screw-on
connecter on each pair.
5. Adjust the power cord and tighten the cord grip
cover.
6. Replace the housing cap.
7. IIf engine oil was drained, refill the crankcase
with fresh oil.
M7-2
M07003
apply line voltage to the heater elements when cooling system temperature drops below 120F (48C)
and the thermostats close. Thermostat contact closure energizes the magnetic contactor and supplies
line voltage to the heating elements. When coolant
temperature exceeeds 140F (60C), the thermostat
contacts open and de-energize the magnetic contactor. The thermostats are located at the inlet of each
coolant heater assembly.
Shut-off valves allow coolant heater element or thermostat sensor replacement without loss of engine
coolant. Engine oil heater elements can be replaced
without draining the engine oil.
M07004
8. Thermostat
9. Mounting Bracket
10. Outlet Hose
M7-1
Troubleshooting
To check for proper operation of the heating units,
the coolant outlet water hoses (10, Figure 7-1) and
the oil pan heater mounting bosses (3, Figure 7-4)
should feel warm to the touch.
If none or only several of the heaters feel warm to the
touch after allowing sufficient time for warm-up, perform the following checks:
1. Open the magnetic contactor box located on the
lower left of the radiator shroud (2, Figure 7-1).
Visually check all electrical connections in the
box and to the heating units.
2. With line voltage applied to the system, verify a
nominal 440 volts across terminals "84" and
"87" at the magnetic contactor (3, Figure 7-2).
3. With the coolant temperature below 120F
(48C), verify a nominal 440 volts across terminals "85" and "86".
M7-2
3. Magnetic Contactor
4. Cord Grip
M07004
Oil Heaters:
a. Disconnect the power cable at the junction
box.
b. Remove the housing cap and wire connectors at each heater assembly. Reconnect the
power cable and apply power. Measure the
voltage at the wires and verify approximately
440 volts.
c. If voltage is present but no heat is detected,
the heating element must be replaced. Refer
to "Oil Heater Element".
1. Heater Assembly
2. Power Cord
M07004
4. Heating Element
5. Cover
6. Terminals
M7-3
3. Element Retaining
Setscrew
Installation
1. Install a new heater element and secure in
place with the setscrew (3, Figure 7-6).
2. Coat the threads of the element cover with an
anti-seize compound and install the housing (5,
Figure 7-5).
3. Insert the power cord (1), cord grip bushing (4),
washer (3) and cap (2) into the housing.
4. Twist the wires together and place a screw-on
connecter on each pair.
5. Adjust the power cord and tighten the cord grip
cover.
6. Replace the housing cap (7).
7. If engine oil was drained, refill the crankcase
with fresh oil.
8. Plug in the external power source. After allowing
time for the element to warm up, the heater
mounting boss on the oil pan should feel warm
to the touch.
M7-4
6. Element Cover
7. Housing Cap
8. Electrical Leads
9. Wire Connectors
M07004
THERMOSTAT
Removal
1. Disconnect the external power source at the
plug-in receptacle.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the thermostat
assembly from the heater.
2. Remove the two screws and slide cover (1, Figure 7-7) out of the way.
3. Disconnect the two electrical leads.
4. Loosen the two setscrews (4) and remove the
temperature sensing unit (2).
Installation
1. Install a new temperature sensing unit (2, Figure
7-7) and secure in place with two setscrews (4).
2. Connect the electrical leads.
3. Move cover (1) into position and secure in place
with screws.
4. Plug in the external power source.
5. After allowing time for the elements to warm up,
coolant outlet hoses and oil heater mounting
bosses should feel warm to the touch.
M07004
3. Housing
4. Setscrew
M7-5
NOTES
M7-6
M07004
SPECIAL TOOLS
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VD4665
Nitrogen
Charging Kit
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
FA4429
Roll-Out
Assembly
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TG1106
M08006
Lifting Eye
USE
Suspension and
accumulator nitrogen charging
USE
Power module
removal
USE
Miscellaneous
Special Tools
M8-1
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
PB6039
Female
Coupling
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TA8545
TA8546
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TW9425
M8-2
Special Tools
Wrench
USE
Hydraulic brake
system diagnostics
USE
Installation of front
wheel bearing face
seals
USE
Accumulator rebuild
M08006
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VN1388
VN1392
Special
Wrench
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VL0293
Chain Wrench
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TL9422
M08006
Box End
Wrench
USE
Rear suspension
ball stud retaining
ring and locknut
USE
Miscellaneous
USE
Rear suspension
ball stud lock nut
Special Tools
M8-3
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TB2555
TB2557
TB2559
TB2561
TY0026
Spanner
Wrench
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
TB2575
TB2829
TB2832
Clamp
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
SS1134
M8-4
Special Tools
Special
Wrench
USE
Hoist cylinder
glands
USE
Hoist cylinder stage
removal and
installation
USE
Unloader valve,
check valve
removal, and installation
M08006
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VS5386
Puller
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VS5388
Lock plate
compressor
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VS5389
PART
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VS5387
M08006
Clamp tool
USE
Steering wheel
removal
USE
Steering column
lock plate removal
USE
Removal and
installation of
steering column tilt
pivot pin
USE
Support steering
column in bench
vise during rebuild
Special Tools
M8-5
NOTES:
M8-6
Special Tools
M08006
M09003 11/95
6. Temperature Sensor
91.Evaporator
2. Expansion Valve
3. Suction Line
14. Compressor
Drive Pulley
15. Receiver/Drier
16. Discharge Line
17. Condenser
M9-1
These new restrictions require the use of new equipment and new procedures which are significantly different from those traditionally used in air conditioning
service techniques. The use of new equipment and
techniques permits the complete recovery of refrigerant, which will not only help to protect the environment, but through the re-cycling of the refrigerant,
will preserve the physical supply as well as help to
reduce the cost of the refrigerant.
M9-2
PRINCIPLES OF REFRIGERATION
A review of the principles of air conditioning will
relate the function of the components, the technique
of trouble shooting and the corrective action necessary to keep the A/C unit into top operating efficiency.
Too frequently, the operator and the serviceman
overlook the primary fact that no A/C system will
function properly unless it is operated within a completely controlled cab environment. The circulation of
air must be a directed flow. The cab must be sealed
against seepage of ambient air. The cab interior must
be maintained for cleanliness, dust, and dirt which, if
picked up in the air system, will clog the intake side of
the evaporator coil.
Refrigeration - The Act Of Cooling
There is no process for producing cold; there is
only heat removal.
Heat is always drawn toward cold objects. This
principle is the basis for the operation of a cooling
unit. As long as one object has a temperature
lower than another, this heat transfer will occur.
Temperature is the measurement of the intensity
of heat in degrees. The most common measuring
device is the thermometer.
All objects have a point at which they will turn to
vapor. Water boiling is the most common
example of heating until vapor is formed. Boiling
is a rapid form of evaporation. Steam is a great
deal hotter than boiling water. The water will not
increase in temperature once brought to a boil.
The heat energy is used in the vaporization
process. The boiling point of a liquid is directly
affected by pressure. By changing pressure, we
can control the boiling point and temperature at
which a vapor will condense. When a liquid is
heated and vaporizes, the gas will absorb heat
without changing pressure. This gas is in a
superheated condition.
Reversing the process, when heat is removed
from water vapor, it will return to the liquid state.
Heat from air is attracted to a cooler object.
Usually the moisture in the cooled air will
condense on the cooler object.
Refrigerant: Only R-12 refrigerant should be used
in mobile systems designed for R-12.
Do not mix refrigerants! Damage to
equipment and components will result!
M09003 11/95
The cycle is completed when the heated low pressure gas is again drawn into the compressor through
the suction side.
This simplified explanation of the principles of refrigeration does not call attention to the fine points of
refrigeration technology and the design of air conditioning systems. Some of these will be covered in the
following discussion of the components, controls,
and techniques involved in preparing the unit for efficient operation.
Ram air condensers depend upon the vehicle movement to force a large volume of air past the fins and
tubes of the condenser. The condenser is usually
located in front of the radiator or on the roof of the
truck. Refrigerant temperature in the condenser varies from 120 to 170F (49 to 77 C) with pressure
ranging from 150 to 300 psi. (27 to 54 kg/cm).
M09003 11/95
M9-3
Filter Receiver-drier
The receiver-drier is an important part of the air conditioning system. The drier receives the liquid refrigerant from the condenser and removes any moisture
and foreign matter present which may have entered
the system. The receiver section of the tank is
designed to store extra refrigerant until it is needed
by the evaporator. The storage of this refrigerant is
temporary and is dependent on the demand of the
expansion valve.
A desiccant is a solid substance capable of removing
moisture from gas, liquid or solid. It is held in place
within the receiver between two screens, which also
act as strainers. Sometimes it is simply placed in a
metal mesh or wool felt bag. Filtering is accomplished by a separate strainer screen on the pickup
tube.
Some systems may utilize an accumulator instead of
a receiver-drier. If an accumulator is used, an expansion (fixed-orifice) tube is used instead of the thermostatic expansion valve described below. When used,
the expansion tube is located inside the inlet tube of
the evaporator and is used to restrict, but still allow a
continuous flow of refrigerant to the evaporator coil.
Fusible Pressure Relief Plug
Some receiver driers have a fusible plug which melts
between 218 - 230F (103 - 110C). This plug serves
as a safety valve in the event the condenser safety
switch malfunctions, allowing the relief of excessive
internal pressures which would damage the system.
Some systems employ a spring loaded pressure
relief valve which performs the same function.
M9-4
M09003 11/95
Heat exchange, as explained under condenser operation, depends upon a temperature differential of the
air and the refrigerant. The greater the temperature
differential, the greater will be the amount of heat
exchanged between the air and the refrigerant. A
high heat load condition, as is generally encountered
when the air conditioning system is turned on, will
allow rapid heat transfer between the air and the
cooler refrigerant.
The change of state of the refrigerant in and going
toward the evaporator coil is as important as that of
the air flow over the coil. All or most of the liquid that
did not change to vapor in the expansion valve or
connecting tubes boils (expands) and vaporizes
immediately in the evaporator, becoming very cold.
As the process of heat loss from the air to the evaporator coil surface is taking place, any moisture
(humidity) in the air condenses on the cool outside
surface of the evaporator coil and is drained off as
water.
At atmospheric pressure, refrigerant boils at a point
lower than water freezes. Therefore, the temperature
in the evaporator must be controlled so that the water
collecting on the coil surface does not freeze on and
between the fins and restrict air flow. The evaporator
temperature is controlled through pressure inside the
evaporator, and temperature and pressure at the outlet of the evaporator.
Superheat
The liquid refrigerant admitted to the evaporator coil
is usually completely vaporized before reaching the
coil outlet. Since liquid R-12 is vaporized at relatively
low temperature, it can be seen that the vapor
remains cold, even though the liquid is completely
evaporated.
The cold vapor flowing through the remainder of the
coil continues to absorb heat, becoming superheated. This means that the temperature of the
refrigerant has been raised above the point at which
it evaporated without an increase in pressure.
As the refrigerant vaporizes through the absorption
of the heat in the evaporator, the temperature of the
vapor rises at the coil outlet and reaches a difference
of about 5F (3C) between the vaporizing temperature and outlet refrigerant temperature.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
The air conditioner's electrical circuit is fed from an
accessory circuit and is normally protected with a 30ampere fuse or circuit breaker.
The blower control is a switch which provides a
range of blower speeds from fast to slow. When the
blower switch is turned on, current is fed to the thermostat. Once the blower is turned on, fan speeds
may be changed without affecting the thermostat
sensing level.
The thermostat reacts to changing temperatures
which cause electrical contacts to open and close.
The thermostat has a capillary tube extended into the
evaporator coil to sense temperature.
When the contacts are closed, current flows to the
clutch field and energizes the clutch, causing the
crankshaft to turn which starts the refrigeration cycle.
When the temperature of the evaporator coil drops to
a predetermined point, the contacts open and the
clutch disengages.
When the clutch is disengaged, the blower remains
at the set speed. After the evaporator temperature
rises about twelve degrees above the cutout point,
the contacts in the thermostat close and the refrigeration cycle resumes.
Thermostat
An electromagnetic clutch is used on the compressor
to provide a means of constant temperature control
of the cab. The clutch is controlled by a thermostat in
the evaporator which is set initially by the driver to a
predetermined point. Coil temperature is then maintained by the cycling action of the clutch.
The thermostat is simply a thermal device which controls an electrical switch. When warm, the switch is
closed; when cold, it is open. Most thermostats have
a positive OFF position as a means to turn the clutch
OFF regardless of temperature.
The bellows type thermostat is connected to a capillary tube filled with refrigerant. The capillary tube is
attached to the bellows inside of the thermostat.
Expansion of the gases inside the capillary tube
exerts pressure on the bellows, which in turn closes
the contacts at a predetermined temperature.
The difference in this temperature is called superheat. All expansion valves are adjusted at the factory
to operate under superheat conditions present in the
particular type of unit for which they are designed.
M09003 11/95
M9-5
Compressor Clutch
An electromagnetic clutch is used in conjunction with
the thermostat to disengage the compressor when it
is not needed, such as when a defrost cycle is indicated in the evaporator, or at other times when the air
conditioner is not being used.
The stationary field clutch is the most desirable type
since it has fewer parts to wear out. The field is
mounted to the compressor by mechanical means
depending on the type field and compressor. The
rotor is held on the armature by a bearing and snap
rings. The armature is mounted on the compressor
crankshaft.
When no current is fed to the field, there is no magnetic force applied to the clutch and the rotor is free
to turn on the armature, which remains stationary on
the crankshaft.
When the thermostat or switch is closed, current is
fed to the field. This sets up a magnetic force
between the field and armature, pulling it into the
rotor. When the armature becomes engaged with the
rotor, the complete unit rotates while the field
remains stationary. This causes the compressor
crankshaft to turn, starting the refrigeration cycle.
M9-6
M09003 11/95
SYSTEM SERVICING
Servicing an air conditioning system really means
closely monitoring refrigerant flow. For this reason,
the following procedures deal extensively with the
proper use, handling, care and safety factors
involved in the refrigerant quality and quantity in an
air conditioning system.
Because the refrigerant in an air conditioning system
must remain pressurized and sealed within the unit to
function properly, safety is a major consideration
when anything causes this pressurized, sealed condition to change. The following warnings are provided here to alert you to their importance BEFORE
you begin learning the correct procedures. Read,
remember, and observe each warning as you begin
actual system servicing.
NOTE: If the mine operates a fleet with some trucks
using R-12 and others using the new R-134a
refrigerant, it is essential that servicing tools (gauge
sets,
charging
equipment,
recovery/recycle
equipment etc.) be dedicated to one type refrigerant
only to prevent cross contamination.
When exposed to flames or sparks, the components of R-12 refrigerant change and become
deadly phosgene gas. This poison gas will damage the respiratory system if inhaled. NEVER
smoke in an area where R-12 is used or stored.
Never direct a steam cleaning hose or torch in
direct contact with components in the air conditioning system. Localized heat can raise the
pressure to a dangerous level.
Do not heat or store refrigerant containers above
120F (49C).
Do not flush or pressure test the system using
shop air or other compressed air sources. Shop
air supplies contain moisture and other contaminants that could damage system components.
R-12 Containers
Two basic, readily available containers are used to
store R-12 refrigerant: the 30 or 60 pound bulk canisters (Figure 9-2).
Always read the container label to verify the contents
are correct for the system being serviced. R-12 and
R-134a refrigerants must not be mixed.
M09003 11/95
2. 60 Pound Cylinder
M9-7
Leak Detector
Two basic types of leak detectors are used on air
conditioning systems today to locate suspected
leaks. The propane, or halide type detector (Figure 94) uses a flame which changes colors (from pale blue
- normal to purple/blue/violet for a large leak to light
green/yellow for a small leak) to successfully detect
leaks.
The halide type consists of a hose for leak searching,
a burner, tank, and a control valve. Safety is a vital
concern with this type, as the fumes can be poisonous. Refer to WARNING on page M9-7.
M9-8
M09003 11/95
M09003 11/95
Vacuum Pump
The vacuum pump is used to completely evacuate all
refrigerant, air, and moisture from the system by
deliberately lowering the pressure within the system
to the point where water turns to a vapor (boils) and
together with all air and refrigerant is withdrawn
(pumped) from the system. Normally the vacuum
pump is only used when a system has completely
lost its charge of refrigerant.
M9-9
SERVICE VALVES
Because an air conditioning system is a sealed system, two service valves are provided on the compressor to enable diagnostic tests, system charging or
evacuation. Connecting the applicable hoses from the
manifold gauge set to the compressor service valves
enables each of these to be readily performed.
FIGURE 9-8
Schrader Type
The Schrader type service valve (Figure 9-8), similar
in appearance and function to the valve in a truck tire
(the rubber compound and spring pressures being
quite different) is becoming more common due to its
capacity for easier accessibility. The Schrader valve
can be mounted almost anywhere in the system. Two
positions are possible with this valve: Closed and
Open, each serves a specific function during testing.
Protective caps are provided for each service valve
when not being used for servicing purposes. These
caps must be kept on each valve to prevent contamination or damage to the valve core.
M9-10
M09003 11/95
Shut off engine. DO NOT attempt to connect servicing equipment when the engine is running.
4. Connect the two service hoses from the manifold to the correct service valves on the compressor. (High side to compressor discharge
valve and low side to compressor suction side.)
M09003 11/95
M9-11
M9-12
M09003 11/95
M09003 11/95
M9-13
Do not open high side hand valve. High side system pressure is greater than refrigerant container. Serious personal injury may result if the
container explodes.
Use hand valve to regulate low side reading during charging. DO NOT EXCEED 40 psi maximum.
Exceeding this pressure may cause compressor
failure.
M9-14
M09003 11/95
M09003 11/95
M9-15
M9-16
A second common place for leaks is the nylon or rubber hoses where they are crimped or clamped to the
fittings, or where routing allows abrasion. Other
threaded joints or areas where gaskets are used
should be visually and physically examined. Moving
your fingers along the bottom of the condenser and
evaporator, particularly near the drain hole for the
condensate will quickly indicate the condition of the
evaporator. Any trace of fresh oil here is a clear indication of a leak.
To locate a leak, four common types of leak detectors
are used. Usually, a 50% charged system is enough
to find most leaks. If the system is empty, connect the
manifold gauge set to the system and charge at least
one (1) lb. of refrigerant into the system.
M09003 11/95
Always wear protective goggles and provide adequate ventilation when flushing components.
Never use R-12 as a flushing agent.
When opening the AC system, plug any open lines
except when flushing. Fill the cylinder of the flushing
gun with solvent. Insert the rubber gun probe into the
outlet of each component and dispense solvent
(reverse flush). Unless there is a serious blockage,
the solvent will appear at the other end of the components. Flush the next component in turn until all parts
are flushed.
Engine must not be running during this procedure. Supply adequate ventilation and extinguish
any nearby flame sources.
M09003 11/95
M9-17
Allow solvent to evaporate completely (about 30 minutes) and then assemble the system replacing parts
where necessary.
NOTE: The length of the hose will affect the
refrigerant capacity. When replacing hoses, always
use the same hose length, if possible. Always
replace the receiver-drier when assembling the AC
system after flushing.
SYSTEM REPAIR
The following service and repair procedures are not
any different than typical vehicle service work. However, AC system components are made of soft metals (copper, aluminum, brass, etc.). Comments and
tips that follow will make the job easier and reduce
unnecessary component replacement.
M9-18
M09003 11/95
Expansion Valve
Clutch
When removing the expansion valve from the system, remove the insulation, clean the area and disconnect the line from the receiver-drier. Detach the
capillary (bulb) and external equalizer tube (if
present) from their mounting locations. Remove the
expansion valve from the evaporator inlet. Expansion
valve service is limited to cleaning or replacing the filter screen. If this is not the problem, replace the
valve. Secure the capillary and equalizer, if used, to
clean surfaces and replace or attach any insulating
material.
Receiver-Drier
M09003 11/95
M9-19
Horizontal 13/16 1
Mount
Vertical
Mount
7/8
10
12
16
1-3/16
1-5/8 1-15/16
1-1/8
1-7/16
1-7/8
M9-20
M09003 11/95
5. Remove oil filler plug slowly to release pressure. Using figure 9-16 as a guide, peer through
oil filler hole to rotate the clutch front plate to
place internal parts of compressor as shown in
illustration.
6. If the compressor is right-mounted (facing
clutch) (See Figure 9-17), position the parts as
though they were moving toward the rear of the
compressor (equal to the discharge stroke of
piston).
7. If the compressor is left-mounted (facing the
clutch) (See Figure 9-17), position the parts as
though they were moving to the front of the
compressor (equal to the suction stroke of piston).
NOTE: Either step will clear the path of internal parts
so as to allow dipstick insertion to its full depth.
M09003 11/95
M9-21
Model
505
507
508
510
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
90
4-6
6-8
8-10
10-11
11-12
12-13
12-13
15-18
3-5
5-7
6-8
7-9
8-10
8-10
9-11
9-11
4-6
6-8
7-9
8-10
9-11
9-11
9-11
9-12
2-4
4-5
5-6
6-7
7-9
9-0
10-12
12-13
3. Vacuum Pump
M9-22
M09003 11/95
M09003 11/95
M9-23
TROUBLESHOOTING
PRE-DIAGNOSIS CHECKS
A lot of time and frustration can be saved if obvious
causes of system problems are checked before connecting the manifold gauge set. If the system indicates Insufficient cooling or no cooling, the following
points should be checked before proceeding with the
system diagnosis procedures.
M9-24
PRELIMINARY STEPS
The following steps outline the correct procedures
necessary to prepare the truck and the system for
testing and diagnosis:
1. Correctly connect the manifold gauge set to the
system. Refer to the connection and purging
procedures outlined in this section.
2. Run the engine with the air conditioning system
on for five to ten minutes to stabilize the system.
3. With the engine and the system at normal operating temperature, conduct a Performance Test
as outlined in this section.
M09003 11/95
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Leaks Found.
M09003 11/95
6. Charge system
7. Performance test system.
M9-25
1. Operate system and spray liquid R-12 onto the capillary tube (thermal bulb) or the head of the expansion valve. Low side should drop into a vacuum,
indicating valve is all right. Clean surfaces of thermal bulb and contact area, secure in place and
install insulating material.
3. Evacuate system
M9-26
4. Charge system
5. Performance test system
M09003 11/95
3. Evacuate system
Restriction near expansion valve (valve itself, inlet or
outlet screen clogged) or lost charge in thermal bulb
causing compressor to evacuate low side, R-12 super
cools in condenser because of restricted flow, lowering
temperature and pressure.
M09003 11/95
4. Charge system
5. Performance test system
M9-27
Low Side
High Side
60
0-4
95-115
65
4-8
105-125
70
8-12
115-135
75
12-14
130-150
80
12-18
150-170
85
16-20
165-185
90
18-22
175-195
95
22-24
185-205
100
24-27
210-230
105
25-29
230-250
110
26-32
250-270
115
30-36
265-285
120
32-42
285-310
EVAPORATOR
OUTLET TEMP.
(F)
35-55
M9-28
M09003 11/95
Refrigerant Discharge
When a component connected to the refrigerant circuit, other than the compressor head gasket, requires
replacement, the proper procedures must be followed
to release the refrigerant charge in the system before
removal of any hoses. After component replacement,
follow the procedure described under Evacuation and
Charging to remove the moisture from the system,
check for leaks, and to replace the refrigerant. Keep all
hoses and components capped to prevent entry of
moisture and foreign material during repair. If the compressor head gasket is the only component to be
removed, adjust the service valves to the front seated
position as shown in Figure 9-5 in Air Conditioning
System. This position isolates the compressor from
the rest of the system and prevents loss of refrigerant.
To remove the refrigerant charge prior to removing any
other component or hose, follow the procedure below:
M09004
4. Shims
5. Low Pressure Inlet
Hose
6. High Pressure
Discharge Hose
7. Adjustment Locking
Capscrew
M9-1
COMPRESSOR
A defective compressor will cause insufficient cooling
and/or loss of refrigerant. Refrigerant loss past the
head gaskets or shaft seal can easily be detected by
using a leak detector. If the manifold gauges indicate
high suction and low discharge pressures, the trouble can probably be traced to a defective head gasket or valve assembly in the compressor. Additional
compressor repair information can be found in Air
Conditioning System.
Cylinder Head (Gasket) Removal
1. Adjust the compressor service valves to the
front seated position.
2. Remove the cylinder head capscrews and lift
cylinder head off.
3. Inspect compressor and replace parts as
required.
Installation
1. Install new gasket and position cylinder head
over compressor.
2. Install capscrews.
3. Torque capscrews to proper torque and in the
correct sequence as recommended by the compressor manufacturer.
Installation
1. Align compressor with brackets on engine and
install attaching hardware.
2. Using a straight edge, check alignment of
engine drive pulley and compressor clutch
driven pulley. Shim if necessary for proper
alignment.
3. Install compressor drive belt and adjust belt tension adjuster to allow .50 in. (12.7 mm) maximum belt deflection measured at the middle of
the belt span. Tighten adjuster jam nut.
4. Tighten all compressor mounting hardware and
recheck belt tension.
5. Attach refrigerant system hoses and clutch
wire.
6. Install belt guard and verify proper clearance to
prevent contact with the belt or pulley.
7. Evacuate and recharge the system
described in Air Conditioning System.
as
CONDENSER
A dirty or clogged condenser through which air flow is
restricted will cause high head pressure in the compressor. The condenser usually may be cleaned by
using a fiber bristled brush and compressed air.
Extensive clogging may require use of soapy water
and brush wash and complete flushing with fresh
water to remove all foreign materials. If the condenser
has been damaged and is leaking, remove the condenser assembly and install a new component.
Compressor Removal
1. Discharge refrigerant per instructions described
earlier.
2. Remove gauge manifold and refrigerant system
hoses and disconnect clutch wire from compressor.
3. Remove hardware attaching compressor drive
belt guard and remove guard structure.
4. Loosen compressor mount pivot and belt
adjustment capscrews.
a. Loosen belt tension adjuster to relieve tension on belt.
b. Remove
pulley.
belt
from
compressor
clutch
M9-2
3. High Temperature
Switch
4. Mounting Hardware
M09004
RECEIVER/DRYER
Removal
1. Discharge system refrigerant as described earlier.
2. Remove grille covering condenser assembly.
3. Loosen hose fittings at condenser hose inlet
and outlet bulkhead fittings. (Refer to Figure 92.)
4. Disconnect wires attached to the high temperature switch (3)
5. Remove the six capscrews, washers, and nuts
attaching the condenser to the vertical mounting brackets. Remove the condenser assembly.
6. Remove the short hoses connected to the coil
tubes for reuse if condition is acceptable.
Installation
1. Install new condenser assembly with hardware
removed above. Tighten to 65 ft. lbs (88.1 N-m)
torque.
2. Install inlet and outlet hoses.
3. Connect wires to high temperature switch.
4. Check system for leaks and evacuate and
recharge system as described in Air Conditioning System.
5. Install grille over condenser assembly.
A dirty or restricted receiver/dryer will cause a system malfunction and will be indicated by loss of cooling, low suction and discharge pressures. When the
system is in operation, a defective receiver/dryer
may be detected by the outlet fitting being cooler
than the inlet fitting. Replace any unit which is suspected of being restricted.
Removal
1. Discharge refrigerant from system.
2. Disconnect wires from low pressure switch.
3. Loosen and remove hoses at inlet and outlet
ports.
4. Remove clamps securing receiver/dryer to the
mounting brackets and remove assembly.
Installation
1. Attach receiver/dryer to shroud brackets with
mounting clamps.
2. Attach hoses at inlet and outlet ports.
3. Connect wires to the low pressure switch.
4. Check hose connections for leaks and evacuate
and recharge the system per instructions in Air
Conditioning System.
M09004
M9-3
4. Thermostat Switch
5. Evaporator Outlet
6. Extension Fitting
EXPANSION VALVE
A faulty expansion valve could cause the evaporator
coil to be starved for, or flooded with refrigerant.
If the manifold gauge shows low suction pressure or
a vacuum, the evaporator coil is being starved of
refrigerant. To check the expansion valve, remove
the sensing bulb from the evaporator coil discharge
tube and warm it by holding it in your hand. If suction
pressure does not return to normal, the expansion
valve is probably defective and should be replaced.
Before replacing the expansion valve though, run
your hand the length of the tube between the condenser and the receiver/dryer, if the tube is warm
along its length the expansion valve definitely is
defective. If the receiver/dryer is cooler than the
hose, the receiver/dryer is restricted or defective and
should be replaced.
M9-4
7. Expansion Valve
8. Capillary Tube
9. Evaporator Coil
M09004
4. Sensing Bulb
5. Pressure Equalizing
Capillary Tube
6. Expansion Valve
2. Remove covers from heater/air conditioner cabinet (1, Figure 9-4) for access to components.
1. Thermostat Control
Cable
2. Capillary Tube
3. Thermostat Switch
mounting
M09004
The engine cooling system is pressurized by system air pressure and by thermal expansion of
coolant during operation. DO NOT remove the
radiator cap while the engine is hot. Severe
scalding burns can result.
M9-5
Removal
1. Relieve radiator pressure by loosening the radiator cap slowly.
2. To minimize spillage of antifreeze in the truck
cab, set the temperature control to OFF. Close
shut-off valve on engine block. Disconnect
heater hose from shut-off valve.
3. Remove access cover from outer right front of
the truck cab.
M9-6
M09004
Use care removing upper screw from the thermostat switch to prevent bending of capillary tube in
switch area. Bending or cracking of the capillary
tube will cause the sensing switch to be inoperative.
8. Carefully pull capillary tube from unit.
9. Remove fittings from heater core (7).
10. Slide heater core from unit.
11. Disconnect electrical wiring from blower motor.
Wires are color coded for easy identification,
note the proper connection locations.
12. Remove motor blower assembly (2, Figure 9-4)
by removing mounting screws on each side of
cabinet (1). Inside the cabinet, raise end of
blower assembly on right side and lower left end
to remove blower from the cabinet.
Installation
1. Reassemble, if necessary, and install motor
blower assembly into the casing assembly (23).
Secure with machine screws removed at disassembly.
4. Unplug motor wire and repeat fan removal procedure at other end of the motor shaft.
Blower Assembly
M09004
3. Repeat Steps 1 & 2 for the other fan and housing assembly.
4. Install both fan housing assemblies on the
blower mounting plate and secure with machine
screws.
M9-7
NOTES:
M9-8
M09004
MAINTENANCE
Removal
1. Tag or mark air lines before disconnecting.
NOTE: If replacement of the filter assembly is the
only service required, the aftercooler does not have
to be removed from the truck. Proceed to the
disassembly procedure for filter replacement
2. Remove outlet air line leading to air tank.
3. Remove air line from inlet port.
4. Remove electrical connection from heater
assembly if aftercooler is equipped with this
option.
5. Remove nuts securing aftercooler assembly to
mounting bracket. Remove aftercooler and
place in a clean work area for disassembly.
Installation
1. Install aftercooler assembly
bracket and secure in place.
on
mounting
M10002
M10-1
Disassembly
1. Unscrew nut (13, Figure 10-2) from aftercooler
bottom cap (12)
.
3. Gasket
13. Nut
14. O-Ring
15. Sleeve
16. Cup
17. Piston
18. Spring
19. Retainer
20. Spring
21. Seat Ring
22. Spindle
23. Capscrews
M10-2
2. Body
M10002
Assembly
M10002
2. Body
M10-3
NOTES:
M10-4
M10002
M10003 6/97
AEROFINER III
M10-1
Removal
1. Discharge air pressure from main air tank. Tag
or mark air lines before disconnecting.
2. Remove outlet air line from discharge port (33,
Figure 10-2) leading to main air tank.
3. Remove air line from inlet port (23). Remove air
line from purge line port (24).
4. If air dryer is equipped with heater, remove
electrical connection.
5. Remove capscrews securing air dryer assembly
to truck. Remove air dryer and place in a clean
work area for disassembly.
Installation
1. Install air dryer assembly on truck and secure in
place with capscrews.
2. Connect air lines and electrical heater wire, if
equipped.
3. Charge main air system and check for leaks.
Disassembly
The AEROFINER III air dryer can be serviced with
the unit installed on the truck.
1. Release any air pressure which may be trapped
by slowly loosening the hose fitting at the outlet
port (33, Figure 10-2).
2. Disconnect purge control line from port (24) and
heater wires if equipped.
3. Loosen V-band coupling nut (18) far enough
that coupling will clear flanges and remove Vband from air dryer.
4. Twist and pull down on housing (1) and remove
housing from cap (17).
5. Remove purge cap nut (15), purge plate (13)
and spring (12). Complete desiccant canister
assembly (11) can now be removed from housing (1).
6. With the desiccant canister upright, remove the
inner tube retaining ring (35) with a screwdriver.
The retainer screen and cloth filter pad can then
be removed, exposing the desiccant. Discard
old desiccant in a suitable manner.
FIGURE 10-2. AIR DRIER
M10-2
AEROFINER III
M10003 6/97
CHECK VALVE
Assembly
1. Install new mesh separator pad on bottom of
tube assembly. Insert in canister and secure
with retaining ring (34, Figure 10-2). Install
lower retainer plate and new cloth filter pad. Be
sure that cloth filter pad lays flat against retainer
screen.
2. Set canister upright and pour in new desiccant.
Gently tap side of canister several times with
rubber mallet to settle the desiccant. Fill only up
to the inner tube retaining ring groove. Any
excess desiccant may be discarded.
3. Install upper retainer screen and new cloth filter
pad over the inner tube, cloth pad against the
desiccant. Push the retainer screen down until
the small retaining ring (35) can be inserted in
groove on inner tube.
4. Insert recharged desiccant canister (11) into
lower housing (1). Replace all O-rings. with new
O-rings and lubricate them.
5. Stack desiccant spring (12) and purge plate
(13) on top of canister and reassemble with
purge plate nut (15) with new (and lubricated)
seal washer (14). Tighten purge plate nut (15)
to 200 in. lbs. (22.6 N.m) maximum torque.
6. Install new O-ring (20) in cap (17).
7. Be certain large thin O-ring (16) is seated in
groove on housing (1). Push lower housing
assembly with recharged canister up into cap
assembly (17) with a twisting motion. Replace
V-band coupling over flanges and tighten nut to
35 in lbs. (4 N.m) torque.
M10003 6/97
Removal
1. Discharge air pressure from main air tank.
2. Disconnect the hose from the air dryer outlet
port (33, Figure 10-2).
3. Remove retaining ring (32) with snap ring pliers.
Remove spring (27) and poppet assembly (21)
with O-ring (19).
Installation
1. Install new O-ring (19, Figure 10-2) onto the
poppet (21) and coat the entire O-ring poppet
assembly with a light petroleum grease. The
sealing surface in the valve body must be
smooth and clean. Inspect thoroughly before
installing new check valve components.
2. Place the O-ring/poppet assembly into the
check valve body, O-ring end first. Needle nose
pliers may be used to guide the poppet into
place.
3. Place new spring (27) in back of the poppet with
small end of spring facing poppet.
4. Install retaining ring (32) in groove behind the
spring.
5. To check valve operation, remove cap assembly and push the nose of the poppet several
times. Free movement with a positive return
should be observed. After functional testing, the
spring must still be retained fully by the retaining
ring.
AEROFINER III
M10-3
Inspection
Removal
Installation
1. Lubricate new valve O-ring (4, Figure 10-2) and
U-cup (6). Insert U-cup (6) into valve body first.
Care must be taken not to damage the seal lips.
2. Install O-ring (4) onto the new valve and insert
into the valve body. Place new springs (7 & 8)
on top of valve.
M10-4
AEROFINER III
M10003 6/97
1. Disassemble scrubber (8) and clean steel element (9) with quality cleaning solvent.
2. Inspect scrubber poppet for damage. Replace if
necessary.
3. Check air inlet and outlet flange for damage.
Replace outlet flange if necessary.
4. Clean moisture drain valve with cleaning solvent. Replace piston seal and O-rings.
5. Clean hardware and check for cross-threading
and damage. Replace as necessary.
Reassembly and Installation
1. Place scrubber (8) in body and assemble body
halves.
2. Reassemble moisture drain valve and mount on
body.
3. Install outlet flange and gasket on body.
4. Secure drain valve heater (7) to moisture drain
valve (18).
5. Install air dryer on truck and connect air lines
and heater wire.
Disassembly
1. Remove heater (7, Figure 1) from moisture
drain valve (18), Port "A".
2. Remove capscrews securing drain valve to
lower body half. Remove drain valve (18).
3. Remove nuts and lockwashers (2 & 3) from
studs and separate body cap from lower body
half.
4. Remove center scrubber (8) from upper halve
of body.
5. Remove bottom cap (16), seat bolt (17), seat
washer (19), seat spacer (20), and valve seat
(21) from valve body (18).
6. Remove capscrews (31) from the spring cap
(27) and remove cap from body.
7. Remove piston (23) from valve body (18) and
discard seal (24) and O-rings (22). Replace
these with new seals and O-rings during reassembly.
8. Remove valve seat (21) from body.
M10004
Salem Aftercooler
M10-1
M10-2
9. Coalescer
10. Retainer
11. Seal
12. Lockwasher - 5/16
13. Nut - 5/16 - 24NF
14. Bottom Cap
15. Gasket
16. Bottom Cap
Salem Aftercooler
M10004
HEADREST
ARMRESTS
BACKREST
Rotate control handle upward
and hold, select desired backrest angle, release handle.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to adjust until
operator is seated.
AIR SUSPENSION
LUMBAR SUPPORT
SEAT
Installation
1. Install seat assembly on riser and align mounting capscrew holes.
Removal
1. Relieve system air pressure.
2. Disconnect air supply tube routed to rear of seat
base at the union.
3. Remove four capscrews, washers and nuts
securing seat base to riser.
M14001
M14-1
Disassembly
1. Remove capscrew securing the backrest in
place, refer to Figure 14-1. Access to the capscrew can be gained by compressing the lower
left corner of the backrest cushion.
3. Seat Frame
1. Seat Frame
2. Suspension
Assembly
3. Rubber Boot
M14-2
3. Rubber Boot
2. Cover
M14001
3. Tilt Handle
3. Slide Rail
M14001
3. Height Handle
4. Tilt Handle
5. Handle Springs
M14-3
7. Remove and inspect the nylon slide assemblies, replace if required, refer to Figures 1 4-9
and 14-10.
1. E Washer
2. Cam
3. Support Shaft
4. Air Regulator
2. Slide Rail
5. Air Spring
6. Air Lines
7. Capscrew
8. Shock Absorber
2. Seat Frame
M14-4
2. If removed, replace air spring. Extend the suspension frame and install air spring. Install air
spring retaining capscrew with lockwasher.
Tighten capscrew to standard torque. Connect
air line and fitting to air spring.
3. If removed, install air regulator valve. Install
retaining nuts and tighten. Connect air lines.
4. If removed, install cam. Secure cam on support
shaft with "E" washer.
NOTE: If a new cam is being installed, adjustment
may be necessary. Refer to Air Suspension Cam
Adjustment Procedure.
M14001
3. Seat Frame
1. Suspension
Assembly
2. Cam
3. Air Regulator
4. Adjusting Screw
5. Adjusting Screw
M14001
M14-5
6. Seat Frame
7. Static Spacer
8. Slide Assembly
9. Suspension
Assembly
10. Boot
Headrest
3. Install new armrests with new hardware supplied with parts kit.
Seat Cushion
1. Check condition of upholstery and foam.
2. Remove cushion by removing two screws at
front and detaching from the rear mounting
brackets.
3. Replace parts as required.
M14-6
Seat Frame
1. Inspect seat frame (6) for excessive wear in the
seat height and slope adjustment nylon bushings.
2. If repairs are required, remove seat backrest
and seat cushion according to above instructions.
3. Remove seat frame from static spacer.
4. Inspect bushings, springs, sideplate assembly
and replace parts as required.
5. Reinstall seat frame to static spacer.
a. Insert rear swivel bolts (Bolts must be facing
out from static spacer).
b. Insert front bolts. Use self-locking nuts
only.
M14001
Slides
1. Inspect for excessive wear or binding.
2. Lubricate the slide rails (8, Figure 14-14) and
nylon slides/rollers and the handle pivot post on
the inside of both rails.
3. If replacement is necessary, install slide assembly replacement parts kit. Individual parts are
not serviced.
a. Install slide rails, making certain the left and
right rails are aligned parallel.
b. Check fore and aft alignment to be certain
the handle locks rail securely.
Suspension
1. Remove boot (10) and inspect suspension
assembly (9).
2. Inspect air valve and cam, shock absorber, air
spring, rollers and bushings.
3. Replace parts as required.
4. Apply automotive or white grease to vertical
section only of the inside of the frame rails. DO
NOT GREASE THE SURFACE THAT THE
ROLLERS ROLL ON. Grease the posts used to
mount the rollers.
5. Use a dry lubricant at the intersection of the
suspension scissor's shoulder bolts.
6. Check air hose connections and routing to prevent damage during suspension travel.
7. Re-install boot (10) and assemble slides, static
spacer, seat frame, seat cushion, and backrest.
M14001
M14-7
NOTES:
M14-8
M14001
M15001TC
M15-1
M15-1
M15-1
M15-1
M15-5
M15-5
M15-8
M15.TC-1
M15-12
M15-12
M15-12
M15-13
M15-15
M15-15
M15-15
M15-15
M15-18
M15-20
M15-20
M15-21
M15-22
M15-22
M15-28
M15.TC-2
M15001TC
Disassembly
The optional TDI starter utilizes a single stage, turbine driven air motor design to reduce air consumption and improve cranking power at lower air
pressures than vane motor type starters. No external
lubrication is required resulting in reduced maintenance requirements. An automatic trip valve,
mounted at the air supply inlet, shuts off air flow if the
cranking speed exceeds 4200 RPM to prevent
excessive starter speed. The starter assembly
weighs approximately 55 lbs (25 kg).
The following instructions provide information for servicing, parts replacement and reassembly of the
starter. The parts illustration (Figure 15-2) identifies
parts which can be disassembled and replaced by
field service personnel. Parts that are identified as
assemblies should not be disassembled as individual
replacement parts are not available.
1. Remove the six screws (1, Figure 15-2) attaching the exhaust closure plate (2) to the air motor
assembly and remove.
2. Remove the six screws (3, Figure 15-1), automatic trip valve inlet housing(2), and gasket.
Removal
1. Disconnect the air inlet hose at the relay valve.
2. Disconnect the hoses routed to the starter solenoid valve.
3. Cap all hoses to prevent entrance of dirt.
4. Mark the starter mounting flange and the
engine mounting boss to ensure proper alignment when reinstalling.
5. Remove the three capscrews and lockwashers
attaching the starter to the engine and remove
assembly.
Installation
1. Apply a liberal coat of molybdenum disulphide
grease on the starter pinion teeth.
2. Lower starter assembly into position and align
the mounting flange holes using match marks
made during removal with the tapped holes in
the engine.
3. Install the three capscrews and lockwashers
and tighten to 100 ft. lbs. (136 N.m) torque.
4. Install starter relay valve (if removed) at the inlet
port and attach hoses.
3. Mounting Screw
M15001 6/97
M15-1
M15-2
14. Dowel
15. Screw
16. Automatic Trip Valve
17. Screw
18. Gasket
19. Setscrew
20. Motor Housing
21. Bearing
22. Key
23. Sungear & Shaft
24. Ring Gear
25. Retainer Plate
26. Screw
27. Plug
28. Screw
29. Hammer Assembly
30. Retainer Ring
31. Planet Gear Carrier
32. Thrust Washer
33. Planet Gear
34. Needle Bearing
35. Planet Shaft
36. Bearing
37. Spring Washer
38. Gearbox Housing
39. Screw
40. Lockwasher
41. Spacer
42. Bearing
43. Retainer Plate
44. Screw
45. Retainer Nut
46. Spring
47. Keys
48. Set Screw
49. Bendix Assembly
50. Needle Bearing
51. Nut
52. Screw
53. Bendix Drive Housing
M15001 6/97
3. Gear Box
M15001 6/97
3. Lockwasher
4. Gearbox
2. Gearbox Housing
M15-3
11. Support the gearbox housing as shown in Figure 15-5 and press the carrier shaft from the
housing. Remove spring washer (37, Figure 152) and spacer (41). Attach a puller and remove
the bearing (36).
12. If the front bearing (42) requires replacement,
remove the six screws (44) and remove the
retainer plate (43). Tap the bearing out of the
bore.
13. To disassemble the planet gears, remove the
snap ring (30) at each gear pin (35) and press the
pins out by hand. Remove the planet gears (33)
and washers (32). If the planet gear bearings (34)
require removal, press the bearings out.
NOTE: Special tools are available to aid in removal
of the turbine wheel. Tool part No. SS1137 is used for
removal of the turbine wheel mounting screw. Tool
No. SS1135 is used to remove the turbine wheel from
the shaft. Refer to Figures 15-6 and 15-7.
14. Mount the special tool (5) onto the turbine wheel
as shown in Figure 15-6 using #6-32 screws.
Hold the tool with a wrench and insert a 1/4"
allen wrench (4) to remove the screw (3).
Remove the washer (2) and tool
M15-4
4. Allen Wrench
5. Special Tool SS1137
6. #6-32 Screws
1. Shaft
2. Round Stock
3. Arbor Press
M15001 6/97
Parts Inspection
NOTE: Refer to the chart which follows for detailed
inspection information.
Do not allow the shaft to drop out during the next
procedure. Be prepared to catch the shaft to prevent damage to the sungear.
16. Remove six screws (26) and retainer plate (25).
Support the turbine housing and using a .650 in.
(16.5 mm) maximum dia. round, press the turbine shaft (1, Figure 15-8) out of the bearing.
17. Using a puller, remove the bearing (3) and
spacer (4).
18. Tap the bearing (7, Figure 15-2) lightly to
remove. Remove the spring seat (9), spring (10)
and O-ring (8).
Do not attempt further disassembly of the following parts:
Cleaning
NOTE: Do not wash the bendix assembly or shielded
ball bearings in solvents.
1. Clean all metal parts thoroughly using commercially approved solvents such as acetone or
trichloroethylene.
2. Clean aluminum parts using a solvent suitable
for aluminum alloys. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and cautions. Corroded aluminum parts may be cleaned further by immersing
in the following chromic-nitric-phosphoric acid
pickling solution:
M15001 6/97
M15-5
PARTS INSPECTION
(Refer to Figure 15-2 for reference to parts)
PART INSPECTION
WEAR LIMITS
Bendix (49)
Check for loose, worn, missing or damaged parts.
No cracking is acceptable.
Sungear/shaft (23)
Check for cracks, scoring, grooves, chipped or
broken gear teeth. Check for galling or scoring
on bearing journal. Check keyway.
M15-6
M15001 6/97
PART INSPECTION
WEAR LIMITS
Spacer (11)
Check parallelism of end surfaces.
M15001 6/97
M15-7
Assembly
NOTE: Always replace seals, gaskets, and O-rings
during reassembly. Lubricate all O-rings prior to
installation. Always replace Nylock screws (3, 26,
and 44, Figure 15-2). Always replace turbine
bearings (7, 21).
1. Press bearing (21, Figure 15-2) on sungear
shaft (23) until bearing is seated on shaft shoulder. (Press on bearing inner race only.)
2. Install O-ring (8) into groove in housing without
lubricant. Install shaft and bearing assembly (1,
Figure 15-10) into bore of the motor housing. If
bearing cannot be seated by hand pressure,
setup assembly in arbor press and press on
outer race only.
3. Install bearing retainer plate in housing with
notch aligned with vent hole as shown in Figure
15-11. Tighten screws (26, Figure 15-2) to 40
in. lbs. (4.52 N.m) torque.
4. Setup housing in a press as shown in Figure
15-12. Install the bearing spacer (4) over the
shaft.
M15-8
2. Motor Housing
1. Bearing
2. Spring Seat
3. O-Ring
4. Spacer
5. Spring
6. Turbine Shaft
M15001 6/97
4. Allen Wrench
5. Special Tool SS1137
6. #6-32 Screw
M15001 6/97
3. Shaft
4. Key
1. Motor Housing
2. Dowel Pin
3. Gasket
4. Screws
5. ATV
M15-9
M15-10
4. Planet Gear
5. Snap Ring
6. Hammer Assembly
M15001 6/97
3. Spacer
4. Gearbox Housing
6. Rear Bearing
7. Carrier Assembly
8. Spring Washer
9. Gearbox Housing
M15001 6/97
3. Lockring Washer
4. Gearbox
M15-11
Reassembly
Disassembly
M15-12
6. Screw
7. Butterfly Plate
8. Camshaft
Spring
9. O-ring
10. CamShaft
11. Gasket
12. Cover Plate
13. Screw
14. Nut
15. Retainer
16. Lever Arm
17. Stud
18. Lever
Arm Spring
19. Screw
20. Screw
21. Gasket
22. Dowel Pin
M15001 6/97
1. Spring
2. O-Ring Seal
3. Shaft
M15001 6/97
M15-13
NOTES:
M15-14
M15001 6/97
M15001 6/97
M15-15
M15-16
M15001 6/97
FIGURE 15-25. STAGE ONE GEAR CARRIER & GEARBOX - DRIVE HOUSING
21. Male Elbow
39. Button Head Screw
40. Shaft Retention Plate
41. Roll Pin
41A.Roll Pin
42. Planet Gear Shaft
43. Gear Shim
44. Gear Spacer
45. Needle Bearing
46. Planet Gear
47. Gear Carrier
48. O-Ring
49. Ring Gear
50. O-Ring
51. Gear Spacer
52. Needle Bearing
53. Planet Gear
M15001 6/97
M15-17
Disassembly
1. Mark each section of the starter for reference
during assembly: mounting flange (86), gearbox
housing (66), ring gear (49), containment ring
(18), and inlet housing (5). Note the location of
the long male elbow (19) in the nozzle/valve
seat (16). Note that the control line access hole
in the containment ring (18) and the port in the
nozzle/valve seat (16) must line up when reassembled.
2. Mark the turbine rotor (28) and note its direction
of rotation.
3. Have a complete set of o-rings, seals, screws
and miscellaneous hardware available for
assembly.
M15-18
M15001 6/97
The shaft pressing tool must be smaller in diameter than the turbine shaft (1/2").
3. Screw
29. Remove the 1/8" key (29) from the turbine shaft
(38).
30. Press the turbine shaft (38) from the turbine
housing (32). The bearing spacer (36) should
come out also. Remove the bearing spacer (36)
from the turbine shaft (38).
M15001 6/97
The spool valve - nozzle is spring loaded. Exercise caution when separating the inlet housing
(5) from the nozzle/valve seat (16).
40. Remove the spring (10) from the spool valve
(12). Remove the o-ring cap (11) from the spool
valve (12). Remove the shock dampener from
the spool valve (12), if present.
M15-19
2. Clean aluminum parts using an approved aluminum cleaning solution. Soak for five minutes.
Remove parts, rinse in hot water, and dry thoroughly.
3. Clean corroded steel parts with commercially
approved stripper.
CHECK FOR
REQUIREMENTS
Defective Parts Must be Replaced
None permitted.
Needle Bearings (45) and (52) and Rotation, scoring, or flat spots.
Roller Bearings (81)
M15-20
M15001 6/97
NEW
Inches (Millimeters)
1.387 (35.23)
1.198 (30.43)
0.6299-0.6296 (16.000-15.992)
0.5003-0.5001 (12.708-12.703)
0.6294 (15.987)
0.4999 (12.697)
0.5119-0.5116 (13.002-12.995)
0.5114 (12.990)
1.140 (28.96)
1.140 (28.96)
1.516 (38.51)
3.3654-3.3632 (85.481-85.425)
3.3664 (85.507)
0.8712-0.8707 (22.128-22.116)
0.747-0.746 (18.974-18.948)
0.8697 (22.090)
0.745 (18.923)
0.6301-0.6306 (16.005-16.017)
0.5005-0.5010 (12.713-12.725)
0.6307 (16.020)
0.5011 (12.728)
1.5000-1.4994 (38.100-38.085)
1.4984 (38.059)
M15001 6/97
M15-21
The turbine housing o-ring (37) must not be lubricated. It is to be installed dry.
For overhaul, the turbine ball bearings (33) should be
replaced.
For torque values, refer to Table 15-3.
Lb-In (Lb-Ft)
Nm
64 (5)
7.2
150 (12)
16.9
840 (70)
94.9
100 (8)
11.3
15
1.69
64 (5)
7.2
170 (14)
19.2
45 (4)
5.1
150 (12)
16.9
45 (4)
5.1
45 (4)
5.1
64 (5)
7.2
1590 (133)
179.6
150 (12)
16.9
M15-22
M15001 6/97
3. Table
M15001 6/97
1. Ram
2. Bearing Pressing
Tool
3. Table
M15-23
3. Table
32. Lube with o-ring lube and install the o-ring (68)
into the recess on the internal face of the gearbox housing (66).
33. Lube with Aeroshell #6 and set the o-ring (70)
onto the bearing hub (69). Roll the o-ring (70)
into position on the bearing hub (69).
34. Set the bearing hub (69) into the gearbox housing. Take care to line up the four screw holes.
35. Install the four screws (64) to secure the bearing
hub; tighten to 64 Lb-in (7.2 Nm) torque.
M15-24
Be sure to hold the bearing hub (69) and the gearbox housing (66) firmly together while installing
the screws (64) to prevent the o-ring (68) from
shifting out of position.
M15001 6/97
43. Hand install the three gear shafts (54) into the
gear carrier (55) and tap into position.
53. Lube with o-ring lube and install the o-rings (48,
50) onto the ring gear (49). Install the ring gear
(49) onto the turbine housing (32).
M15001 6/97
54. Install the two shims (43) onto the sun gear pin
of the stage one gear carrier (47). One shim
(43) goes on each end.
NOTE: NYE 377AL grease can be used to hold these
shims (43) in position during assembly.
M15-25
55. Install the stage one gear carrier (47) into the
ring gear (49) and onto the turbine shaft sun
gear (38). Rotate the carrier (47) until fully
seated.
56. Check that the anti-rotation pin (93) is firmly
secured in the gearbox housing (66).
57. Install the gearbox housing - gear carrier
(66,55) onto the ring gear (49) and onto the sun
gear of the carrier (47). Rotate fully to seat.
NOTE: Recheck component orientation and screw
hole alignment.
58. Install the seven screws (67) to secure the gearbox housing (66) through to the containment
ring (18).
NOTE: It is recommended to alternately tighten two
opposite screws, to ensure a straight pull, before
tightening all seven screws (67).
59. Carefully tighten the seven screws (67) to
ensure that the o-rings (48, 50) on the ring gear
(49) are not cut. Tighten the four screws (67) to
12 LB-Ft (16.9 Nm) torque.
60. Using Aeroshell #6, grease inner diameter of
split rings (77) and inside diameter of starter
drive spline (78). Install the two split rings (77)
onto the starter drive (78).
61. Install the starter drive (78) onto the output shaft
(55) and into the pre-engage piston (75).
M15-26
M15001 6/97
79. Install the two male elbows (19 and 21). Item 19
goes into the gearbox housing (66) and Item 21
goes into the solenoid valve (63).
Ensure that the speed sensor probe on the control module (60) seats into the counterbore in the
gearbox housing (66).
77. Install the four screws (61) to secure the control
module (60). Tighten to 15 Lb-In (1.69 Nm)
torque.
78. Lube with o-ring lube and install o-ring (65) onto
the gearbox housing (66). Set the solenoid
valve (63) onto the gearbox housing (66) and
secure with the three screws (62). Tighten to 64
Lb-In (7.2 Nm) torque.
M15001 6/97
M15-27
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
A. Check for damaged or contaminated valve seat, damaged O-ring, or damaged spring.
B. Check electrical system powering control module; battery, keyswitch, start switch, wire continuity, fuse.
A. Replace turbine rotor. If turbine hoop failed due to overspeed, reason for overspeed must be determined. Examine
gear train and control module functions.
B. Repair or replace.
D. Broken pinion.
D. Solenoid is open.
Release all system air pressure before attempting to work on starter system components.
M15-28
M15001 6/97
The dry weight of the starter assembly is approximately 70 lbs. (32 kg). Be certain that adequate
lifting devices are available when Removing or
Installing starter.
MAINTENANCE
Removal
1. Mark or tag all air supply lines.
2. Discharge system air pressure completely.
3. Remove all air lines connected to starter
assembly. Cap all connectors to prevent
entrance of dirt.
4. Mark the starter mounting flange and the
engine mounting boss to ensure proper alignment when reinstalling.
5. Remove capscrews securing starter to engine
flywheel housing. Remove starter from the truck
and move to work area for repair.
Disassembly Tips
The following are a few recommended procedures
which will help avoid unnecessary delay in assembly
of the air starter.
1. Always punch mark or scribe adjacent parts on
the motor housing cover, motor housing, gear
case and drive housing, so these members can
be located in the same relative position when
the starter is reassembled.
NOTE: The relative assembled position of the motor
housing cover (6, Figure 15-1), motor housing (13),
gear case (29), and drive housing (58), may vary with
different starter models. If for some reason (parts
replaced), original orientation is lost, refer to Figure
15-22. This starter model orientation code is 1H.
2. Do not remove any part which is a press fit in or
on a sub assembly, unless the removal of that
part is necessary for replacement or repairs.
3. Never save old seals or O-rings for reuse.
4. When grasping a part in a vise, always use
leather covered or copper covered vise jaws to
protect the surface of the part and help prevent
distortion. This is particularly true of threaded
members.
5. Do not press any needle bearings from a part,
unless new needle bearings are to be installed.
Needle bearings are always damaged during
the removal process.
Installation
1. Lower starter assembly into position and align
the mounting flange holes using match marks
made during removal, with the tapped holes in
the engine.
2. Install the capscrews with lockwashers and
torque to standard torque.
3. On all thread connections throughout the system, use non hardening No. 2 Permatex or Loctite Pipe Sealant.
4. Connect all previously removed air lines and
tighten securely.
5. Charge air system and check for leaks.
M15002
M15-1
M15-2
M15002
M15002
M15-3
FIGURE 15-3.
5. Tap the motor housing (13, Figure 15 4) with a
plastic hammer to dislodge it from the intermediate gear case (25).
FIGURE 15-4.
M15-4
FIGURE 15-5.
M15002
6. Grasp the rear of the motor assembly (10, Figure 15-5) and pull it from the rear of the motor
housing. If the motor assembly is difficult to
remove, lightly push the motor pinion which is
on the front of the motor assembly toward the
exhaust side of the motor housing in order to
free motor assembly.
7. Tap the intermediate gear case (25, Figure 156) with a plastic hammer to dislodge it from the
gear case (29).
8. Position the intermediate gear case on a bench
in a copper faced vise so that the intermediate
pinion (27, Figure 15-7) is secured in the jaws of
the vise. Tighten the vise only enough to hold
the intermediate pinion securely.
9. Loosen the intermediate pinion retaining screw
(28) 1 1/2 turns only. Do not remove.
FIGURE 15-6.
FIGURE 15-7.
11. Remove the planet gear frame assembly (Figure 15-8) from the intermediate gear case (25).
Using a sleeve that contacts the outer race of
the front gear frame bearing (23), press the
planet gear frame shaft seal (22) and the front
gear frame bearing (23) from the front end and
out of the rear of the intermediate gear case
(25).
FIGURE 15-8.
M15002
M15-5
8. Place the drive housing in an arbor press, pinion end up. Apply a load to the piston (40) using
the arbor press to compress the piston return
spring (53) before removing the bulkhead
retainer (34).
(Do not use compressed air to load the piston.)
9. Using a screwdriver, remove the bulkhead
retainer while the component is still mounted on
the arbor press.
12. Slide the drive shaft (50) from the drive housing.
13. Pull the piston return spring (53) off the drive
shaft.
Punch or scribe marks on each housing section
for proper alignment and orientation of components during re-assembly.
1. Grasp the drive pinion (64, Figure 15-1) in a
copper faced vise with the starter supported on
the workbench.
2. Remove the drive pinion retaining screw (66).
NOTE: This model uses a left-hand thread.
M15-6
M15002
23. Pull the drive gear (33, Figure 15-1) out of the
gear case (29).
FIGURE 15-10.
M15002
M15-7
Lubrication
Assembly Tips
1. Always press on the inner ring of a ball type
bearing when installing the bearing on a shaft.
2. Always press on the outer ring of a ball type
bearing when pressing the bearing into a bearing recess.
3. Whenever grasping a starter or part in a vise,
always use leather covered or copper covered
vise jaws. Take extra care with threaded parts
or housings.
4. Except for bearings, always clean every part,
and wipe every part, with a thin film of oil before
installation.
5. Check every bearing for roughness. If an open
bearing must be cleaned, wash it thoroughly in
a suitable cleaning solution and dry with a clean
cloth. Sealed or shielded bearings should never
be cleaned. Work grease thoroughly into every
open bearing before installation.
6. Apply a film of O-ring lubricant to all O-rings
before final assembly.
FIGURE 15-11.
M15-8
M15002
11. Slide the front drive gear bearing (45) into the
drive shaft (50).
12. Lubricate with Mobil Oil Company - Mobilith
SHC 007 grease and install the driving clutch
jaw teeth (44) facing up and driven clutch jaw
teeth facing down into the drive shaft (50).
13. Insert the clutch spring (43) into the drive shaft
(50).
14. Insert the clutch spring cup (42) into the drive
shaft (50).
15. Press the inserted parts into the drive shaft (50),
and install the clutch spring cup retainer (41).
FIGURE 15-12.
18. Using O-ring lubricant, lubricate the piston Oring (38) and install it in the groove of the Piston.
6. Lubricate the drive gear with Mobil Oil Company - Mobilith SHC 007.
M15002
M15-9
21. Slide the piston return spring (53) onto the drive
shaft and snap it into the front of the piston so
that it is against the large drive shaft bearing
retainer (52).
M15-10
FIGURE 15-13.
M15002
FIGURE 15-15.
FIGURE 15-14.
M15002
FIGURE 15-16.
M15-11
9. Install the intermediate pinion (27, Figure 1516) making sure that the notches at the rear of
the pinion align with the notches and tangs in
the shaft of the planet gear frame.
10. Clean the threads of the intermediate pinion
retaining screw (28) and apply 2-3 drops of
Permabond HM118 to the threads approximately 3 mm from the end of the screw and
tighten enough to hold assembly together.
11. For final tightening, position the intermediate
gear case so the intermediate pinion is secured
in the jaws of a leather-covered or copper-faced
vise. Tighten the intermediate pinion retaining
screw to 90 ft. lb. (122 N.m) torque.
12. Remove the intermediate gear case from the
vise and set it on a bench.
FIGURE 15-18.
FIGURE 15-19.
M15-12
M15002
FIGURE 15-20.
FIGURE 15-21.
M15002
M15-13
M15-14
M15002
M15002
M15-15
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Remove blockage.
Remove fluid.
TROUBLE: Motor runs, pinion engages, but does not rotate flywheel.
Damaged or broken drive train.
M15-16
M15002
Replace O-rings.
Loose joints.
Make sure that joints fit properly and that starter assembly cap screws are tightened to 60 ft lb. Make sure that all
seals and O rings fit and seal properly at their perimeters.
If they do not, replace with new seals and o rings.
M15002
M15-17
M15-18
M15002
OPERATION
Heavy duty batteries supply 24VDC to each of the
cranking motors through magnetic switches activated
by the key switch on the instrument panel.
When the keyswitch is placed in the Start position,
the magnetic switches close, connecting the motor
solenoid S terminals to the batteries. When the
solenoid windings are energized, the plunger (56,
Figure 17-3) is pulled in, moving the starter drive (71)
assembly forward in the nose housing to engage the
engine flywheel ring gear. Also, when the solenoid
plunger is pulled in, the main solenoid contacts close
to provide current to the motor armature and cranking takes place. When the engine starts, an overrunning clutch in the drive assembly protects the
armature from excessive speed until the keyswitch is
released. When the keyswitch is released, a return
spring causes the drive pinion to disengage.
After the engine is running, a normally closed pressure switch senses engine oil pressure and opens
the electrical circuit to prevent actuation of the
motor(s) after the engine has started.
CRANKING MOTOR
Removal
1. Disconnect battery power using the appropriate
procedure below:
a. If truck is equipped with a battery equalizer,
place the ATEC or DDEC power switch in the
Off position.
b. Open the battery disconnect switch to
remove power from the system.
c. If not equipped with a battery disconnect
switch, remove battery cables using the following sequence if equipped with battery
equalizer:
1.) Remove the battery positive (+) cables
first.
2.) Remove the negative (-) cables last.
2. Mark wires and cables and remove from motor
(1, Figure 17-1) and solenoid (3) terminals.
3. Remove motor mounting capscrews and lock
washers (2).
4. Remove motor assembly from flywheel housing.
Installation
1. Align motor (1, Figure 17-1) housing with the
flywheel housing adaptor mounting holes and
slide into position.
2. Insert motor mounting capscrews and lock
washers (2).
3. Connect marked wires and cables to motor and
solenoid terminals.
4. If the truck is equipped with a battery equalizer,
no battery disconnect and the battery cables
were removed, reinstall in the following
sequence:
a. Install the negative (-) cables first.
b. Install the positive (+) cables.
c. Turn the ATEC or DDEC switch On.
M17001 8/91
3. Solenoid
M17-1
No-Load Test
Refer to Figure 17-2 for the following test setup.
CRANKING MOTOR
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the cranking system is not functioning properly,
check the following to determine which part of the
system is at fault:
Batteries - Verify the condition of the
batteries, cables, connections and charging
circuit. Refer to Section D for additional
information.
Wiring - Inspect all wiring for damage or
loose connections at the keyswitch,
magnetic switches, solenoids and cranking
motor(s). Clean, repair or tighten as
required.
If the above inspection indicates the starter motor to
be the cause of the problem, remove the motor and
perform the following tests prior to disassembly to
determine the condition of the motor and solenoid
and repairs required.
Preliminary Inspection
1. Check the starter to be certain the armature
turns freely.
a. Too much friction; tight, dirty, or worn bearings, bent armature shaft or loose pole shoes
allowing armature to drag.
3. If the armature can be rotated, perform the NoLoad Test before disassembly.
M17-2
M17001 8/91
M17001 8/91
M17-3
M17-4
M17001 8/91
M17001 8/91
32. Nut
33. Lockwasher
34. Screw
35. Field Frame
36. Stud Terminal
37. Bushing
38. Gasket
39. Washers
40. Washer
41. Nut
42. Connector
43. Lockwasher
44. Nut
45. Armature
46. Field Coil
(6 Coils)
47. Shoe
48. Insulator
49. Screw
50. Washer
51. O-Ring
52. Inspection Plug
53. Solenoid
Housing
54. Lockwasher
55. Screw
56. Plunger
57. Washer
58. Boot
59. Washer
60. Spring
61. Retainer
62. Snap Ring
63. Shift Lever
64. Nut
65. O-Ring
66. O-Ring
67. Snap Ring
68. Lever Shaft
69. Drive Housing
70. Screw
71. Drive Assembly
72. Gasket
73. Plug
74. Gasket
75. Brake Washer
76. Screw
77. Lockwasher
78. Lever Housing
79. Washer
80. O-Ring
M17-5
Solenoid Checks
A basic solenoid circuit is shown in Figure 17-4.
Solenoids can be checked electrically using the following procedure.
Test
1. With all leads disconnected from the solenoid,
make test connections as shown to the solenoid, switch terminal and to the second switch
terminal G, to check the hold-in winding (Figure 17-5).
2. Use the carbon pile to decrease the battery voltage to 20 volts. Close the switch and read current.
a. The ammeter should read 6.8 amps maximum.
3. To check the pull-in winding, connect from the
solenoid switch terminal S to the solenoid
motor M or MTR terminal (Figure 17-6).
4. Use the carbon pile to decrease the battery voltage to 5 volts. Close the switch and read current.
a. The ammeter should read 9.0 to 11.5 amps.
NOTE: High readings indicate a shorted winding.
Low readings indicate excessive resistance.
5. To check for grounds, move battery lead from
G (Figure 17-5) and from MTR (Figure 17-6)
to the solenoid case. Ammeter should read
zero. If not, the winding is grounded.
M17-6
M17001 8/91
Assembly
Lubricate all bearings, wicks, and oil reservoirs with
SAE No. 20 oil during assembly.
Bearing Replacement:
1. If any of the bronze bearings are to be replaced,
dip each bearing in SAE No. 20 oil before
pressing into place.
2. Install wick, soaked in oil, prior to installing
bearings.
3. Do not attempt to drill or ream sintered bearings. These bearings are supplied to size. If
drilled or reamed, the I.D. will be too large and
the bearing pores will seal over.
4. Do not cross-drill bearings. Because the bearing is so highly porous, oil from the wick touching the outside bearing surface will bleed
through and provide adequate lubrication.
5. The middle bearing is a support bearing used to
prevent armature deflection during cranking.
The clearance between this bearing and the
armature shaft is large compared to the end
frame bearings.
Motor Assembly:
1. Install the end frame (with brushes) onto the
field frame as follows:
a. Insert the armature (45, Figure 17-3) into the
field frame (35). Pull the armature out of the
field frame just far enough to permit the
brushes to be placed over the commutator.
b. Place the end frame (1) on the armature
shaft. Slide end frame and armature into
place against the field frame.
c. Insert screws (34) and washers (33) and
tighten securely.
2. Assemble lever (63) into lever housing (78) If
removed.
3. Place washer (79) on armature shaft and install
new O-ring (80). Position drive assembly (71) in
lever (63) in lever housing. Apply a light coat of
lubricant (Delco Remy Part No. 1960954) on
washer(75) and install over armature shaft.
Align lever housing with field frame and slide
assembly over armature shaft. Secure with
screws (76) and washers (77).
4. Assemble and install solenoid assembly
through lever housing and attach to field frame.
Install nut (64) but do not tighten at this time.
Install brush inspection plugs (52).
M17001 8/91
M17-7
Magnetic Switch
The magnetic switch is a sealed unit and not repairable.
Removal
1. Remove battery power as described in Cranking Motor Removal, page M17-1.
2. Disconnect cables from the switch terminals
and wires from coil terminals (Figure 17-9).
NOTE: If the magnetic switch has a diode across the
coil terminals, mark the leads prior to removal to
ensure correct polarity during installation.
Installation
1. Attach magnetic switch to the mounting bracket
using the capscrews and lockwashers removed
previously.
2. Inspect cables and switch terminals. Clean as
required and install cables.
M17-8
M17001 8/91
M17001 8/91
M17-9
M17-10
M17001 8/91
M20001TC 6/96
Index
M20-1
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-9
PRESSURE SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-9
To Perform Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-10
INCLINOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-10
RELAYS and Data Storage Trigger Module (DSTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-10
PAYLOAD METER SELF TEST FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-11
CHECKOUT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-12
ON-BOARD WEIGHING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-14
TROUBLESHOOTING THE HAULPAK ON-BOARD WEIGHING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-15 - 18
EXPANDED MEMORY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-19
TIPS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-19
GETTING STARTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-20
INITIAL START UP OF THE EXPANDED MEMORY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-20
COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-21
DOWNLOAD PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-22
PAYLOAD BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-22
Download from Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-23
Set Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-23
Clear Box Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-24
SPECIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-25
Set Max Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-25
Clear Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-26
Box Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-26
Set Truck Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-27
View Data in Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-27
Set Comm Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-28
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-28
ANALYSIS PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-29
ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-29
Data Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-30
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-30
Print Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-31
SET UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-31
Printer Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-32
HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-33
PAYLOAD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-34
EXPANDED MEMORY BOX SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-36
TROUBLESHOOTING EXPANDED MEMORY BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20-38
M20-2
Index
M20001TC 6/96
CAL
LIGHT
ST
ADJ
SFT
INC
CLR
Clear Switch - Erase haul cycle data stored in the Payload Meter.
FEED
M20001C1 12/94
M20-3
OFF
OFF
GREEN
OFF
AMBER
GREEN
RED
AMBER
GREEN
The shovel or loader operator can predict the payload weight by observing these lights. During the
loading operation, a forecast feature flashes a deck
mounted light predicting the payload weight after the
next bucket of material is dropped into the body. The
logic is as follows:
1. If the measured payload is varying 3% or less of
the rated load for more than 0.5 second, the
current load is deemed a steady value.
2. If the difference between the previous steady
value and the current steady value is greater
than 15% of rated load or greater than 10 tons,
the difference is taken to be the size of the current bucket.
3. The average size of previous buckets is added
to the current load. The deck mounted light that
will turn on if another "average" size bucket load
is dropped in the body will blink at one second
intervals. The light will stop blinking when the
wheel brake lock switch is turned "off".
DISPLAY LOGIC
The Payload Meter displays payload weight, the time
of day, or 0 according to the following logic.
1. Time of day is displayed if the wheel brake lock
is off.
2. Payload weight is displayed when the wheel
brake lock is on and the payload is greater than
5% of rated payload.
3. 0 is displayed:
a. For one second after the wheel brake lock is
switched off.
OR
b. The wheel brake lock is on and the payload
is less than 5% of rated payload.
OR
c. The body is up.
M20-4
M20001C1 12/94
CLEAR MEMORY
NOTE: Print out all data stored in memory before
clearing memory to avoid losing important data.
1. Push the "CLEAR" button for 1 second. Display
will blink "CLEA".
2. Push the "CLEAR" button again. Display will
show "CLEA" for 3 seconds then return to normal display logic.
NUMBER OF LOADS
DUMPED.
TOTAL PAYLOAD
HAULED SINCE LAST
CLEAR.
LOAD NUMBER.
M20001C1 12/94
M20-5
Service to the payload meter is limited to the following items: replacement of the printer paper; replacement of the internal battery that backups the payload
meter memory; replacement of the printer head module; and, replacement of the complete payload meter.
Only the printer paper can be replaced without first
removing the complete unit from its cab installation.
ERROR CODES
The payload meter continually monitors the status of
the sensor inputs and relay driver outputs. If an
abnormality is found, an error code is displayed and
all deck lights will illuminate. Refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING THE HAULPAK ON-BOARD WEIGHING SYSTEM" for complete error code information.
M20-6
M20001C1 12/94
Replacing Paper
1. Press the "FEED" button to roll out the remaining paper. Do not forcibly pull the paper out!
M20001C1 12/94
M20-7
FIGURE 20-7.
3. Remove the printer cover by removing the 2
screws which hold the cover (Figure 20-8).
FIGURE 20-11.
FIGURE 20-8.
4. Remove the 2 screws and holders (Figure 20-9)
which hold the printer head to payload meter.
FIGURE 20-9.
5. Remove 3 screws (Figure 20-10) from
PRINTED CARD A and carefully remove card.
FIGURE 20-10.
M20-8
FIGURE 20-12.
M20001C1 12/94
PRESSURE SENSOR
The pressure sensors are mounted on top of each
suspension. The sensors produce a current signal
from 4 to 20 milliamps. The output varies from 4 mA
at 0 psi to 20 mA at 2845 psi (200 kg/cm) in a
straight line.
NOTE: The payload meter displays sensor pressures
in kg/cm during the "Self Test Function". To change
kg/cm to psi, multiply kg/cm by 14.22 .
M20001C1 12/94
3. Connector
M20-9
1. Schrader Valve
2. Valve Assembly
3. Adapter
4. Sensor
INCLINOMETER
As the truck is tilted fore or aft, the weight distribution
between the front and rear axles changes. To compensate for this, the inclinometer measures the inclination of the truck. This data is then sent to the
payload meter so it can calculate the correct payload
weight. The inclinometer is located behind the passenger seat.
Removal
4. Disconnect inclinometer wire lead from harness.
5. Remove the three capscrews, nuts and lockwashers (4, Figure 20-15) and inclinometer (3).
Installation
1. Install inclinometer (3, Figure 20-15) with capscrews, nuts and lockwashers (4).
2. Connect inclinometer wire lead to truck harness.
3. Refer to "Check Out Procedure" to adjust inclinometer.
M20-10
M20001C1 12/94
RELAYS AND
DATA STORAGE TRIGGER MODULE
(DSTM)
There are three light relays and one data storage
trigger module relay (TR-1) located inside the cabinet
with the payload meter. To gain access to these
relays, the top cover of the cabinet must be removed.
Keypad Strokes
Results
Program
Push CAL
Number Check
Printer Check
Push PRINT
Test payload meter printer. Prints date followed by ASCII character set.
Push ADJ
Digital Inputs
Check
Analog Inputs
Check
Push CAL to
cycle through
these checks.
Push SFT
Push CAL to
cycle through
these checks
0 = Open
PA = neural signal.
0 = Wheel lock off, switch closed
1 = Wheel lock on, switch open
bF = Body up signal.
0 = Body down, switch open
1 = Body up, switch closed
SU-1 = right rear, kg/cm
SU-2 = left rear, kg/cm
SU-3 = right front, kg/cm
SU-4 = left front, kg/cm
SLOP = inclinometer angle in degrees, positive = nose up
Adj = gain trimmer input
CELL = battery voltage
M20001C1 12/94
M20-11
Print data
Push CLS folCALP is displayed.
acquired at last lowed by PRINT The date is printed, followed by:
calibration
for one second
CODE = model select inputs at cal
CRR = right rear pressure, kg/cm
CRL = left rear, pressure, kg/cm
CFR = right front pressure, kg/cm
CFL = left front pressure, kg/cm
CINC = incline in degrees, + = nose up
R.cal = total rear susp force, Mton
F.cal = total front susp force, Mton
EMP,W = R.cal + F.cal
Print all
current data
3. Reconnect the sensor. Clear the error by pushing the "CAL" button on the payload meter.
M20-12
M20001C1 12/94
ERROR
CODE
DETECT TIME
DELAY
E-31
E-32
E-33
5.0 sec.
0.1 sec.
5.0 sec.
E-01
E-02
E-03
E-04
5.0 sec.
E-11
E-12
E-13
E-14
5.0 min.
E-41
E-42
5.0 min.
PAPE
Paper jammed.
10 sec.
FULL
E-21
E-22
E-23
E-24
Once an error code has appeared, it may be cancelled by pushing the CAL button or cycling the power.
Inclinometer
2. When loaded, the payload meter should indicate the payload in tons.
2. Loosen the three inclinometer mounting capscrews (4, Figure 20-15) and rotate the inclinometer until 0.0 is indicated on the display.
Tighten the three mounting capscrews and verify that the inclinometer remained at 0.0.
Body Up Switch
To check body up switch connection to the payload
meter system, drive the truck to the unloading area
and dump the load. The payload meter display
should indicate "0" when the body is raised off the
frame.
M20001C1 12/94
M20-13
M20-14
M20001C1 12/94
SUSPENSION
CIRCUITS
E-01
RIGHT REAR
39F, 39FA
E-02
LEFT REAR
39F, 39FB
E-03
RIGHT FRONT
39F, 39FC
E-04
LEFT FRONT
39F, 39FD
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
M20001C2 6/96
CODE
SUSPENSION
TRANSDUCER
CIRCUITS
E-11
RIGHT REAR
39FA
E-12
LEFT REAR
39FB
E-13
RIGHT FRONT
39FC
E-14
LEFT FRONT
39FD
M20-15
CORRECTION
Damaged wiring and/or connectors on pressure trans- Examine wiring and connectors.
ducers.
Damaged harnesses to pressure transducers.
CORRECTION
Damaged wiring and/or connectors on pressure trans- Examine wiring and connectors.
ducers.
Damaged wiring and/or connectors on inclinometer.
Internal short.
CORRECTION
Damaged or loose connections inside payload meter Examine wiring inside payload meter housing for shorts.
housing.
External two wire cable to pressure sensor(s) is damaged and the two wires are shorted together.
M20-16
M20001C2 6/96
CORRECTION
Faulty inclinometer.
Repair mount.
CORRECTION
Memory is full.
Troubleshoot wiring.
Normal.
M20001C2 6/96
M20-17
CORRECTION
Calibrate computer.
Unit is set for metric tons when short tons are desired.
Check to see if jumper wire structure is installed in harness inside payload meter housing.
Troubleshoot system.
CORRECTION
Printer paper exposed to bright sunlight, heat, or cold Replace paper with fresh roll.
and has become inactive.
Printer is cold.
CORRECTION
CORRECTION
Verify +24V on 39G when key and control power are on,
and verify ground (710) connections.
M20-18
M20001C2 6/96
DOWNLOAD
This program provides a means to view and/or download data that is stored in the expanded memory box.
The payload data can be downloaded from the box
and into a PC and stored into a new file, or added to
an existing file.
M20001C3 4/92
ANALYSIS
The analysis program is used to view or print payload
data that has already been downloaded and stored in
a file on the PC. The payload data can be viewed as
a data table or as a graph. The Data Table will display a complete payload history of a particular file.
The Graph Data will display payload data in bar
graphs. To print payload data, in either table or graph
form, the correct printer must be selected in the
"SETUP" option in the Analysis program. Refer to the
"SETUP" option for more information on printers.
Tips For Operation
To leave a screen and return to the previous
screen without saving any changes, just press
the "ESC" key.
Use the "TAB" and "ARROW" keys to highlight
the desired command, then press "ENTER" to
execute the command.
If directions say type "download", type on the key
board only the letters between the " " and not the
parenthesis.
To exit either program and return to the DOS
prompt, hold down the "ALT" key and press the
"X" key.
Press the F1 key at any time for help. Can be
used before selecting a menu option for general
information or, after selecting a menu option for
more detailed information on that selection.
The expanded memory box program disc
contains two sample payload data files called
"ATEST" and "BTEST". These files were included
so personnel can examine them and become
familiar with payload data files ahead of time.
Before the expanded memory box system is
placed into service for the first time, the box must
be "set up" in order to record data correctly. Refer
to "Initial Start Up Of The Expanded Memory
Box".
A method of recording and storing payload data
must be determined. Refer to "Payload Data" for
more information.
Refer to the Analysis program for printing
options.
M20-19
GETTING STARTED
Determine if the program has been loaded onto the
PC hard drive or if the program is located on an auxiliary disc.
Installing The Software
1. Power up (turn on) the personal computer.
2. Insert the floppy disc containing the expanded
memory box program into the drive bay.
3. The screen prompt should be the "C:\". Change
the C:\>> to A:\>> by typing "A:", then press
"ENTER". The prompt should now be "A:\>>".
4. At the A:\>>, type "install", then press "ENTER".
This will create a new subdirectory on the hard
drive called "PAYLOAD". The entire program
will be copied from the floppy disc to the payload subdirectory on the internal hard disc.
When the transfer is complete, the prompt on
the screen should be "C:\>>".
5. Using the special serial cable supplied with the
unit, connect the personal computer to the
expanded memory box.
6. With the ignition key switch and the PC turned
on, the system is ready for use.
7. To start the program, type "DOWNLOAD" or
"ANALYSIS".
NOTE: To start the program on the floppy drive, omit
step 4 completely.
M20-20
M20001C3 4/92
COMMON PROCEDURES
The following steps are the most common procedures that will be used. A short cut method for performing these procedures are given by using the
function keys. It will be assumed that a PC with this
program is already connected to the expanded memory box and both devices are turned on.
For additional information covering these procedures, refer to the appropriate program description.
To download data from the expanded memory
box to a PC.
2. Press "F5".
2. Press "F3".
3. Use "tab" key and "arrow" keys to select (highlight) desired file. Press "ENTER".
M20001C3 4/92
M20-21
DOWNLOAD PROGRAM
This program provides a means to view and/or download data that is stored in the expanded memory box. The
payload data can be downloaded from the box and into a PC and stored into a new file, or added to an existing file.
1. At the C:\>> prompt, type "download" and press the "ENTER" key two times.
The download screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-17. Any of the functions across the top can be selected by
holding down the "ALT" key and pressing the first letter that appears in the desired selection.
Payload Box
To select the payload box menu, hold down the "Alt" key and press "P". The payload menu screen will appear as
shown in Figure 20-18. Use the arrow keys to select (highlight) the desired menu item and press "ENTER".
M20-22
M20001C3 4/92
Download from Box F3 - This selection will allow downloading of payload data from the expanded memory
box to a PC. Two options are available to download payload data. One is to make a new file name to store the
payload data into and the other is to add the payload data to an existing file. Can also press "F3".
NOTE: When the expanded memory is downloaded into a file, all the data in the expanded memory box will be
erased. The data in the payload meter memory will not be erased, but is no longer accessible electronically. A
printout from the payload meter can provide data since the last CLEAR of the meter.
1. The computer screen will ask for a file name to save the data under. If the data is to be added into an existing
file, go to Step 2. If the data is to be stored under a new name, go to Step 3.
2. If the data is to be added into an existing file, press the "TAB" key. Then use the arrow keys to highlight the file
that the data is to be added to, then press "ENTER". Now go to Step 4.
3. The data can be given a file name using letters or numbers up to eight characters long. Do not add a period
and any characters after the eight character file name. The program will automatically assign a .DB extension
to the file name. After selecting a file name, press "ENTER".
4. The screen will provide the approximate time that will be required to download the data.
5. Press "ENTER" again to download the data. The screen will then display the data just retrieved from the
memory box and is now stored in a file.
6. Push "Esc" key to return to main menu screen.
Set Date & Time
This selection is for setting or changing the date and time. The Set Date & Time menu screen will appear as shown
in Figure 20-19. This information is stored in the expanded memory box for documenting each payload.
M20001C3 4/92
M20-23
M20-24
M20001C3 4/92
SPECIAL
To select the special menu, hold down the "Alt" key and press "S". The Special menu screen will appear as shown
in Figure 20-21. Use the arrow keys to select the desired menu items listed below and press "ENTER".
M20001C3 4/92
M20-25
Clear Meter - This selection will clear all payload data stored in the Payload Meter memory.
NOTE: The data in the expanded memory box will not be cleared.
1. Arrow down to highlight "Clear Meter". Press "ENTER".
Box Info - This selection will allow you to view the stored information in the expanded memory box. This
information can also be viewed at any time by pushing the "F5" key.
1. Arrow down to highlight "Box Info". Press "ENTER". The screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-23.
NOTE: The battery voltage refers to the memory backup battery in the expanded memory box.
M20-26
M20001C3 4/92
Set Truck Number - This selection allows you to enter the truck identification for storage into the expanded
memory box. All future download information retrieved from this payload system will be identified by the
number you enter here.
1. Arrow down to highlight "Set Truck Number". Press "ENTER".
2. Press tab key to select the change box and then enter the truck identification number.
3. Press "ESC" to cancel the command or press "ENTER" to execute the command and save any changes.
View Data in Box - This selection will allow you to view payload data stored in the expanded memory box without
erasing the information.
1. Arrow down to highlight "View Data in Box". Press "ENTER".
2. The screen will display a message indicating the amount of time to download the information for viewing.
3. Press "ENTER" to view the data. Use the arrow keys to scroll up or down through the data.
4. Press "ESC" to return to the main menu screen.
M20001C3 4/92
M20-27
Set Comm Port - This option tells the PC which serial communication port to use to communicate to the
expanded memory box.
1. Arrow down to highlight "Set Comm Port". Press "ENTER". The screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-25.
2. Press tab key.
3. Use the arrow keys to select the comm port desired. Press "ENTER" to select the comm port.
NOTE: If the incorrect communication port is selected, an error message will appear the next time the PC tries to
access the expanded memory box. Change communication port selection, close out of the PAYLOAD PROGRAM,
open the PAYLOAD program and try again.
M20-28
M20001C3 4/92
ANALYSIS PROGRAM
The analysis program is used to view or print payload data that has already been downloaded and stored in a file
on the PC. The payload data can be viewed or printed as a data table or as a graph. The Data Table will display a
complete payload history of a particular file. The Graph will display payload data in bar graphs. To print payload
data, in either table or graph form, the correct printer must be selected in the "SETUP" option in the Analysis program. Refer to the "SETUP" option for more information on printers.
To start the Analysis program:
1. At the C:\>> disc drive prompt, type "analysis" and press the "ENTER" key The analysis screen will appear as
shown in Figure 20-27.
M20001C3 4/92
M20-29
Data Tables - This selection will allow you to view any stored data file for analysis. This function is also directly
accessible from the main menu screen by pressing "F3".
1. Arrow down to highlight "Data Tables". Press "ENTER". The screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-29.
2. Press the "TAB" key and then use the "ARROW" keys to highlight the desired file.
3. After selecting a file, press "ENTER" to display the stored information in the file. Use the arrow (or pg down or
pg up) keys to move through and view the file. For more information on data files, refer to "PAYLOAD DATA"
in this section.
4. Press "ESC" key to return to the main menu screen.
Graphics - This selection will provide a bar graph view of any selected data file.
1. Arrow down to highlight "Graphics". Press "ENTER". The screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-29.
2. Press the "TAB" key and then use the "ARROW" keys to highlight the desired file.
3. After highlighting a file, press "ENTER" to display the stored information in graph form. All of the data stored in
the file will be displayed in graph form. The vertical column (Number of Loads) indicates the number of loads
hauled for each payload range. The horizontal column (Payload, Tons) indicates the payload ranges in tons.
The bar graph scales will automatically adjust based on the amount of data stored in the file. For more information on data files, refer to "PAYLOAD DATA" in this section.
4. (OPTIONAL) To print the graph, connect a compatible printer to the PC and press "P" while the graph is displayed on the screen.
NOTE: Refer to the "Setup" menu to select the correct printer before printing. If an attempt to print is made without
a printer connected, the program will "lock up" and a warm boot (press "ctrl", "alt" and "del" at the same time) will
be required to reset the PC.
5. Press "ESC" key to return to the main menu screen.
M20-30
M20001C3 4/92
Print Report - This selection will allow you to print a report identical to the screen display seen in "Data Tables"
in this section for the selected file. Refer to the "Setup" menu to select the correct printer before printing. For
more information on printed reports, refer to "Load Data ".
NOTE: Refer to the "Setup" menu to select the correct printer before printing. If an attempt to print is made without
a printer connected, the program will "lock up" and a warm boot (press "ctrl", "alt" and "del" at the same time) will
be required to reset the PC.
Setup Menu
Setup Printer - To print payload data, in either table or graph form, the correct printer must be selected. Only
those printers listed or 100% compatible printers to those listed will be able to print payload data. Use the
PRINTER CHART to select the appropriate printer.
1. Hold down the "Alt" key and press "S". A screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-30.
2. Press "ENTER". A screen will appear as shown in Figure 20-31.
3. Press the "tab" key once and the selected printer option will become highlighted. The selection that becomes
highlighted is the one with the period inside the ().
4. Use the "arrow" keys to select the appropriate printer and press "ENTER" to save the change.
NOTE: The printer option can also be selected by holding down the "alt" key and pressing the same letter key that
is highlighted in the desired printer description.
M20001C3 4/92
M20-31
Refer to the Printer Chart below for additional printers that do not appear on the menu screen in Figure 20-31.
PRINTER CHART
Selection
Printers
Epson MX
Epson FX
Epson FX
Epson LQ
Epson 24 pin;
Star Gemini 24 pin;
Panasonic 24 pin printers
HP Laser Jet/
HP Desk Jet
Toshiba 24 pin
M20-32
M20001C3 4/92
HELP MENU
This selection provides information about the analysis program.
Help - Access information about the program.
1. Hold down the "Alt" key and press "H".
2. Select Help and press "ENTER".
3. Press "ESC" key to return to the main menu screen.
M20001C3 4/92
M20-33
PAYLOAD DATA
The customer must choose a method to store and analyze all the data that is collected from the expanded memory
box from the fleet of trucks. There are several options available depending on the use of the payload data.
Each truck that is equipped with an expanded memory box must be given a truck identification number containing
10 characters or less (done during initial setup). The truck I.D. number is stored in the expanded memory box and
is part of the payload data information. When the payload data is downloaded into a PC, a computer file name must
be chosen containing 8 characters or less.
Payload data records can be maintained separately for each truck in one particular computer file, and can be
added to at any time by downloading more data from the same truck into the same computer file. In this case, a
computer file name that reflects that particular truck may work best for record keeping.
OR, over a given time span, (one week for example) the payload data from all trucks can be added together into
one file. In this case, a file name that reflects that particular week may work the best. Several truck I.D. numbers
will show up in the payload data file. (See Figure 20-17, sample print out of ATEST.DB data file.) If this method is
used, it is recommended that only the same size of trucks have their data added together into one file. Otherwise,
the payload data in a particular file will not accurately reflect the possibility of the trucks being underloaded or overloaded because different truck payload capacities are represented.
The payload data stored in a file is not sorted by payload size or date. It will appear in the order that the data was
transferred into the file. If the payload data needs to be sorted by date, payload size, etc, the "PARADOX Data
Base Program" is compatible with the payload data files created by the expanded memory box program. The PARADOX Data Base Program is available at most computer retail outlets or mail order companies.
When the data file is viewed, a summary of the file is shown in the upper left corner. The data file name is also
shown.
M20-34
M20001C3 4/92
When a payload data file is viewed in the graph form, it will appear as shown in Figure 20-18. All payloads are
sorted by payload tons across the bottom and the number of loads carried along the side. The scales for tons and
the number of loads carried automatically adjust to best suit the size and volume of data in the file.
M20001C3 4/92
M20-35
SERVICE
NOTE: Download all payload data from the
expanded memory box to a PC before making any
repairs to avoid loosing payload data. If the battery
goes dead or is unplugged from the payload memory
card, all payload data, truck I.D. number and date will
be erased. Refer to "Initial Start Up Of The Expanded
Memory Box" to reset the truck I.D. number and date.
Removal
1. Turn key switch off. Disconnect all wire harnesses from expanded memory box.
2. Remove mounting screws and expanded memory box.
Installation
1. Be certain that mounting surface on the
expanded memory box and on the truck is clean
and free of foreign material.
NOTE: Foreign material between the box and
mounting surface can distort the box as the mounting
hardware is tightened, and can cause damage to the
payload memory card.
2. Install box and tighten mounting hardware.
3. Connect wire harnesses to appropriate connectors.
Disassembly
1. Loosen the four corner screws on end cover (1,
Figure 20-19). Do not remove screws from end
cover as they are held in place by the gasket.
2. Remove end cover (1) and carefully unplug wire
connector from the payload memory card (6).
3. Unlock lever (5) and carefully pull payload
memory card from the box using handle (1, Figure 20-20).
4. Loosen the four corner screws retaining end
cover (4, Figure 20-19). Do not remove screws
from end cover as they are held in place by the
gasket. Remove end cover.
M20-36
4. End Cover
5. Lever
6. Payload Memory
M20001C3 4/92
Assembly
Battery Replacement
NOTE: If the battery goes dead or is unplugged from
the payload memory card, all payload data, truck I.D.
number and date will be erased. Refer to "Initial Start
Up Of The Expanded Memory Box" to reset the truck
I.D. number and date.
1. Carefully unplug battery connector (5, Figure
20-20) from payload memory card (3).
2. Remove nut, screw and washer and remove
battery (2) from clamp.
3. Install new battery in clamp and attach to payload memory card with screw, washer and nut.
4. Carefully plug battery connector (5) into payload memory card (3).
Wire Connections
Refer to Figure 20-21 for wire connections made on
the expanded memory box.
4. Pin Connector
5. Battery Connector
M20001C3 4/92
4. Connector (To
Modular Mining or
Truck Harness
5. Connector (To
Payload Meter)
M20-37
M20-38
M20001C3 4/92
91466
M21001
M21-1
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Electronic Control Module
The ECM contains the microprocessor which receives
information from the various system sensors and operator input. All sensor circuits are constantly monitored during operation for correct voltage levels,
sensor failure, and open or shorted electrical circuits.
The incoming information is compared to stored information which determines acceptable operating parameters for oil pressure, coolant level, etc. for current
operating conditions. If all conditions are acceptable,
calculated information is then sent to driver circuits to
control the fuel injectors for controlling engine performance. If conditions are not within the programmed
operation limits, a warning system alerts the driver of
possible problems and, depending on the malfunction
and vehicle application, may initiate an engine protection sequence.
Various forms of information storage memory are used
to store engine operation parameters and diagnostic
data. Performance information for a particular application is programmed into the system memory by the
manufacturer prior to final testing. Information regarding accumulated engine operation hours, fuel consumption, and engine idle hours is stored for retrieval
by service personnel. Various functions can be re-programmed by the user through the use of a portable
diagnostic data readout device. Unauthorized re-programming is prevented by use of a security password
prior to re-programming.
M21-2
91468
3. Fuel Return
4. Fuel Inlet
M21001
91471
TBS
The turbo boost pressure sensor (TBS) (Figure 21-5)
monitors turbocharger boost pressure and sends a
voltage signal porportional to pressure to the ECM.
OPS
The oil pressure sensor (OPS) monitors engine oil
pressure.
91467
91470
M21001
M21-3
DIAGNOSTICS
Low coolant level, low engine oil pressure, high crankcase pressure, and/or high oil temperature can cause
this to occur. If one of these conditions is detected,
both lights are illuminated, the error code is logged,
and the ECM begins a programmed engine protection
sequence. High idle speed is reduced to 1675 RPM and
the "AS" signal is interupted to stop propulsion.
The red "Engine Monitor Main" or "Engine Monitor
Second" light will illuminate for approximately five seconds after the key switch is turned on.
NOTE: The amber and red "Main" lights receive input
from the master ECM while the amber and red "Second" lights receive input from the receiver ECM.
M21-4
M21001
BATTERY EQUALIZER
The majority of the accessory and control circuits
operate at 24VDC. The Electronic Engine Controls
however, require 12VDC. A battery equalizer system is
utilized to obtain the required 12VDC and insure that
the two 12 volt, series wired batteries are charged and
discharged equally. A monitoring device warns the
operator of a malfunction in the battery equalizer system or the battery charging alternator by illuminating
an amber light on the instrument panel.
The battery equalizer is mounted in a box on the right
hand deck. This box also contains the battery equalizer
monitor, circuit breakers, and the main battery disconnect switch. (See Figure 21-7.)
The DDR includes a customer replaceable PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory). As new diagnostic
techniques are developed which make use of the DDR,
they can be programmed on a PROM by the manufacturer and installed in the field by DDR users.
The DDR is attached to the diagnostic connector located below the instrument panel. Refer to the DDEC
II Diagnostic Troubleshooting Guide for complete information on its use and procedures to follow for systematic ally troubleshooting engine problems,
retrieving stored data, etc.
M21001
4. Circuit Breakers
5. Battery Disconnect
Switch
6. Disconnect Switch
Handles
M21-5
Troubleshooting
Normal battery maintenance procedures should be
followed according to the intervals specified in the
Lubrication and Service section of this manual. Refer
to the Battery information in this section for detailed
instructions regarding proper battery maintenance and
service procedures. Prior to troubleshooting the battery equalizer system, inspect all battery circuit connections for excessive corrosion, loose cables, ground
connections etc. Use the following procedure to check
the system if the warning light on the instrument panel
illuminates during truck operation:
5. If the difference between the voltage measurements above exceeds 0.75 volts, the battery
equalizer is defective and should be replaced.
6. If the alternator voltage regulator is operating
within limits and the voltage measured in step 2.
is within limits, the Battery Equalizer monitor is
defective and should be replaced.
M21-6
M21001
M21002
M21-1
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Electronic Control Module
The ECM contains the microprocessor which receives
information from the various system sensors and operator input. All sensor circuits are constantly monitored during operation for correct voltage levels,
sensor failure, and open or shorted electrical circuits.
The incoming information is compared to stored information which determines acceptable operating parameters for oil pressure, coolant level, etc. for current
operating conditions. If all conditions are acceptable,
calculated information is then sent to driver circuits to
control the fuel injectors for controlling engine performance. If conditions are not within the programmed
operation limits, a warning system alerts the driver of
possible problems and, depending on the malfunction
and vehicle application, may initiate an engine protection sequence.
Various forms of information storage memory are used
to store engine operation parameters and diagnostic
data. Performance information for a particular application is programmed into the system memory by the
manufacturer prior to final testing. Information regarding accumulated engine operation hours, fuel consumption, and engine idle hours is stored for retrieval
by service personnel. Various functions can be re-programmed by the user through the use of a portable
diagnostic data readout device. Unauthorized re-programming is prevented by use of a security password
prior to re-programming.
M21-2
91468
3. Fuel Return
4. Fuel Inlet
M21002
TRS
The Timing Reference Sensor (TRS) monitors crankshaft rotation and determines when any cylinder is
about to fire.
OTS
The Oil Temperature Sensor (OTS) monitors oil temperature in the turbocharger supply line.
91470
PTO Counts
WITH OUT FUEL - SAVER:
NOTE: The throttle signal enters the ECM on the PTO
(Power Take-Off) pin. To check throttle input counts
using the DDR, select PTO Counts.
The Throttle Position Sensor (Figure 21-4) is contained
in the electronic foot pedal. When the operator depresses the accelerator pedal, a variable voltage signal
is sent to the ACC/RET interface ACC card located in
the control cabinet and then to the ECM. The ACC card
also provides the ECM with a fixed voltage signal for
increased engine RPM during dynamic retarding and
when truck speed is over 3 MPH (4.83 km/h) if the
engine idle switch is placed in the high idle position.
EFPA
The Electronic Foot Pedal Assembly (EFPA) (Figure
21-4) is the accelerator pedal controlled by the operator to vary the power demand.
M21002
M21-3
TBS
SEL
91467
M21-4
M21002
DIAGNOSTICS
The ECM continuously monitors itself and other system
components including sensors, injectors and associated wiring and connectors. If a fault is detected, the
ECM illuminates the Check Engine light (or a check
engine message on the HMS overhead display) and
stores a malfunction code. These codes can be read
out by using a Diagnostic Data Reader (DDR) as shown
in Figure 21-6.
Whenever a fault is detected, the ECM will substitute a
default value for the component or circuit that has
failed. If the fault clears up, the actual sensor value is
again used.
When using the DDR, codes are broken down into two
types:
Active Codes These codes are currently
causing the Check Engine or Stop Engine lights
to illuminate (or Check Engine or Stop Engine
message on the HMS overhead display).
Historical Codes These codes can be either
currently active or active in the past. Certain
codes on the DDR will also display an audit trail
of their occurrence(s).
M21002
M21-5
NOTES
M21-6
M21002
SECTION N
OPERATORS CAB
INDEX
TRUCK CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-1
DOOR WINDOW SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-2
CAB DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Door Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Door Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-3
WINDSHIELD AND REAR WINDOW SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-5
CAB COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
WINDSHIELD WIPER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3-1
WINDSHIELD WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3-2
WIPER CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3-3
OPERATOR COMFORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4
OPERATOR SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-1
Adjustment Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-1
SEAT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-2
HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-5
HEATER COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-6
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-6
OPERATING CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5
STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-1
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-1
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-4
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-1
SELECTOR SWITCH CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
DYNAMIC RETARDING PEDAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
HOIST CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-7
THROTTLE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-8
N01007
Index
N1-1
NOTES:
N1-2
Index
N01007
TRUCK CAB
TRUCK CAB
Removal
The operators cab shell is removable as an assembly
to provide clearance for all interior cab components if
this is desirable.
1. To remove the cab shell, disconnect electrical
wiring to dome lights and/or fans if these are
installed. Disconnect windshield wiper and
remove windshield washer bottle.
2. Remove the threshold plate (2, Figure 2-1) from
both door openings. Remove capscrews, flat
washers and lockwashers securing the cab
shell perimeter to the truck deck.
3. Loosen the lower heater mounting hardware
and bracket to break the seal between the
heater and filter plenum.
1. Door Assembly
2. Threshold Plate
3. Side Glass
N02005
Installation
1. When service procedures are complete, lift cab
back into position on the truck deck, making
sure the rubber sealing strips are in good condition and properly located.
2. Position the two threshold plates in the door
openings. Secure the cab to the truck deck with
capscrews. Tighten capscrews to 25 ft. lbs. (34
N.m) torque.
3. Reconnect all wiring and air lines disconnected
at removal. Install windshield washer bottle.
Truck Cab
7. Sliding Window
N2-1
The repair procedures for the right and left sliding glass
windows are identical. (See the special note which follows concerning the optional R-8 insulation cab.)
N2-2
Truck Cab
7. Rivet
8. Machine Screw
9. Machine Screw
N02005
Removal
Removal
Installation
1. Install window assembly (7, Figure 2-1) into
door opening, secure with capscrews, flat washers and acorn nuts. Tighten nuts to 7 ft. lbs.
(9.5 N.m) torque.
Disassembly
1. The inside rear surface of the window assembly
is riveted together. These rivets (7, Figure 2-2)
must be removed to remove the window panes.
At the forward edge of the stationary glass pane
there is a screw, top and bottom. Remove these
two screws to free the stationary pane.
Installation
1. Attach sling and hoist to door assembly, lift door
up to the deck and position door hinges to cab
hinges.
2. Align door on hinges and install hinge pins,
install acorn nut on the center hinge.
CAB DOOR
N02005
Truck Cab
N2-3
Installation
1. The latch handle assembly components may be
installed exactly as removed. For ease of installation, leave mounting screws and nuts slightly
loose until all actuating rods are installed into
their lever assembly. Tighten all fasteners
securely. Check for operation of both the inner
and outer handles and locks to insure that operation is proper and the door is secure when
closed. Install access panel using machine
screws.
Disassembly
1. Unclip locking clips from lock and actuator rods
(3, 5, & 6, Figure 2-3). These rods need only to
be disconnected at one end. Pull rod ends from
their respective levers.
2. Remove machine screws to remove inner latch
handle assembly and armrest which is attached
to the same panel. The armrest need not be
removed from the panel unless it must be
repaired. Note the nut retaining the inner latch
handle assembly in the panel like the one that
secures the outer latch assembly. Remove this
nut to free the inner latch handle assembly from
the panel. Do not attempt to disassemble latch
handle assembly. If defective or inoperative
after checking and lubricating the pivot points, it
should be replaced with a new assembly.
N2-4
4. Handle
5. Rod
6. Rod
7. Lever
8. Housing
9. Handle
10.Retaining Ring
Truck Cab
N02005
N02005
Truck Cab
N2-5
NOTES:
N2-6
Truck Cab
N02005
CAB COMPONENTS
WINDSHIELD WIPER - AIR OPERATED
Removal
1. Relieve all system air pressure prior to disconnecting any air lines.
The back and forth motion of the paddle is transmitted to the wiper blade by the paddle shaft.
Installation
1. Install wiper motor to mounting bracket and
connect air lines at air connections and secure
wiper motor to mounting bracket.
2. Connect wiper blade arm and windshield
washer tubing.
3. Recharge system air pressure and check for
proper operation of wiper motor and wiper blade
position.
Disassembly
1. Remove the capscrews (16, Figure 3-2) securing cover (12) and gasket (11) to motor housing
(10). Remove keeper ring (7) and flat washer
(8) if paddle and shaft must be removed.
2. Remove machine screws (1) from end cover (2)
and take off end cover and O- ring (3).
3. Internal batter (4), valve and shuttle (5) should
be inspected for wear or damage. Replace
components as necessary.
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Wash all metal parts in approved cleaning solvent.
2. Discard O-rings and replace with new.
3. Inspect all internal components and replace as
necessary.
Assembly
1. Slide the paddle and shaft assembly (9, Figure
3-2) into the shaft opening in motor housing
(10). Replace flat washer (8) and keeper ring
(7).
N03004
Cab Components
N3-1
13. Flatwasher
14. Keeper Ring
15. Exchange Valve
16. Capscrew
Installation
Removal
1. Relieve all system air pressure prior to disconnecting the air lines.
2. Remove tubing from valve ports and mark location for re-installation.
3. Remove knob, shaft mounting nut, washer and
remove valve from instrument panel.
N3-2
Cab Components
N03004
Installation
1. Insert wiper motor assembly pivot (5, Figure 34) through hole in windshield frame and install
mounting capscrews and washers.
2. Install pivot washer (7), nut (6) and cap (4).
3. Install wiper arm (1) in location noted during
removal and install spring washer (3) and
retaining nut (2).
4. Connect windshield washer hose and motor
wire connector.
5. Install access panel and machine screws.
6. Verify proper operation and arc of wiper arm.
Reposition arm on pivot splines if blade contacts windshield weather-strip.
5. Pivot
6. Nut
7. Washer
N03004
3. Windshield
Cab Components
N3-3
WINDSHIELD WASHER
AIR HORN
Operation
The air horn is actuated by depressing the horn button in the center of the steering wheel. When the button is depressed, the air horn solenoid is activated
allowing system air pressure to pass through the
horn mechanism.
N3-4
4. Strainer
5. Jar
6. Bracket
Cab Components
N03004
OPERATOR COMFORT
OPERATOR SEAT
The operator's seat provides a fully adjustable cushioned ride for the driver's comfort and ease of operation. The seat is independently mounted from the cab
for easy maintenance and repair.
Adjustment
The following adjustments must be made while sitting
in the seat.
1. To adjust fore/aft location of seat:
a. Raise slide adjustment lever (2, Figure 4-1).
b. Move seat backward or forward as desired.
2. To adjust seat height:
a. Depress the Height Adjust lever (1).
b. Adjust seat assembly to desired height.
3. To adjust weight:
3. Tilt Latch
4. Capscrew
N04006
5. Lower Housing
6. Boot
7. Capscrews,
Lockwashers & Nuts
Installation
1. Mount seat assembly to seat riser. Install capscrews, lockwashers and nuts. Tighten capscrews to 35 ft. lbs. (47.5 N.m) torque.
2. Install stop cable ends (2, Figure 4-2) if they
were removed.
Operator Comfort
N4-1
Disassembly
1. Remove springs (3, Figure 4-3) from spacer bar
(39) and link (2).
2. Remove bolts and washers (9) and nuts (4)
securing back cushion (5) to side brackets (1 &
7) and remove cushion.
3. Remove link (2) from back of cushion only if
replacement is necessary.
4. Before starting any further disassembly, adjust
the seat height to highest position and turn the
weight adjustment lever clockwise to release
tension from spring (18).
Inspection
1. Check the shock absorber (30) for oil leakage
around shock absorber shaft. The unit should
have a stiff action in one direction, if not,
replace with a new unit.
Assembly
1. Mount rollers (25) onto lower housing (27) if
removed or replaced.
Seat spring (18) is under pressure. Use care
when removing bearing shafts from seat suspension.
N4-2
Operator Comfort
N04006
N04006
12. Spring
13. Latch
14. Gear & Shaft
Assembly
15. Gear & Shaft
Assembly
16. Seat Suspension
17. Nylon Slider Block
18. Spring
19. Bearing Shaft
20. Nylon Tube Bearing
21. Spring
Operator Comfort
32. Locknut
33. Suspension Boot
34. Upper Housing
35. Spring
36. Cross Link Assembly
37. Locknut & Washer
38. Capscrews
39. Spacer Bar
40. Cable
41. Bolt, Washer, & Nut
N4-3
Removal
Coolant system is pressurized by regulated air
pressure and thermal expansion of water. DO
NOT remove radiator cap while engine is hot.
Severe burns may result.
1. Relieve radiator pressure by slowly loosening
radiator cap.
HEATER
Heat for the cab is provided by passing coolant from
the engine cooling system through a heater core.
Blowers move air across the heating core which
warms the air for heating or defrosting.
For heater operation, start the engine and allow it to
warm up. Move the control lever to the heat position
and turn the blower to 1, 2, or 3 for desired air flow.
To increase the temperature, move the TEMP lever
to ON. The nearer the TEMP lever gets to ON,
the higher the output of the heater. Move the control
lever between ON and OFF to select a comfortable temperature.
NOTE: Figure 4-4 illustrates the parts contained in
the heater assembly. Refer to Section M for
detailed information regarding air conditioning
system maintenance and repair if equipped.
N4-4
Operator Comfort
N04006
Installation
1. Install motor blower assembly into casing
assembly. Secure blower assembly with screws
removed previously.
2. Using identification markings made during
removal, reconnect all electrical wiring.
3. Slide heater core into heater assembly.
4. Attach fittings to heater core.
N04006
Operator Comfort
N4-5
4. Unplug motor wire and repeat fan removal procedure at other end of motor.
N4-6
Assembly
1. Install gasket (20) and blower housing on
blower motor.
NOTE: To insure proper fan rotation, align match
marks made during disassembly.
2. Press fan onto motor shaft. Install two nuts
securing blower housing to end of motor.
3. Repeat Steps 1 & 2 for other fan and housing
assembly.
4. Install both fan housings to blower mounting
plate (5) using screws previously removed.
Operator Comfort
N04006
HEATER COVER
FILTER
Installation
Service
N04006
Operator Comfort
N4-7
NOTES:
N4-8
Operator Comfort
N04006
OPERATOR CONTROLS
STEERING COLUMN
Removal
1. Shut down engine and relieve hydraulic pressure from steering accumulators. Chock wheels
and disconnect positive battery cable at the batteries.
NOTE: Lower steering shaft sections need not be
removed from the truck for steering column service
unless parts are damaged or worn to the point of
replacement.
2. Remove electrical wiring that would prevent
steering column from being removed. Remove
capscrew, lockwasher and nut to disconnect
steering column assembly from the steering
shaft assembly at the upper end of the universal
joint. The universal joint may be removed by
removing the lower fasteners.
3. Support the steering wheel and column assembly and remove mounting bolts from the upper
and lower column mount.
4. Move the steering column assembly to work
area for service.
Installation
1. Align universal joint splines with steering column shaft and slide together. Raise steering
column into position.
2. Secure the steering column to mounting brackets with capscrews. Tighten lower bracket to 13
ft. lbs. (18 N.m) torque and to instrument panel
mount with 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m) torque.
3. Tighten universal joint capscrews to 58 ft. lbs.
(79 N.m) torque.
4. Hook-up electrical wiring previously disconnected.
Disassembly
1. Remove horn button (1, Figure 5-2) and detach
horn wire.
2. Remove retainer (3) and nut (2).
3. Remove steering wheel using puller VS5386.
N05019 7/95
5. Universal Joint
6. Lower Steering Shaft
7. Steering Control Unit
Operator Controls
N5-1
3. Retainer
4. Lower Contact
Assembly
3. Lock Retainer
4. Steering Shaft Lock
N5-2
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-3
22. Disassemble steering shaft assembly by removing centering spheres (37, Figure 5-5) and preload spring (38).
23. Remove machine screws (40) and support
housing (41).
24. Turn signal rod (45) will be removed with support housing assembly.
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean all parts with a lint free cloth lightly saturated with a cleaning solvent.
2. Check all parts for excessive wear and/or damage, replace any parts which are damaged.
Assembly
1. Reassemble turn signal rod (45, Figure 5-5) in
support housing (41).
FIGURE 5-8. PIVOT PIN REMOVAL
1. Pivot Pin
N5-4
Operator Controls
2. VS5389 Tool
N05019 7/95
15. Install upper bearing spring (7, Figure 5-5), carrier assembly (6) and steering shaft lock (5).
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-5
4. Brake Pedal
5. Hoist Control Valve
6. Selector Switch
7. Engine Shutdown
Switch
8. Engine Idle Switch
N5-6
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-7
INSTRUMENT PANEL
N5-8
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
INSTRUMENT PANEL
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
If installed, this OPTIONAL Emergency Engine Shutdown button must be depressed and held until
engine stops.
NOTE: This switch is Engine Shutdown ONLY. The
keyswitch must still be turned "off" to turn off 24VDC
accessories and activate the hydraulic bleeddown
sequence.
The operator must understand the function and operation of each instrument and control. Many control
functions are now identified with International symbols that the operator should learn to recognize
immediately. This knowledge is essential for proper
and safe operation of the truck.
NOTE: Items that are marked OPTIONAL do not
apply to every truck.
Refer to Figures 5-10 and 5-11 for the location of
the following items:
N5-10
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
The water temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the coolant in the engine cooling system. The
temperature range after engine warm-up and truck
operating under normal conditions should be:
165-195F (74-91C)
N05019 7/95
(14) SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer indicates the truck speed in miles
per hour (MPH). A speedometer that displays kilometers per hour (KM/H) is available.
Operator Controls
N5-11
(18) VOLTMETER
The voltmeter indicates the voltage of the 24V battery
system. Normal indicated voltage at high RPM is 27
to 28 volts with batteries in fully charged condition.
When key switch (1) is "On" and engine NOT running,
the voltmeter indicates battery charge condition.
(23) BODY UP
The Body Up indicator, when lit, shows that the body
is not completely down on the frame. Truck should
not be driven until body is down and light is off.
(20) BLANK
This space not currently used. Reserved for future
use.
(21) TACHOMETER
N5-12
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
Cummins Engines w/Centry Fuel Control If truck is equipped with a Cummins engine and Centry Fuel Control system, this indicator monitors the
Centry fuel system. During engine operation, if a
"fault" is detected in the system, the light will turn ON
and stay on for "Warning" faults, or it will turn ON and
FLASH for more "Severe" faults that can affect
engine operation and require immediate attention.
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-13
Indicator (38) and controls (39, 40) are used to monitor and control the Retard Speed Control (RSC).
Slippery road position reduces front wheel braking effort while maintaining full braking of the
rear wheels. Reduced braking of the front wheels
assists in steering control on slippery roads, but
increases stopping distance.
N5-14
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-15
Shut down engine immediately if the low oil pressure warning light comes on. Serious damage
may result to engine and engine lubricating system components.
N5-16
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
The engine crankcase pressure warning light indicates high engine crankcase pressure when flashing.
The flashing warning light will be accompanied by the
alarm horn. If this light flashes during engine operation, stop the truck. Shut down engine and alert
maintenance.
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-17
(58) BLANK
The defroster/heater control lever permits the operator to select either defroster or heater.
N5-18
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
(67) HOURMETER
The hourmeter registers the total number of hours
the engine has been in operation.
NOTE: Alarm Horn (12) alerts the operator of a malfunction within a system. When the alarm horn sounds during
operation, a warning light will flash to provide a visual aid for determining which system is malfunctioning.
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-19
2. Turn keyswitch to ON position (engine not running) and move Lamp Test switch lever to the
right (ON) for 1-2 seconds, then release switch
(switch is spring-loaded to the left, "OFF" position).
NOTE: Since this is the Lamp Test switch, all
red warning lights and amber indicator lights
should light up except those that are "BLANK".
The warning horn will also sound.
N5-20
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
N05019 7/95
Operator Controls
N5-21
NOTES:
N5-22
Operator Controls
N05019 7/95
SECTION P
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
INDEX
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-1
Service Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-1
Anti-Freeze Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-1
Hydraulic Tank Service (Filling Instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-1
LUBRICATION CHART (Oil & Grease Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-2
10 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-3
50 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-5
100 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-6
250 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-7
500 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-8
1000 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-9
5000 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-10
10000 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-10
P01012
Index
P1-1
NOTES:
P1-2
Index
P01012
630E
685E
Hydraulic System:
Refer to Hydraulic Tank Service
Wheel Motor Gear Box
(each side)
776
788
189
214
50.0
56.6
314
409
83
108
507
134
17.0
4.5
4542
1200
COOLING SYTEM
ANTI-FREEZE RECOMENDATIONS
(Ethlyene glycol permanent Type Anti-Freeze
Percentage of
Anti-Freeze
Protection
To:
10
+23F
-5C
20
+16F
-9C
25
+11F
-11C
30
+4F
-16C
35
-3F
-19C
40
-12F
-24C
45
-23F
-30C
50
-34F
-36C
55
-48F
-44C
60
-62F
-52C
P02017 1/95
P2-1
P2-2
P02017 1/95
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
1. FAN DRIVE AND TURBOCHARGERS Check for leaks, vibration or unusual noise.
Check alternator and fan belts for condition,
proper tension, and for alignment.
2. RADIATOR - Check coolant level and fill with
proper mixture as shown in Cooling System
Recommendation Chart. Refer to Engine Manual for proper DCA levels.
3. ENGINE - Check oil level.
Refer to engine manufacturers service manual for oil recommendations. (Lube Key A).
4. FUEL FILTERS - Drain water from bottom of
filter housing.
5. FUEL STRAINER - Drain water and sediment
at drain cock.
6. MOTORIZED WHEEL GEARCASE AND
SPEED SENSOR - Refer to G.E. Planned
Maintenance Manual. (Lube Key C & E).
7. HYDRAULIC TANK - Check oil level in tank.
Oil should be visible in sight glass, add oil if
necessary.
Refer to Hydraulic Tank Service.
DO NOT OVERFILL. (Lube Key D).
8. AIR TANK (NOT SHOWN) - Drain water from
tank.
9. BATTERIES (NOT SHOWN) - Check electrolyte level and add water if necessary.
10. AIR CLEANERS (NOT SHOWN) - Check air
cleaner vacuum gauges in operator cab. The
air cleaner(s) should be serviced, if the
gauge(s) shows the following maximum
restriction:
20 in. of H2O vacuum for Detroit Diesel
engine.
25 in. of H2O vacuum for Cummins engine.
NOTE: Lube Key references are to the Lubrication
Specification Chart.
P02017 1/95
P2-3
CHECKED
INITIALS
10. AIR CLEANERS (continued)See Section C of the service manual for servicing air cleaner elements. Empty air cleaner
dust caps.
After service, push the reset button on face of
gauge (if equipped) to allow the needle to
return to zero.
11. WHEELS AND TIRES a. Inspect tires for proper inflation and wear.
b. Inspect for debris embedded in tread or
cuts.
P2-4
P02017 1/95
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
P02017 1/95
P2-5
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
P2-6
P02017 1/95
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
P02017 1/95
P2-7
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
P2-8
P02017 1/95
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
P02017 1/95
P2-9
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
COMMENTS
CHECKED
INITIALS
P2-10
P02017 1/95
772
776/791 787
788
Daily
Daily
Weekly
Weekly
2. Add 0.5 ounce grease to each dirt seal grease fitting. (Note 4)
Daily
Daily
---
---
250
250
---
---
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
500
500
1500
1500
500
500
1500
1500
500
500
2500
2500
500
500
2500
2500
1000
1000
2500
2500
NOTE 1: The numbers in the columns under each motor type represent operating hours, except aas specified.
NOTE 2: Oil samples on Motorized Wheels with less than 1000 hours should be taken twice as often as recommended in the Mintenance Schedule.
NOTE 3: On GE787 and GE788 Motorized Wheels, change the oil after the FIRST 500 hours; thereafter, at the
indicated 1500 hour interval, 1500 hours is maximum. More frequent oil change may be required, depending on
individual mine conditions.
NOTE 4: Motorzed Wheels produced after March, 1988 are equipped with a new dirt seal and do not have grease
fittings.
P04001 11/89
P4-1
772
776/791
787
788
HOURS
HOURS
HOURS HOURS
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
P4-2
P04001 11/89
P.M. HOURS
WORK TO BE DONE
250
500
P.M. HOURS
WORK TO BE DONE
250
500
Blow out commutator area with clean dry air, 70 psi (482 KPa) maximum.
X
X
P.M. HOURS
WORK TO BE DONE
250
500
Check reverser contactors, interlocks and relays for top wear, burning, tip break,
overtravel, tip pressure and frayed, broken or discolored shunts.
P04001 11/89
P4-3
P.M. HOURS
WORK TO BE DONE
Inspect retarding grids; check for damaged parts, foreign objects.
1000
1000
1000
Clean blower inlet filter or screen, make sure it is free from obstructions and foreign objects;
lubricate pillow blocks.
1000
Check flexible air ducts for damage; measure static air pressure (axle box).
250
P.M. HOURS
1000
1000
1000
1000
ENGINE CHECKS*
Check tach calibration, adjust as required.
1000
Check low idle; Retarding RPM; Top End RPM; Adjust as required.
1000
1000
1000
Measure motor field retarding current noting generator / armature voltage. Adjust as
required.
1000
1000
1000
1000
P4-4
P04001 11/89
SECTION Q
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
Accumulators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J3-17
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-7
Aftercooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-1
Aid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-1
Air Cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C5-1
Air Cleaner Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-17
Air Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-1
Air Conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M9-1
Air Cylinder, Throttle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . C6-1
Air Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-4
Air Starter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-4
Air Starter (TDI Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M15-1
Air Starter Lubricator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-11
Air Starter Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-3
Air Starter Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-10
Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2-1
Lubricator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-4
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K1-2
Air Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2-2
Alarm Indicating System (A.I.D.) . . . . . . . . . . D3-1
Alternator (Power Module). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C4-2
Alternator/Wheelmotor Cooling
Air Filter System (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . M4-1
Antifreeze Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . P3-1
Anti-Sway Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-3
AS Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-1
Automatic Drain Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M3-1
Automatic Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-3
B
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2-1
Battery Charging System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2-3
Bearing, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G3-6
Belt Adjustment (Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C4-6
Bleeddown Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-2
Bleeddown Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-2
Blower Filter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M4-1
Body, Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-1
Body, Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-3
Body, Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-2
Body, Position Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-3
Body, Sling Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-3
Body Up Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
Q01011
Brakes
Bleeding Procedure
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J5-6
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J7-5
Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J6-13
Front (Disc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J5-1
Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J7-1
Rear (Disc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J6-1
Brake, Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-1
Breather (Fuel Tank). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B4-2
Bumper Pad (Final Drive Case) . . . . . . . . . . . G5-2
C
Cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-1
Center Case Assembly (Rear Axle) . . . . . . . . G5-1
Charging Procedure, HYDRAIR II . . . . . . . . H4-1
Clutch, Fan Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M6-1
Compressor, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-1
Conditioner, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M9-1
Cooling Blower Warning System . . . . . . . . . . E2-4
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3-1
Creep Down Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L7-1
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hoist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L8-6
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-10
Throttle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C6-1
D
Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2-1
Differential Pressure Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . J3-21
Disc Brakes
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J5-1
Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J7-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J6-1
Door, Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N2-2
Drain Valve (Automatic/Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . K3-3
Drive Case Bumper Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G5-2
Dry/Slippery Road Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-13
Dual Hydraulic Brake Controller . . . . . . . . . . . J3-1
Dump Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-1
Dump Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-3
Alphabetical Index
Q1-1
E
Electrical Checkout Procedure
FL191 (PLCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E3-1
Electrical System Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . R1-1
Ejector, Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-4
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C4-1
Engine - Alternator Mating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C4-2
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M7-1
Engine Coolant & Oil Heaters, 440V . . . . . . .M7-1
Engine Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M13-1
Engine Oil Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M7-1
Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3
F
Fan Drive Clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M6-1
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C4-6
Filters
Air (Hydraulic Tank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-10
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P2-2
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L8-10
Final Drive Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G4-1
Fire Control (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M2-1
Fire Control (Pneumatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M2.2-1
Fire Control (Electric) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M2.3-1
Float Control (Creep Down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L7-1
Flow Amplifier Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-3
Flushing, Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-13
Front Suspension, HYDRAIR II . . . . . . . . . . H2-1
Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J5-1
Front Wheel Hub and Spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . .G3-1
Front Wheel and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G2-1
Fuel Filter - Water Separator (Optional) . . . .M16-1
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B4-1
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-3
Blower & Core. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-4
Water Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-4
Hitch Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G4-1
Hoist Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-1
Hoist Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-4
Hoist Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-6
Hoist Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-3
Hoist Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-4
Hoist Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-1
Hub, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G3-1
HYDRAIR II Suspensions
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2-1
Oil and Nitrogen Specifications . . . . . . . . H4-6
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3-1
HYDRAIR II, Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-1
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-10
Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-13
Motor (Blower Filter System) . . . . . . . . . M4-1
Outlet Strainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-1
Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R1-1
Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
Troubleshooting
Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-9
Steering Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-16
I
Instrument Panel & Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-8
L
G
Gauge (Fuel Tank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B4-2
Generator (Battery Charging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2-3
Governor, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-4
Grille & Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B2-1
Ground Level Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3-3
Guide (Body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-3
Q1-2
Alphabetical Index
E4-1
C6-3
P1-1
K4-4
K2-3
Q01011
M
Main Air Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R1-1
Metric Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-1
Monitor, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16-1
Motorized Wheels (Removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . G5-1
N
Nitrogen Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4-6
O
Oil Specification, HYDRAIR II . . . . . . . . . . . H4-6
Oiling and Charging Procedure, HYDRAIR IIH4-1
Operator Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N4-1
Outlet Strainer (Hydraulic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L3-11
Optional Operator Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M14-1
P
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J7-1
Pedal, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J3-1
Plates, Warning and Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4-1
Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2-1
R
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C3-1
Rear HYDRAIR II Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . H3-1
Rear Wheel Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J6-1
Rear Tire and Rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2-3
Retard Pedal, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2-3
Regulator Valve Radiator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-6
Rims (Tire Removal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2-4
Rock Ejector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B3-4
Rod, Tie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G3-7
Q01011
Alphabetical Index
Q1-3
T
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-1
Tank
Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B4-1
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-11
Throttle Control Air Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C6-1
Throttle Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C6-3
Throttle Treadle Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K5-1
Tie Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G3-7
Tires
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G2-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G2-3
Toe-In Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G3-10
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .M8-1
Torque Table (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5-1
Troubleshooting
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C5-1
Air Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-4
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2-1
Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3-1
Steering Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L5-1
Valves
Bleeddown Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-2
Creep Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L7-1
Drain (Automatic/Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-3
Dual Hydraulic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J3-1
Flow Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-3
Heater Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-16
Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-1
Hoist Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-4
Hoist Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L8-3
Moisture Ejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-3
Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-6
Retarder Treadle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N5-6
Safety (Air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3-2
Solenoid (Air Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K4-3
Solenoid (Dry/Slippery Road) . . . . . . . . N5-13
Throttle Treadle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K5-1
Unloader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .L6-1
Wiper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N3-1
W
U
Unloader Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L6-1
Q1-4
Weights (Truck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Bearing Adjustment (Field). . . . . . . . .
Wheel Cylinders (Steering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Hub and Spindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and Tires
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiggins
Fuel Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tank Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphabetical Index
A2-3
G3-6
G3-7
G3-1
G5-1
G2-1
G2-3
M5-1
M5-1
N2-2
N3-2
N3-1
Q01011
SECTION R
SYSTEM SCHEMATICS
INDEX
AIR SYSTEM (All Hydraulic Brake w/Air Throttle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HA195
R01022 7/94
Schematics
w/Statex III & 24 VDC Relay Circuit Boards
R1-1
NOTES:
R1-2
Schematics
w/Statex III & 24 VDC Relay Circuit Boards
R01022 7/94
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 22 (C B -22)
35
AC C E LE R AT OR B OX
70
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 23 (C B -23)
AC C E LE R AT OR INT E R F AC E C AR D
70, 77
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 24 (C B -24)
36
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 25 (C B -25)
10
66
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 26 (C B -26)
10
50
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 27 (C B -27)
11
51
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 28 (C B -28)
97
ALAR M HOR N
48
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 29 (C B -29)
97
20
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 30 (C B -30)
17
20
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 31 (C B -31)
19
20
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 32 (C B -32)
44
AIR P R E S S UR E S WIT C H
35
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 33 (C B -33)
25
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 34 (C B -34)
34
34
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 35 (C B -35)
33
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 37 (C B -37)
42
AR E OF INE R HE AT E R
35
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 38 (C B -38)
23
31
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 39 (C B -39)
23
31
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 40 (C B -40)
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 42 (C B -42)
30
-B B AC K -UP HOR N
27
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 43 (C B -43)
45
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 44 (C B -44)
B AC K -UP LIG HT S
28
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 45 (C B -45)
28
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 46 (C B -46)
28
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 47 (C B -47)
B AT T E R IE S
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 48 (C B -48)
B AT T E R Y C HE C K INDIC AT OR LIG HT
67
14
B AT T E R Y E QUALIZE R
1, 75
B AT T E R Y E QUALIZE R MONIT OR
26, 68
62
26
62
26
62
26
38
50
32
48
31
C OOLANT LE VE L MODULE
B R AK E LOC K S WIT C H
31
C OOLANT LE VE L P R OB E
47
C OOLANT LE VE L S E NDE R
-C C AB DOME LIG HT S
22
22
C A B T HE R MOS T A T
20
DAS H LIG HT R HE OS T AT
13
67
DAS H LIG HT S
13
67
97
C IG AR LIG HT E R
19
DAT A S T OR E S WIT C H
39
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 13 (C B -13)
14
1, 75
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 14 (C B -14)
16
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 15 (C B -15)
14
30
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 16 (C B -16)
28
DIG IT AL S P E E DOME T E R
13
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 17 (C B -17)
28
DIG IT AL T AC HOME T E R
13
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 18 (C B -18)
29
DIMME R S WIT C H
12
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 19 (C B -19)
27
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 20 (C B -20)
36
C IR C UIT B R E AK E R - 21 (C B -21)
36
-D-
"
"
82, 100
-L -
R E LAY 2 (R Y 2) (AC C )
69
T UR N S IG NAL F LAS HE R
16
31, 62
LADDE R LIG HT S
18
R E LAY B OAR D 1 (R B 1)
15
T UR N S IG NAL S WIT C H
14
18
R E LAY B OAR D 2 (R B 2)
98
T WO S P E E D S WIT C H
LAMP T E S T
46
R E LAY B OAR D 3 (R B 3)
28
29, 45
L IG HT C ONT R OL R E L A Y
98
R E LAY B OAR D 4 (R B 4)
8, 36, 62
10
44
-V-
VOLT ME T E R
44
-W-
R E LAY B OAR D 5 (R B 5)
10
72
R E LAY B OAR D 6 (R B 6)
32
WAS HE R MOT OR
42
35
L INC OL N L UB E S OL E NOID
33
R E T AR D INT E R F AC E C AR D
81
50
76
L INC OL N L UB E TIME R
33
28
WE IG HT S E NS OR L E F T F R ONT
98
77
66
86
WE IG HT S E NS OR L E F T R E A R
98
39
87
WE IG HT S E NS OR R IG HT F R ONT
98
66
87
WE IG HT S E NS OR R IG HT R E A R
98
67
66
88
72
17
64
89
43
E NG INE T E MP E R AT UR E G AUG E
24
64
89
WIP E R MOT OR
43
E NG INE T E MP E R AT UR E S E NDE R
24
68
90
E NG INE WAT E R T E MP E R AT UR E S E NS OR
50
40
91
10
91
-F F A N C L UT C H S OL E NOID
21
79
F A N S WIT C H - C OOL A NT
21
L OW OIL L E VE L INDIC A T OR L IG HT
52
78
19
65
78
F A N S WIT C H - HE A T E XC HA NG E R
21
65
R E VE R S E R
27
F LAS HE R R E LAY
16
65
R E VE R S E R C OILS
85
F OG L IG HT S
17
11
F OG L IG HT S WIT C H
17
MF C C ONT AC T OR
85
10
F UE L G AUG E
23
70
F US E (C IG AR LIG HT E R )
19
70
-M-
-G -
-O-
31
S E LE C T OR S WIT C H
7, 41
G F C ONT AC T OR
83
24
S E R IAL P OR T C ONNE C T OR
100, 102
G F R C ONT AC T OR
84
60
40
S HUTT E R S OL E NOID
19
-HHAZAR D S WIT C H
16
29
HE ADLIG HT S WIT C H
12
36
30
HIG H B E AM HE ADLIG HT S
10
63
30
12
P AR K ING B R AK E P R E S S UR E S WIT C H
36
S TA R T E R S OL E NOIDS (E L E C T R IC A L )
54
41
S TA R T E R S , (E L E C T R IC A L )
10
P AR K ING B R AK E S WIT C H
42
36
HIG H MOUNT L OW B E A M HE A DL IG HT S
P A Y L OA D L IG HTS
98
73
63
P A Y L OA D ME T E R
98
74
25
P A Y L OA D ME T E R C ONT R OL L E R
98
S T OP LIG HT R E LAY
29
HOR N B UT T ON
37
S TOP LIG HT S
14
HOR N R E LAY
37
37
P 1 C ONT AC TOR
82
HOUR ME T E R
39
P 2 C ONT A C T OR
63
-I-
-P -
83
-R -
59
-T-
T AIL LIG HT S
14
69
23
15
IC L INOME T E R
99
R D1 & R D2
14
15
21
38
16
21
65
15
R E AR DY NAMIC R E T AR D LIG HT
28
T UR N INDIC AT OR LIG HT LE F T
15
R E LAY 1 (R Y 1) (AC C )
70
T UR N INDIC AT OR LIG HT R IG HT
16
-K K E Y S WIT C H
HE400 JUNE 94
SECTION 1